OUTLANDER

OWNER’S MANUAL

English
 Foreword Throughout this owner’s manual, the words Information for petrol station service
E09200102098 WARNING and CAUTION appear. E09300101597

Thank you for selecting a MITSUBISHI MOTORS product as These serve as reminders to be especially careful. Failure to fol-
your new vehicle. low instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your 2WD models 63 litres
Capacity
This owner’s manual will add to your understanding and full vehicle. 4WD models 60 litres
enjoyment of the many fine features of this vehicle. Fuel
It contains information prepared to acquaint you with the ! WARNING Fuel requirements
Cetane number (EN590)
indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or 51 or higher
proper way to operate and maintain your vehicle for the utmost
in driving pleasure. death if instructions are not followed. ● “VW 50501/50601”
Engine oil
Refer to the “Maintenance” section of this owner’s manual for the SAE viscosity.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to ! CAUTION
means hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor Tyre inflation pressure Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the tyre inflation pressure.
make changes relating to design and specifications and/or to
make additions to or improvements in this product without any personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
obligation to install them on previously manufactured prod- You will see another important symbol:
! CAUTION
ucts. NOTE: gives helpful information. ● Your vehicle is designed to use only diesel fuel that meets the EN 590 standard.
It is an absolute requirement for the driver to strictly observe Use of any other type of diesel fuel can adversely affect the engine.
*: indicates optional equipment.
all laws and regulations concerning vehicles.
It may differ according to the sales classifica-
This owner’s manual has been written in compliance with such tion; refer to the sales catalogue.
laws and regulations, but some of the contents may become Abbreviations used in this owner’s manual:
contradictory with later amendment of the laws and regula- LHD: Left-Hand Drive
tions. RHD: Right-Hand Drive
M/T: Manual Transmission
Please leave this owner’s manual in this vehicle at time of A/T: Automatic Transmission
resale. The next owner will appreciate having access to the
information contained in this owner’s manual.
Repairs to your vehicle:
Vehicles in the warranty period:
All warranty repairs must be carried out by a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
OGXE08E1
Vehicles outside the warranty period:
Where the vehicle is repaired is at the owner’s discretion. JEA032227 8
Table of contents
Overview

General information

Locking and unlocking 1

Seat and seat belts 2

Instruments and controls 3

Starting and driving 4

For pleasant driving 5

For emergencies 6

Vehicle care 7

Maintenance 8

Specifications 9
Overview

Instruments and Controls

E00100102818

LHD (Left-hand drive)

Headlamp levelling switch* P. 3-65

Sonar switch* P. 4-78 Combination headlamps and dipper switch P. 3-60
Turn-signal lever P. 3-68
Front fog lamp switch* P. 3-69
Instruments P. 3-2

Active stability control (ASC) OFF

switch* P. 4-65
Shift paddles*
P. 4-32, 4-42

Windscreen wiper and washer

switch P. 3-71
Rear window wiper and washer
switch P. 3-77

Cruise control switch* P. 4-68

Steering wheel audio remote control

Ignition switch P. 4-15
switches* P. 5-68

Voice recognition switch for hands-free Steering wheel height

Bluetooth® cellular phone interface* Supplemental restraint system (SRS) airbag adjustment lever P. 4-9
P. 5-80 (for driver’s seat) P. 2-55, 2-62
Horn switch P. 3-81
 Overview

RHD (Right-hand drive) Headlamp levelling switch P. 3-65

Sonar switch* P. 4-78
Windscreen wiper and washer
switch P. 3-71
Rear window wiper and washer
Instruments P. 3-2 switch P. 3-77

Active stability control (ASC) OFF

switch* P. 4-65

Shift paddles*
P. 4-32, 4-42
Combination headlamps and
dipper switch P. 3-60
Turn-signal lever P. 3-68
Front fog lamp switch P. 3-69

Steering wheel audio remote

control switches P. 5-68
Voice recognition switch for
hands-free Bluetooth® cellular
phone interface P. 5-80 Cruise control switch* P. 4-68
Steering wheel height adjustment
lever P. 4-9 Ignition switch P. 4-15
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) airbag (for driver’s seat) P. 2-55, 2-62
Horn switch P. 3-81
Overview

LHD (Left-hand drive)

Digital clock* P. 5-76 Centre ventilators P. 5-2 Supplemental restraint system
Audio system* P. 5-16, 5-40 (SRS)-airbag (for front passen-
HDD navigation & Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System* ger’s seat) P. 2-55, 2-62
Hazard warning flasher switch P. 3-69
Upper glove box P. 5-126
Air conditioning P. 5-7

Built-in cup holder P. 5-133

Side ventilators P. 5-2

Personal box P. 5-131

Fuse box P. 8-29
Lower glove box P. 5-128
Bonnet release lever P. 8-3 Front passenger’s airbag
ON-OFF switch P. 2-60
Rear window demister switch P. 3-80
Fuel tank filler door release
Wiper de-icer switch* P. 3-79
lever P. 3
Cup holder P. 5-133 Accessory socket P. 5-119
Gearshift or selector lever P. 4-25
Drive mode selector P. 4-47 Parking brake lever P. 4-6
 Overview

RHD (Right-hand drive)

Centre ventilators Digital clock* P. 5-76
Supplemental restraint system P. 5-2 Audio system* P. 5-16, 5-40
(SRS)-airbag (for front passen- HDD navigation & Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System*
ger’s seat) P. 2-55, 2-62 Hazard warning flasher switch P. 3-69

Upper glove box P. 5-126

Built-in cup holder P. 5-133

Side ventilators P. 5-2

Personal box P. 5-131

Lower glove box P. 5-128 Bonnet release lever

Front passenger’s airbag P. 8-3
ON-OFF switch P. 2-60
Fuse box P. 8-29
Rear window demister switch P. 3-80
Wiper de-icer switch* P. 3-79 Fuel tank filler door release lever P. 3
Air conditioning P. 5-7
Accessory socket P. 5-119 Parking brake lever P. 4-6
Gearshift or selector lever Drive mode selector
P. 4-25 P. 4-47 Cup holder P. 5-133
Overview

Interior
E00100202082

Outside rear-view mirror switch P. 4-10

Adjustable seat belt anchor P. 2-38 Lock switch

Seat belts P. 2-34 P. 1-56

Room lamp (rear) P. 5-121 Central door lock switch

P. 1-43
Assist grip P. 5-139
Coat hook P. 5-139 Electric window control switch P. 1-56
Sun visors P. 5-118
Luggage room lamp P. 5-121 Vanity mirror P. 5-119
Card holder P. 5-118
Inside rear-view mirror P.4-9

Upper instrument panel box

P. 5-131
Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular
phone interface system with
voice recognition* P. 5-80

Accessory socket P. 5-119

Front seat P. 2-6

Underfloor-stowable third seat Armrest P. 2-9
Second seat P. 2-11
(7 persons) P. 2-13 Accessory socket P. 5-119
 Overview

LHD (Left-hand drive)

Head restraints P. 2-23

Sunglasses holder P. 5-132

SRS curtain airbag* P. 2-55, 2-67

Sunroof switch*
P. 1-61
Cargo area cover P. 5-137 Map lamp & room
lamp (front) P. 5-121

Quarter trim box P. 5-132

Bottle holder P. 5-135

Luggage floor box (with 5 seat configuration)
P. 5-133 Armrest P. 2-12
Cup holder P. 5-134
Overview

Outside rear-view mirror switch P. 4-10 RHD (Right-hand drive)

Central door lock Adjustable seat belt anchor P. 2-38

switch P. 1-43 Seat belts P. 2-34

Lock switch P. 1-56 Room lamp (rear) P. 5-121

Electric window control switch P. 1-56 Assist grip P. 5-139

Coat hook P. 5-139
Sun visor P. 5-118
Card holder P. 5-118 Luggage room lamp
Vanity mirror P. 5-119 P. 5-121

Inside rear-view mirror

P. 4-9

Upper instrument panel box

P. 5-131 Underfloor-stowable
third seat (7 persons)
Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular P. 2-13
phone interface system with voice
recognition P. 5-80
Front seat P. 2-6

Armrest P. 2-9 Second seat P. 2-11

Accessory socket P. 5-119
 Overview

RHD (Right-hand drive)

Head restraints P. 2-23

Sunglasses holder P. 5-132

SRS curtain airbag* P. 2-55, 2-67

Sunroof switch* P. 1-61

Map lamp & room
lamp (front) P. 5-121 Cargo area cover
P. 5-137

Bottle holder P. 5-135

Luggage floor box (with 5 seat

Armrest P. 2-12
configuration) P. 5-133
Cup holder P. 5-134
Overview

Luggage area
E00100400699

Accessory socket P. 5-119

Luggage hook P. 5-140 Luggage hook P. 5-140

Jack P. 6-14
Tools P. 6-14

Luggage hook P. 5-140 Luggage hook P. 5-140

 Overview

Exterior
E00100502274

Windscreen wipers P. 3-71 Sunroof* P. 1-61

Electric window control P. 1-56

Bonnet P. 8-3
Fuel tank filler P. 3

Outside rear-view mirror P. 4-10

Headlamps P. 3-60, 8-41, 8-43
Position lamps P. 3-60, 8-41, 8-46
Turn-signal lamps/Hazard warning lamps
P. 3-68, 8-41, 8-48 Front fog lamps* Turn-signal lamps P. 3-68, 8-41, 8-49
P. 3-69, 8-41, 8-49 Hazard warning lamps P. 3-69
Overview

Split tailgate P. 1-49

Keyless entry system P. 1-6

Antenna P. 5-75 Keyless operation system* P. 1-10
Locking and unlocking the doors P. 1-41

Rear spoiler

Rear window wiper

P. 3-77
Rear view camera
P. 4-82

Rear fog lamp

P. 3-70, 8-41, 8-52 Size of tyres and wheels P. 9-12
Tyre inflation pressures P. 8-18
Changing tyres P. 6-17
Licence plate lamps Tyre rotation P. 8-20
P. 3-60, 8-41, 8-57 Tyre chains P. 8-22

Rear parking sensor * P. 4-76 Turn-signal lamps/Hazard warning lamps

Spare wheel P. 6-19 P. 3-68, 8-41, 8-54
Reversing lamps P. 3-60, 8-41, 8-56 Stop lamps/Tail lamps
P. 3-60, 8-41, 8-54
General information

Fuel selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Filling the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Installation of accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Modification/alterations to the electrical
or fuel systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety and disposal information for used engine oil 8
General information

Fuel selection ● Repeatedly driving short distances at very low speeds can
E00200101375 cause deposits in the fuel system and engine, which can
lead to poor starting ability or acceleration. If these prob-
Petrol-powered vehicles lems occur, add a detergent additive to the petrol when
Unleaded petrol, octane number (EN228) refuelling. The additive will remove the deposits, thereby
Recommended 95 RON or higher returning the engine to a normal condition. Be sure to use
a genuine MITSUBISHI FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER.
Diesel-powered vehicles
Using an unsuitable additive could cause engine malfunc-
Cetane number (EN590)
tion. For details, please contact your MITSUBISHI
51 or higher
MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
! CAUTION
● With petrol-powered vehicles, the use of leaded fuel
can result in serious damage to the engine and cata-
lytic converter.
● Diesel-powered vehicles are designed to use only die-
sel fuel that meets the EN 590 standard.
Use of any other type of diesel fuel can adversely
affect the engine.

NOTE
● Since petrol-powered vehicles have a knock control sys-
tem, you can use unleaded petrol 90 RON in emergencies
if unleaded petrol 95 RON or higher is not available.
In such cases, no adjustments of the engine are necessary.
However, with unleaded petrol of 90 RON engine per-
formance will be reduced.

2
 General information

Filling the fuel tank Fuel tank capacity

E00200201321 2WD models: 63 litres
4WD models: 60 litres
! WARNING Refuelling
● When handling fuel, comply with the safety regula- 1. Before filling your vehicle with fuel, turn off the engine.
tions displayed by garages and filling stations. 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear left side of your
● Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to get rid of vehicle.
your body’s static electricity by touching a metal Open the fuel tank filler door by pulling the release lever
part of either the car or the fuel pump. Any static located on the side of the driver’s seat.
electricity on your body could create a spark that
will ignite fuel vapour. LHD
● Perform the entire refuelling process (opening the
fuel tank filler door, removing the fuel cap, etc.) by
yourself. Do not allow any other person to come
near the fuel tank filler. Discharge of static electric-
ity from an assisting person might ignite the fuel
vapours, too.
● Do not move away from the fuel tank filler until
refuelling is finished. If you move away and do
something else (for example, cleaning your wind-
screen) partway through the refuelling process, you
could pick up a fresh charge of static electricity.
● If the tank cap must be replaced, use only a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS original part.

3
General information

RHD 3. Remove the fuel cap.

Open the fuel tank filler neck by slowly turning the cap
anticlockwise.

Except for 2200 models

1- Remove
2- Close

4
 General information

For 2200 models ! CAUTION

● The fuel cap does not turn more than 90 degrees.
Turning it further by force could damage the fuel
cap.
● Since the fuel system may be under pressure,
remove the fuel cap slowly. This relieves any pres-
sure or vacuum that might have built up in the fuel
tank. If you hear a hissing sound from the cap, wait
until it stops before removing the cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.

4. Insert the filler gun into the tank port as far as it will go.

1- Remove ! CAUTION
2- Close ● Do not tilt the filler gun.

5. After the second automatic stop, do not fill with fuel any-
more.
6. Reattach the fuel cap.
[Except for 2200 models]
To close, turn the tank filler cap slowly clockwise until
you hear clicking sounds and then gently push the fuel
tank filler door shut.
[For 2200 models]
Fit the fuel cap with the cap handle sideways and turn it
clockwise.

5
General information

Installation of accessories Important points!

E00200300598 Due to large number of accessory and replacement parts of dif-
We recommend you to consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS ferent manufactures available in the market, it is not possible,
Authorised Service Point. not only for MITSUBISHI MOTORS, but also a MITSUBISHI
● The installation of accessories, optional components, etc., MOTORS Authorised Service Point, to check whether the
should only be carried out within the limits prescribed by attachment or installation of such parts affects the overall
law in your country, and in accordance with the guidelines safety of your MITSUBISHI-vehicle.
and warnings contained within the documents accompa-
nying this vehicle. Even when such parts are officially authorised, for example by
● Installing electric components incorrectly could lead to a a “general operators permit” (an appraisal for the part) or
fire. See the “Modification/alterations to the electrical or through the execution of the part in an officially approved man-
fuel systems” section within this owner’s manual ner of construction, or when a single operation permit follow-
● Using a cellular phone or radio set inside the vehicle with- ing the attachment or installation of such parts, it cannot be
out an external antenna may cause electrical system inter- deduced from that alone, that the driving safety of your vehi-
ference, which could lead to unsafe vehicle operation. cles has not been affected.
● Tyres and wheels which do not meet specifications must
not be used. Consider also that there basically exists no liability on the part
Refer to the “Specifications” section for information of the appraiser or the official. Maximum safety can only be
regarding wheel and tyre sizes. ensured with parts recommended, sold and fitted or installed by
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS authorised Service Point
(MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine replacement parts and
MITSUBISHI MOTORS accessories). The same also pertains
to modifications of MITSUBISHI vehicles with respect to the
production specifications. For safety reasons, do not attempt
any modifications other than those that follow the recommen-
dations of a MITSUBISHI MOTORS authorised Service Point.

6
 General information

Modification/alterations to the electrical or Genuine Parts

fuel systems E00200500499

MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great lengths to bring you

E00200400368

MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION has always manu- a superbly crafted automobile offering the highest quality and
factured safe, high quality vehicles. In order to maintain this dependability.
safety and quality, it is important that any accessory that is to Use MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts, designed and
be fitted, or any modifications carried out which involve the manufactured to maintain your MITSUBISHI MOTORS auto-
electrical or fuel systems, should be carried out in accordance mobile at top performance. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine
with MITSUBISHI guidelines. Parts are identified by this mark and are available at all
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Points.
! CAUTION
● If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or
improper installation methods are used (protective
fuses not included, etc.), electronic devices may be
adversely affected, resulting in a fire or other acci-
dent.

7
General information

Safety and disposal information for used

engine oil
E00200600155

! WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact may cause serious
skin disorders, including dermatitis and cancer.
● Avoid contact with the skin as far as possible and
wash thoroughly after any contact.
● Keep used engine oils out of reach of children.

Protect the environment

It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses and soil. Use
authorised waste collection facilities, including civic amenity
sites and garages providing facilities for disposal of used oil
and used oil filters. If in doubt, contact your local authority for
advice on disposal.

8
Locking and unlocking

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 2
Electronic immobiliser
(Anti-theft starting system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 4
Keyless entry system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 6
1
Keyless operation system (KOS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 10
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 41
Central door locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 43
Dead Lock System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 45
“Child-protection” rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 48
Split tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 49
Tailgate emergency release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 54
Electric window control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 56
Sunroof*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 61
 Locking and unlocking

Keys Type 2
E00300101217

Type 1, Type 2, Type 3

The keys fit all locks.

Type 1
1

1- Keyless entry key

(with electronic immobiliser)
2- Key number tag

1- Electronic immobiliser key

2- Key number tag

1-2
 Locking and unlocking
Type 4
Type 3 The emergency key fits all locks.

Type 4

1- Keyless entry key

(with electronic immobiliser)
2- Key number tag 1- Keyless operation key
(with electronic immobiliser and lock remote control but-
tons)
2- Emergency key
3- Key number tag

1-3
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE Electronic immobiliser

● The key number is stamped on the tag as indicated in the
illustration. (Anti-theft starting system)
E00300201146
Make a record of the key number and store the key and [For vehicles equipped with keyless operation key]
key number tag in separate places so that you can order a For information on operations for vehicles equipped with key-
key in case the original keys are lost. less operation system, refer to “keyless operation system: Elec-
● The key is a precision electronic part with a built-in signal tronic immobiliser (Anti-theft starting system on page 1-18.
1 transmitter. Please observe the following to prevent mal-
functions. [For vehicles equipped with keyless operation key]
• Do not leave this chip key in places exposed to direct The electronic immobiliser is designed to significantly reduce
sunlight, for example on the dashboard. the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to
• Do not disassemble or modify it. immobilise the vehicle if starting is attempted with an invalid
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject it to strong ignition key. Starting the engine is only possible with a key
impact. “registered” in the immobiliser system.
• Do not expose it to water.
• Keep it away from magnetic key holders.
• Keep it away from audio systems, personal computers,
TVs, and other equipment that generates a magnetic
field.
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners or similar equip-
ment.
• Do not leave the key in places exposed to high tempera-
tures or high humidity.
● The engine is designed so that it will not start if the ID
code registered in the immobiliser computer and the key’s
ID code do not match. Refer to the section entitled “Elec-
tronic immobiliser” for details and key usage.

1-4
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE
● In the following cases, the vehicle may not be able to
receive the registered ID code from the key and the engine
may not start.
• When the key comes into contact with a key ring or
another metallic or magnetic object (Type A)
• When the key grip comes into contact with the metal of
another key 1
(Type B)
• When the key contacts or is close to other immobilising
keys (including keys of other vehicles) (Type C)
In these cases remove the object or additional key from
the vehicle key. Then try to restart the engine. If the
engine does not start, contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorised Service Point.

1-5
 Locking and unlocking
● Two keys are provided. Keyless entry system*
If you lose one of them, order a key from your MITSUBI- E00300301411
SHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point as soon as possi- Press the corresponding remote control switch on the key and
ble. To obtain a key, take your vehicle and any remaining all doors as well as the tailgate will lock or unlock respectively.
key to a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service These switches can also operate the door mirrors and electric
Point. All the keys have to be re-registered in the immobi- windows.
liser computer unit. The immobiliser can register up to 8
1 different keys for use. Type 1 Type 2

! CAUTION
● Do not modify or add parts to the immobiliser sys-
tem. Doing so could cause the immobiliser to mal-
function.

1- LOCK switch
2- UNLOCK switch
3- Indicator lamp
4- Release button

1-6
 Locking and unlocking

To lock To unlock
Press the LOCK switch (1) and all doors and the tailgate will Press the UNLOCK switch (2) and all doors and the tailgate
be locked. The turn-signal lamps will blink once when the will be unlocked. If the doors are unlocked when the room
doors are locked. lamp switch is in the middle position, the room lamp will illu-
minate for approximately 15 seconds and the turn-signal lamps
NOTE will blink twice.
● On a vehicle equipped with a Dead Lock System, pressing
the LOCK switch (1) twice in succession will set the Dead NOTE 1
Lock System. (Refer to “Setting the system” on page ● The indicator lamp (3) turns on each time a switch is
1-45.) pressed. (Type 1 only)
● If you have pressed the UNLOCK switch (2), but do not
open any of the doors or the tailgate within approximately
30 seconds, relocking will automatically occur. On vehi-
cles with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System
(MMCS), this function can be customised via the display.
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details.

1-7
 Locking and unlocking
● It is possible to modify functions as follows: Operation of the Dead Lock System
For further information, please contact your MITSUBI- On a vehicle equipped with a Dead Lock System, it is possible
SHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point. On vehicles to set the Dead Lock System using the remote controller.
with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System (Refer to “Dead Lock System” on page 1-45.)
(MMCS), this function can be customised via the display.
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details. Linked operation of electric windows
• The time until automatic relocking can be changed.
1 • The confirmation function (flashing of the turn-signal
To close
lamps) can be set to operate only when the doors and You can close the windows within 30 seconds after locking the
doors with the LOCK switch (1) by pressing the switch a sec-
tailgate are locked or only when the doors and tailgate
are unlocked. ond time for at least 1 second.
• The confirmation function (this indicates the locking or To stop the windows part-way, press the LOCK switch again or
press the UNLOCK switch (2).
unlocking of the doors and tailgate with a flash of the
turn-signal lamps) can be deactivated.
• It is possible to change the number of times the turn-sig- ! WARNING
nal lamps are flashed by the confirmation function. ● Ensure that no one is near the door windows before
closing them by pressing the remote control switch
on the key. Hands or fingers could be caught in a
closing window and injured.

1-8
 Locking and unlocking

Linked operation of outside rear-view mirrors ● The keyless entry system does not operate under the fol-
lowing conditions:
To retract • The key is left in the key cylinder.
You can fold in the outside rear-view mirrors within 30 seconds • The door or tailgate is open.
after locking the doors and tailgate with the LOCK switch (1) ● The remote control switches will function from within
by pressing the switch twice in rapid succession. about 4 m of the vehicle. However, the operating range of
To fold out the remote control switch may vary if the vehicle is
You can fold out the outside rear-view mirrors within 30 sec-
located near a TV transmitting tower, power station or 1
radio broadcasting station.
onds after unlocking the doors and tailgate with the UNLOCK
● If either of the following problems occurs, the battery may
switch (2) by pressing the switch twice in rapid succession.
be discharged. Have the battery replaced by a
Operation of the key (Type 2 only) MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
• Although the remote control switch is operated within
To fold the correct distance from the vehicle, neither the doors
Fold the key into the casing while pressing the Release button nor tailgate will lock or unlock.
(4). • The indicator lamp (3) is dim or does not come on.
To fold out (Type 1 only)
● In case of loss or damage of your key with remote control
Press the Release button (4).
switches please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
NOTE Authorised Service Point for a replacement.
● The function of the remote control switches can be modi- ● If you wish to have an additional key with remote control,
fied as stated below. Please consult your MITSUBISHI pl. contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
MOTORS Authorised Service Point. Service Point.
• Disable the key-linked “Close” function for the electric A maximum of 8 keys with remote control can be set for
windows. your vehicle.
• Add a key-linked ’Open’ function for electric windows.
• Link the folding-in and folding-out of the outside rear-
view mirrors to door locking and unlocking.
• Disable all operations.

1-9
 Locking and unlocking

Keyless operation system (KOS)*

E00305600106

On vehicles with keyless operation system or KOS you can

lock and unlock the doors as well as the tailgate and start the
engine simply by carrying the KOS key or electronic key with
you.
In addition the KOS key also features lock remote control
1 switches just like the normal key with remote control switches
of the keyless entry system.
Refer to “Keyless operation system (KOS): Keyless entry sys-
tem” on page 1-38.
The driver should always carry the KOS key (keyless operation
key). This electronic key is necessary for locking and unlock-
ing the doors and tailgate, starting the engine and operating the
vehicle. Therefore, before locking and leaving the vehicle,
make sure that you have the KOS key (keyless operation key)
on you.

! WARNING
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers or
implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators should not
go near the exterior transmitters (A) or the interior
transmitters (B) of the KOS system. The radio
waves used by the keyless operation system could
adversely affect implanted cardiac pacemakers or
cardiovascular defibrillators.

1-10
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE
! WARNING ● The KOS key employs ultra-weak electromagnetic waves.
● When using electromedical devices other than In the following cases, the keyless operation system may
implanted cardiac pacemakers or implantable car- not operate properly or become unstable.
diovascular-defibrillators, contact your doctor or • In the vicinity of equipment that emits strong radio
electromedical device manufacturer ahead of time to waves, such as: TV transmitting towers, power stations,
determine the affects of radio waves on such devices. radio broadcasting stations or airports.
In general, the function of electromedical devices • If the KOS key is carried close to a communications 1
can be affected by radio waves. device such as a cell phone or radio set, or kept close to
● The keyless operation system (KOS) can be disa- an electronic device such as a personal computer.
bled. For further information, please contact your • If the KOS key is touching or covered by a metal object.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point. • If a keyless entry system is being used nearby.
• When the KOS key battery is worn out.
You can limit the possible operations of the keyless opera- • When the KOS key is placed in an area with strong radio
tion system as listed below. (The functions of the KOS waves or noise.
system can be reduced to those of a conventional keyless In such cases, use the emergency key.
entry system). Please consult your MITSUBISHI Refer to “Operation without keyless operation function”
MOTORS Authorised Service Point. On vehicles with the on page 1-38.
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System (MMCS), this • Since the KOS key has to prompting signals in order to
function can be customised via the display. Refer to the initiate communication with the transmitters in the vehi-
separate owner’s manual for details. cle, the battery continually wears down regardless of the
• You can limit operations to the locking and unlocking of KOS key’s use. The battery life is 1 to 3 years, depend-
doors and the tailgate. ing on usage conditions. When the battery wears out,
• You can limit operations to starting the engine. have it replaced at your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorised Service Point.
When functions of the keyless operation system (KOS) ● Since the KOS key continually receives signals, strong
are modified, the transmitters operate as follows. radio wave reception could affect battery wear. Do not
• Only locking and unlocking doors: exterior and interior leave the key near a TV, PC, or other electronic device.
transmitters
• Only starting the engine: interior transmitter

1-11
 Locking and unlocking

Operating range of the KOS system Operating range for locking and unlocking of doors
(keyless operation system) and tailgate
E00305700093 E00306200095

When carrying the KOS key you need to enter the operating The operating range extends about 70 cm from the driver’s
range of the keyless operation system in order to become able door handle, front passenger’s door handle, and tailgate handle.
to operate a door or tailgate switch or handle provided the ID
code of your key has been successfully verified by the system.
1 You can only lock or unlock the doors and tailgate and start the
engine if the ID codes of your KOS key and the vehicle match.

*: Forward direction
: Operating range

NOTE
● If the KOS key battery is wearing out or there are strong
electromagnetic waves or noise present, the operating
range may become smaller and operation may become
unstable.

1-12
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE Operating range for starting the engine

● Locking and unlocking are only possible when the door or E00306300012

tailgate is operated while the KOS key is being detected. The operating range is the interior of the vehicle.
● Operation may not be possible if you are too close to the
front door, door window, or tailgate.
● Even though the KOS key is within 70 cm of the driver’s
door handle, front passenger’s door handle, or tailgate
handle, the system may not operate if the key is near the 1
ground or positioned too high.
● If the KOS key is within the system’s operating range,
even someone who is not carrying the KOS key can lock
and unlock the doors and tailgate by operating the driver’s
door, front passenger’s door switch or tailgate handle.

*: Forward direction
: Operating range
NOTE
● Even if it is within the operating range, if the keyless
operation key is in a small item holder such as the glove
box, on top of the instrument panel, door pocket or in the
luggage area, it may be impossible to start the engine.
● If you are too close to the door or door window, the engine
may start even though the keyless operation key is outside
the vehicle.

1-13
 Locking and unlocking

Operation with keyless operation function Driver’s door and front passenger’s door switches
E00305800094

Locking the doors and tailgate

When you are carrying the KOS key and press the “LOCK”
switch (A) on the driver’s door, front passenger’s door, or tail-
gate within the system’s operating range, the doors and the tail-
gate will lock.
1 Also refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors, Central door
locks, tailgate” on pages 1-41, 1-43, 1-49.

Tailgate switch

1-14
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE Unlocking the doors and tailgate

● The keyless operation function does not work under the When you are carrying the KOS key and grip the handle of the
following conditions: driver’s door or front passenger’s door or pull on the tailgate
• The KOS key is inside the vehicle. handle within the system’s operating range, the doors and the
• A door or the tailgate is open or ajar. tailgate will unlock.
• The ignition switch is not in the “LOCK” position. Also refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors, Central door
• The emergency key is in the ignition switch. locks, tailgate” on pages 1-41, 1-43, 1-49.
● To check whether the vehicle is locked, pull on the door or 1
tailgate handle within about 3 seconds after locking the Front door handle Tailgate handle
vehicle. If you wait more than 3 seconds and pull on one
of the handles, the doors and tailgate will unlock.
The time allowed for checking whether the vehicle is
locked can be adjusted. For further information, please
contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service
Point. On vehicles with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communi-
cation System (MMCS), this function can be customised
via the display. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
details.

1-15
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE ● To unlock, grip the sensor (B) on the rear of a door handle
● The keyless operation function does not work under the firmly, check that the doors and tailgate unlock, and then
following conditions: pull the handle (A). Unlocking may be delayed or pre-
• The KOS key is inside the vehicle. vented under the following conditions:
• A door or the tailgate is open or ajar. • You do not properly touch the sensor on the rear of the
• The ignition switch is not in the “LOCK” position. handle.
• The emergency key is in the ignition switch. • You touch the sensor on the rear of the handle with
1 ● To allow for checking whether the doors and tailgate are gloves such as leather gloves or ski gloves.
locked, you cannot unlock them for 3 seconds after lock- • You are also carrying objects such as KOS key for
ing them. another vehicle, a communications device that emits
● The time allowed for checking whether the vehicle is electromagnetic waves, or an electronic device.
locked can be adjusted. For further information, please
contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service
Point. On vehicles with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communi-
cation System (MMCS), this function can be customised
via the display. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
details.

1-16
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE Confirmation function for locking and unlocking

● If you pull on the door handle too quickly, it may not The system operation can be confirmed as shown below. How-
unlock. In this case, grip the handle again, check that the ever, the room lamp will only illuminate if the room lamp
doors and tailgate have been unlocked, and then pull on switch is in the middle position.
the handle.
● If the door handle is exposed to a large quantity of water, When locking: The turn-signal lamps blink once.
for example during strong rainfall or in a car wash while When unlocking: The room lamp illuminates for about 15 sec-
the KOS key is within the operating range of the exterior onds and the turn-signal lamps blink twice. 1
transmitter, the keyless operation system may be triggered NOTE
and the vehicle will be unlocked. If this happens, the vehi- ● This function can be modified as stated below. For further
cle is automatically locked again after about 30 seconds. information, please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
On vehicles with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Authorised Service Point.
System (MMCS), this function can be customised via the • Enable the confirmation function (flashing of the turn-
display. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details. signal lamps) only when the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
• Disable the operation confirmation function (flashing of
turn-signal lamps).
• Change the number of flashes (flashing of turn-signal
lamps) for the operation confirmation function.

1-17
 Locking and unlocking

Retracting the outside rear-view mirrors Electronic immobiliser

You can fold in the outside rear-view mirrors within 30 seconds (Anti-theft starting system)
after locking the doors and tailgate with the LOCK switch by E00306400101

pressing the switch twice in rapid succession. The electronic immobiliser is designed to significantly reduce
the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to
Closing the door windows immobilise the vehicle if starting is attempted with an invalid
You can close the windows within 30 seconds after locking the ignition key. Starting the engine is only possible with a key
1 doors with the LOCK switch by pressing the switch a second “registered” in the immobiliser system.
time for at least 1 second. All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been pro-
NOTE grammed into the vehicle’s electronics. Refer to “Keyless oper-
● The switch operations for the door and tailgate can be ation system : Ignition switch” on page1-19,1-30.
changed as follows. For further information, please con-
tact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service
NOTE
● If you lose one of the KOS keys, order a key from your
Point. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point as
• Disable the key-linked “Close” function for the electric soon as possible.
windows. To obtain a key, take your vehicle and any remaining key
• Link the outside rear-view mirror retraction to door to a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
locking. All the keys have to be re-registered in the immobiliser
• Disable all operations. computer unit. The immobiliser can register up to 4 differ-
ent keys.

1-18
 Locking and unlocking

Ignition switch ACC

E00306500102 The engine is stopped, but the audio system and other electric
In order to prevent theft, the engine will not start unless a pre- devices can be operated.
registered keyless operation key is used. (Engine immobiliser
function) ON
Provided you are carrying the KOS key, you can start the The engine is running and all of the vehicle’s electrical devices
engine by turning the ignition switch. can be operated.
Also refer to “Starting and driving: Starting the engine” on START 1
page 4-20. The starter motor operates. Once the engine starts, let go of the
key. The key will automatically return to the “ON” position.
NOTE
● Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobiliser.
To start the engine, the ID code which the transponder
inside the key sends must match the one registered to the
immobiliser computer.
(Refer to “Electronic immobiliser (Anti-theft starting sys-
tem)” on page 1-18.)

LOCK (PUSH OFF)

The position where the steering wheel is locked.
LOCK (PUSH ON)
When the ID code verification inside the vehicle produces a
match, the steering wheel lock is released and the ignition
switch can be turned.

1-19
 Locking and unlocking

When turning from “LOCK” (PUSH OFF) to “ACC” When turning from “ACC” to “LOCK”
E00306600015 E00306700032

Push the ignition switch and then turn it slowly. [Vehicles with M/T]
Put the gearshift lever into the “N” (Neutral) position, and
slowly turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position while
pressing it.
[Vehicles with A/T or CVT]
1 First, set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and
then slowly turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
while pressing it.

A- Steering wheel locked

B- Steering wheel released
NOTE
● If the ignition switch does not turn from “LOCK” (PUSH
OFF) to “ACC”, press the ignition switch again, lightly
move the steering wheel left and right, and then turn the
ignition switch.
NOTE
● The ignition switch cannot be turned if the keyless opera- ● On vehicles with A/T or CVT, the ignition switch cannot
tion key is not in the vehicle. be turned to the “LOCK” position unless the selector lever
Refer to “Operating range for starting the engine” on page is in the “P” (PARK) position.
1-13.

1-20
 Locking and unlocking

Warning activation
! CAUTION E00305900109

● Do not turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” position In order to prevent vehicle theft or an accidental operation of
while driving. The steering wheel will lock, causing the keyless operation system, a buzzer and messages on the
loss of control. multi-information display are used to alert the driver.
● If the engine is stopped while driving, the brake ser- If a warning is triggered, always check the vehicle and the
vomechanism will cease to function and braking KOS key. Warning messages will also be displayed if there is a
efficiency will deteriorate. Furthermore, the power fault in the keyless operation system (KOS). 1
steering system will not function and it will require
greater manual effort to operate the steering.
● Do not leave the ignition switch in the “ON” position
for a long time when the engine is not running as
this will cause discharge of the battery.
● Do not turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position when the engine is running as doing so
could damage the starter motor.

1-21
 Locking and unlocking
If any of the following warnings are activated, please contact a KOS key location monitoring system
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point. E00308000042

If you open any of the doors and take the KOS key out of the
vehicle while the ignition switch is in an other position than
There is a fault in the keyless operation system.
“LOCK” (PUSH OFF) , the KOS key and vehicle ID codes
cannot be matched. This will trigger the warning message
The battery of the KOS key has worn out. “CONFIRM KEY LOCATION” on display and the buzzer will
1 In the following cases, a warning is activated, but it can be can-
sound four times.
celled if the correct actions are followed.
● The ID codes of KOS key and vehicle do not match.

You could be carrying another KOS key with a

different code, or the KOS key could be outside
the operating range.
Refer to “KOS key location monitoring system”
on page 1-22.
● Even though you press a door or tailgate “LOCK” switch,
the doors and tailgate will not lock.

Refer to “Key lock-in prevention system” on page

1-23.
Refer to “Door ajar prevention system” on page
1-24.
Refer to “Ignition switch reminder system” on
page 1-24.

1-22
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE Key lock-in prevention system

● If remove the KOS key from the vehicle through a window E00308100030

without opening a door, the KOS key location monitoring If you close all the doors and the tailgate with the ignition
system will not respond. switch is in the “LOCK” (PUSH OFF) position, but leave the
● It is possible to change the settings of the KOS key location KOS key in the vehicle, any attempt to lock doors and tailgate
monitoring system so that it will respond if you remove the by pressing one of the “LOCK” switches will trigger the warn-
KOS key from the vehicle through a window without ing message “CONFIRM KEY LOCATION” on the display
opening a door. For further information, please contact and the buzzer will sound for about 3 seconds. Under these cir- 1
your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point. cumstances locking of doors and tailgate will be impossible.
● Even though the KOS key is within the engine start oper-
ating range, the keyless operation key and vehicle ID codes
sometimes cannot be matched due to the environment or
electromagnetic conditions. In this case the warning may
be activated.

1-23
 Locking and unlocking

Door ajar prevention system Ignition switch reminder system

E00308200031 E00308300032

If you try to lock the doors and tailgate by pressing one of the If you close all doors and the tailgate with the ignition switch
“LOCK” switches while one of the doors or the tailgate is not in any position other than “LOCK” (PUSH OFF), any attempt
completely closed, the warning message “CHECK DOORS” is to lock doors and tailgate by pressing one of the “LOCK”
displayed and the buzzer will sound for about 3 seconds. Under switches will trigger the warning message “STEERING
these circumstances locking of doors and tailgate will be WHEEL LOCK” on the display and the buzzer will sound for
1 impossible even with the ignition switch turned to “LOCK” about 3 seconds. Under these circumstances locking of doors
(PUSH OFF). and tailgate will be impossible.

1-24
 Locking and unlocking

Steering wheel lock Starting

E00306800017 E00306900089

To lock Tips for starting

Turn the steering wheel until it is locked. ● Do not operate the starter motor continuously for longer
than 10 seconds to avoid discharging the battery. If the
To unlock engine does not start, turn the ignition switch back to the
Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position while moving “LOCK” position, wait a few seconds and then try again.
the steering wheel slightly right and left. Trying anew while the starter motor is still turning will
1
damage the starter mechanism.

! WARNING
● Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated
area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle
in or out of the area. Carbon monoxide gases are
odourless and can be fatal.

! CAUTION
● Never attempt to start the engine by pushing or pull-
ing the vehicle.
● Do not run the engine at high rpm or drive the vehi-
cle at high speed until the engine has sufficiently
warmed up.
! CAUTION ● Release the ignition switch as soon as the engine
● Remove the ignition switch when leaving the vehicle. starts to avoid damaging the starter motor.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a turbocharger, do
not stop the engine immediately after operating the
vehicle at high speeds. Allow the engine to idle for
approximately 60 seconds or more to give the turbo-
charger a chance to cool down.

1-25
 Locking and unlocking

Starting the engine (petrol-powered vehicles) 5. On vehicles with M/T, place the gearshift lever in the “N”
E00307000117 (Neutral) position.
This vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled fuel On vehicles with A/T or CVT, make sure the selector
injection system. When starting the engine, do not depress the lever is in the “P” (PARK) position.
accelerator pedal.
Normal conditions Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with A/T or CVT
The starting procedure is as follows:
1 1. Fasten the seat belt.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
4. Fully depress the clutch pedal (M/T).

6. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and ensure

all warning lamps are functioning properly before starting
the engine.
7. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position without
depressing the accelerator pedal and release it when the
engine starts.

1-26
 Locking and unlocking
At extreme low ambient temperatures Starting the engine (diesel-powered vehicles)
If the engine will not start, depress the accelerator pedal about E00307000120

halfway while cranking the engine. Once the engine starts, 1. Fasten the seat belt.
release the accelerator pedal. 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
4. Depress the clutch pedal all the way and place the gear-
! CAUTION shift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position.
● When starting the engine, make sure you depress 1
the brake pedal. At extreme low ambient tempera-
tures move your foot to the brake pedal immediately
after the engine has started.

Flooded engine
If the engine was flooded during starting, first operate the
starter for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the accelerator
pedal, then start the engine with the accelerator pedal released.
On vehicles with MIVEC engine (3000 models)
The MIVEC engine automatically switches its intake-valve
control between a low-speed mode and a high-speed mode in
accordance with driving conditions for maximum engine per-
formance.
NOTE 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
● To protect the engine, the high-speed mode may not be The diesel preheat indicator lamp will illuminate first and
selected while the engine coolant temperature is low. In then go out after a short while to indicate that preheating
such circumstances, the engine revolutions will not rise has been completed.
above 5,000 rpm even if the accelerator pedal is
depressed.

1-27
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE To operate without using the keyless operation

● If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indicator lamp will function
stay on for a longer time. E00306000019
● When the engine has not been started within about 5 sec-
onds after the diesel preheat indicator lamp went out, Emergency key
E00307200092
return the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position. Then The emergency key is integrated into the KOS key (keyless
turn the switch to the “ON” position to preheat the engine operation key). If the keyless operation function is not working
1 again. e.g. because of a discharged KOS key battery or vehicle bat-
● When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat indicator tery, you can lock and unlock the doors and start the engine
lamp will not come on when the ignition switch is turned with the emergency key. To use the emergency key (A), slide
to the “ON” position. the lock knob (B) into the release position and remove the
Start the engine by turning the ignition switch directly to emergency key from the KOS key (C).
the “START” position.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position without
depressing the accelerator pedal and release it when the
engine starts.
NOTE
● A ticking noise may be heard after the engine has started.
This is not an abnormal condition. The noise will disap-
pear after the engine has run for a short time.
If the ticking noise continues after the engine is warmed
up, please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ised Service Point.

1-28
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE Locking and unlocking the door

● Only use the emergency key for emergencies. If the KOS Turning the emergency key to the vehicle front locks the door,
key battery wears out, replace it as quickly as possible so and turning it to rear unlocks the door. Also refer to “Locking
that you can use the keyless operation system. and unlocking: Doors” on page 1-41.
● After using the emergency key, always insert it back into
the KOS key.
● The glove box can only be locked or unlocked with the
emergency key. When leaving your key at a hotel recep- 1
tion or lending your vehicle to someone else, take out the
emergency key as necessary and hand over only the KOS
key.

1- Lock
2- Unlock

1-29
 Locking and unlocking

Electronic immobiliser (Anti-theft starting system) Ignition switch

E00307300107 E00307400108

The electronic immobiliser is designed to significantly reduce To prevent vehicle theft, only the emergency key with the pre-
the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to registered KOS key can start the engine. (Electronic immobi-
immobilise the vehicle if starting is attempted with an invalid liser function)
ignition key. Starting the engine is only possible with a key or Also refer to “Starting and driving: Starting the engine” on
emergency key “registered” in the immobiliser system. page 4-19.
1 All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been pro-
grammed into the vehicle’s electronics. Refer to “Keyless oper-
ation system: Ignition switch” on page 1-19, 1-30.
NOTE
● If you lose one of the KOS keys, order a key from your
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point as
soon as possible.
To obtain a key, take your vehicle and any remaining key
to a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
All the keys have to be re-registered in the immobiliser
computer unit. The immobiliser can register up to 4 differ-
ent keys.

LOCK
The engine is stopped and the steering wheel is locked. The
emergency key can be inserted and removed in this position.
ACC
The electrical accessories can be used with the engine off.
ON
The engine runs and all electrical accessories can be used.

1-30
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE When turning from “LOCK” to “ACC”

● The KOS key is combined with an electronic immobiliser. 1. Take the emergency key out of the KOS key.
To start the engine, the ID code which the transponder Refer to “Emergency keys” on page1-28.
inside the key sends must match the one registered to the 2. Remove the ignition switch cover by pressing the release
immobiliser computer. buttons (A).
(Refer to “Electronic immobiliser (Anti-theft starting sys-
tem)” on page 1-18.)
1

1-31
 Locking and unlocking
3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition switch, and turn When turning from “ACC” to “LOCK”
it while pushing. 1. [Vehicles with M/T]
While pushing the ignition switch, turn it to the “LOCK”
position and pull out the key.
[Vehicles with A/T or CVT]
First, set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
and turn the emergency key to the “ACC” position. Then
1 turn it to “LOCK” position while pushing it. You can pull
it out in the 'LOCK' position.
2. Install the ignition switch cover.
3. Reinsert the emergency key into the KOS key.
NOTE
● On vehicles with A/T or CVT, the emergency key with
KOS key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is
set to the “P” (PARK) position.
● When not using the emergency key, always install the
ignition switch cover. Otherwise, there is a risk of dirt or
NOTE dust getting into the keyhole of the ignition switch and
● If the ignition switch will not turn from the “LOCK” to
causing a malfunction.
the “ACC” position, slightly turn the steering wheel right
and left while turning the ignition switch.
! CAUTION
● Do not remove the emergency key from the ignition
switch while driving. The steering wheel will lock,
causing loss of control.
● If the engine is stopped while driving, the brake ser-
vomechanism will cease to function and braking
efficiency will deteriorate. Furthermore, the power
steering system will not function and it will require
greater manual effort to operate the steering.

1-32
 Locking and unlocking

Steering wheel lock

! CAUTION E00307500095

● Do not leave the emergency key in the “ON” posi- To lock

tion for a long time when the engine is not running Turn the emergency key to the “LOCK” position.
as this will cause discharge of the battery. Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
● Do not turn the emergency key to the “START”
position when the engine is running as doing so To unlock
could damage the starter motor. Turn the emergency key to the “ACC” position while moving 1
the steering wheel slightly right and left.

! CAUTION
● Remove the emergency key when leaving the vehi-
cle.
Never leave the key in the vehicle when it is parked.

1-33
 Locking and unlocking

Starting Starting the engine (petrol-powered vehicles)

E00307600100 This vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled fuel
Tips for starting injection system. When starting the engine, do not depress the
● Do not operate the starter motor continuously for longer accelerator pedal.
than 10 seconds to avoid discharging the battery. If the Normal conditions
engine does not start, turn the ignition switch back to the The starting procedure is as follows:
“LOCK” position, wait a few seconds and then try again. 1. Fasten the seat belt.
1 Trying anew while the starter motor is still turning will 2. Remove the cover of the ignition switch.
damage the starter mechanism.

! WARNING
● Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated
area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle
in or out of the area. Carbon monoxide gases are
odourless and can be fatal.

! CAUTION
● Never attempt to start the engine by pushing or pull-
ing the vehicle.
● Do not run the engine at high rpm or drive the vehi-
cle at high speed until the engine has sufficiently
warmed up.
● Release the emergency key as soon as the engine
starts to avoid damaging the starter motor.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a turbocharger, do
not stop the engine immediately after operating the
vehicle at high speeds. Allow the engine to idle for
approximately 60 seconds or more to give the turbo-
charger a chance to cool down.

1-34
 Locking and unlocking
3. Insert the emergency key of the KOS key. 5. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
6. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
7. On vehicles with M/T, depress the clutch pedal all the way
and place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position.
On vehicles with A/T or CVT, make sure the selector
lever is in the “P” (PARK) position.

Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with A/T or CVT 1

4. Set the emergency key onto the KOS key.

8. Turn the emergency key with the KOS key to the “ON”
position and ensure all warning lamps are functioning
properly before starting the engine.
9. Turn the emergency key with the KOS key to the
“START” position without depressing the accelerator
pedal and release it when the engine starts.
10. Remove the KOS key from the emergency key.

1-35
 Locking and unlocking
At extreme low ambient temperatures Starting the engine (diesel-powered vehicles)
If the engine will not start, depress the accelerator pedal about 1. Fasten the seat belt.
halfway while cranking the engine. Once the engine starts, 2. Remove the cover of the ignition switch.
release the accelerator pedal. 3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition switch.

! CAUTION
1 ● When starting the engine, make sure you depress
the brake pedal. At extreme low ambient tempera-
tures move your foot to the brake pedal immediately
after the engine has started.

Flooded engine
If the engine was flooded during starting, first operate the
starter for 5 to 6 seconds while fully depressing the accelerator
pedal, then start the engine with the accelerator pedal released.
On vehicles with MIVEC engine (3000 models)
The MIVEC engine automatically switches its intake-valve
control between a low-speed mode and a high-speed mode in
accordance with driving conditions for maximum engine per-
formance.
NOTE
● To protect the engine, the high-speed mode may not be
selected while the engine coolant temperature is low. In
such circumstances, the engine revolutions will not rise
above 5,000 rpm even if the accelerator pedal is
depressed.

1-36
 Locking and unlocking
4. Set the emergency key onto the KOS key. 7. Depress the clutch pedal all the way and place the gear-
shift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position.

5. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

6. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 8. Turn the emergency key with the KOS key to the “ON”
position.
The diesel preheat indicator lamp will illuminate first and
then go out after a short while to indicate that preheating
has been completed.

1-37
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE Keyless entry system

● If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indicator lamp will E00307700127

stay on for a longer time. Press the corresponding remote control switch on the key and
● When the engine has not been started within about 5 sec- all doors as well as the tailgate will lock or unlock. These
onds after the diesel preheat indicator lamp went out, remote control switches can also operator the door mirrors and
return the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position. Then electric windows.
turn the key to the “ON” position to preheat the engine
1 again.
● When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat indicator
lamp will not come on when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position.
Start the engine by turning the ignition switch directly to
the “START” position.
9. Turn the emergency key with the KOS key to the
“START” position without depressing the accelerator
pedal and release it when the engine starts.
10. Remove the KOS key from the emergency key.
NOTE
● A ticking noise may be heard after the engine has started.
This is not an abnormal condition. The noise will disap-
pear after the engine has run for a short time. 1- LOCK ( ) switch
If the ticking noise continues after the engine is warmed 2- UNLOCK ( ) switch
up, please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ised Service Point. 3- Indicator lamp

1-38
 Locking and unlocking

To lock NOTE
Press the LOCK switch (1). All the doors and the tailgate will ● The indicator lamp (3) turns on each time a switch is
be locked. If the room lamp switch is in the middle position at pressed.
this time, the room lamp and the turn-signal lamps will flash ● If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and you do not open
once. any of the doors or the tailgate within approximately 30
seconds: relocking will occur automatically. On vehicles
NOTE with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System
● On a vehicle equipped with a Dead Lock System, pressing (MMCS), this function can be customised via the display. 1
the Lock switch (1) twice in succession will set the Dead Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details.
Lock System. (Refer to “Setting the system” on page ● It is possible to modify functions as follows:
1-45.) For further information, please contact your
To unlock MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point. On
Press the UNLOCK switch (2). All the doors and the tailgate vehicles with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys-
will be unlocked. If the room lamp switch is in the middle posi- tem (MMCS), this function can be customised via the dis-
tion at this time, the room lamp will come on for approximately play. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details.
15 seconds and the turn-signal lamps will flash twice. • The length of time from the moment the UNLOCK
switch (2) is pressed to the moment automatic locking
occurs can be changed.
• The confirmation function (flashing of the turn-signal
lamps) can be set to operate only when the doors and
tailgate are locked or when the doors and tailgate are
unlocked.
• The confirmation function (this indicates the locking or
unlocking of the doors and tailgate with a flash of the
turn-signal lamps) can be deactivated.
• It is possible to change the number of times the turn-sig-
nal lamps are flashed by the confirmation function.

1-39
 Locking and unlocking

Operation of the Dead Lock System NOTE

On a vehicle equipped with a Dead Lock System, it is possible ● The function of the remote control switches can be modi-
to set the Dead Lock System using the remote controller. fied as stated below. Please consult your MITSUBISHI
(Refer to “Dead Lock System” on page 1-45.) MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
• Disable the key-linked “Close” function for the electric
Linked operation of electric windows windows.
To close • Add a key-linked ’Open’ function for electric windows.
1 You can close the windows within 30 seconds after locking the • Link the folding-in and folding-out of the outside rear-
doors with the LOCK switch (1) by pressing the switch a sec- view mirrors to door locking and unlocking.
ond time for at least 1 second. • Disable all operations.
To stop the windows part-way, press the LOCK switch again or ● The keyless entry system does not operate under the fol-
press the UNLOCK switch (2). lowing conditions:
• The key is left in the key cylinder.
• The door or tailgate is open.
! WARNING ● The remote control switches will function from within
● Ensure that no one is near the door windows before about 4 m of the vehicle. However, the operating range of
closing them by pressing the remote control switch the remote control switch may vary if the vehicle is
on the key. Otherwise, there is risk of hands or fin- located near a TV transmitting tower, power station or
ger being caught and injured. radio broadcasting station.
● If either of the following problems occurs, the battery may
Linked operation of outside rear-view mirrors be discharged. Have the battery replaced by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
To fold • Although the remote control switch is operated within
You can fold in the outside rear-view mirrors within 30 seconds the correct distance from the vehicle, neither the doors
after locking the doors and tailgate with the LOCK switch (1) nor tailgate will lock or unlock.
by pressing the switch twice in rapid succession. • The indicator lamp (3) is dim or does not come on.
To fold out ● In case of loss or damage of your key with remote control
You can fold out the outside rear-view mirrors within 30 sec- switches please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
onds after unlocking the doors and tailgate with the UNLOCK Authorised Service Point for a replacement.
switch (2) by pressing the switch twice in rapid succession. ● If you wish to have an additional key with remote control,
pl. contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
Service Point.
A maximum of 8 keys with remote control can be set for
1-40 your vehicle.
 Locking and unlocking

Doors To lock or unlock with the key

E00300401496

! CAUTION
● Make sure the doors are closed: driving with doors
not completely closed is dangerous.
● Never leave children in the vehicle unattended. 1
● Be careful not to lock the doors while the key is
inside the vehicle.

NOTE
● When the driver’s door is open, neither the key nor the
lock knob can be used to lock it.

1- Lock
2- Unlock
NOTE
● If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless operation sys-
tem and electronic key, the doors can be locked or
unlocked with the emergency key. Refer to “Emergency
keys” on page 1-28.

1-41
 Locking and unlocking

To lock or unlock from inside the vehicle To lock without using the key
Front passenger’s door, Rear door

1- Lock
2- Unlock Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked position and close the
Pull the inside door handle to open the door. door (2).
NOTE NOTE
● The driver’s door can be opened without using the lock ● The driver’s door cannot be locked using the inside lock
knob by pulling the inside door handle. knob while it is open.
● In a vehicle that has a Dead Lock System, it is not possi-
ble to unlock the door by pushing the lock knob to the
unlock side while the Dead Lock System is set.
(Refer to “Dead Lock System” on page 1-45.)

1-42
 Locking and unlocking

Ignition switch reminder system Central door locking system

E00310100040 E00300801025

When the engine was started using the keyless operation NOTE
function ● Each door can be locked or unlocked independently using
If the driver’s door is opened with the ignition switch in a posi- the inside lock knob.
tion other than “LOCK” (PUSH OFF) after turning off the ● Repeatedly switching between locking and unlocking
engine, the ignition switch reminder buzzer will sound inter- could trigger the central door locking system’s built-in
mittently to remind you to turn the ignition switch to 'LOCK' 1
protection circuit and temporarily prevent the system from
(RELEASE). operating. Should this occur, wait about 1 minute before
In addition, “STEERING WHEEL LOCK” will appear on the operating the central door lock switch.
multi-information display. ● When the driver’s door is open, the central door lock
switch nor the lock knob can be used to lock it.

1-43
 Locking and unlocking

Central locking function with key in driver’s Central locking function with door lock switch on
door driver’s door
Pushing the central door lock switch on the driver’s door will
Vehicles without keyless entry system or keyless operation lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.
system
Using the key on the driver’s door will lock or unlock all doors LHD (Left-hand drive)
and the tailgate.
1

1- Lock
2- Unlock
NOTE
● On vehicles with an enabled Dead Lock System, turning
the key towards the rear of the vehicle only unlocks the
driver’s door; the central door locking system does not
operate.
(Refer to “Dead Lock System” on page 1-45.)

1-44
 Locking and unlocking

RHD (Right-hand drive)

Dead Lock System*
E00305100068

The Dead Lock System helps prevent theft. When the remote
control switch on the key (keyless entry system) has been used
to lock all of the doors and the tailgate, the Dead Lock System
makes it impossible to unlock the doors using the inside lock
knobs.
1
! CAUTION
● Do not set the Dead Lock System when someone is
inside the vehicle. When the Dead Lock System is
set, it is not possible to unlock the doors using the
inside lock knobs. If you erroneously set the Dead
Lock System, unlock the doors using the UNLOCK
1- Lock switch on your key.
2- Unlock
Setting the system
E00305200072

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position.

Also, if a key was used to start the engine, remove the key
from the ignition switch.
2. Get out of the vehicle. Close all doors and the tailgate.
3. Press the LOCK switch (A) of the keyless entry system to
lock all of the doors and the tailgate. The turn-signal
lamps will flash once.
4. Press the LOCK switch (A) again within 2 seconds.
The turn-signal lamps will flash three times to indicate
that the Dead Lock System has been set.

1-45
 Locking and unlocking

Vehicles with keyless entry system Vehicles with keyless operation system (KOS)

NOTE
Vehicles with keyless operation system (KOS) ● Pressing the LOCK switch (A) once after the Dead Lock
System has been set, causes the turn-signal lamps to flash
three times, which confirms that the Dead Lock System
has been set.

1-46
 Locking and unlocking

Cancelling the system

E00305300073
Vehicles with keyless operation system (KOS)
When the UNLOCK switch (B) of the keyless entry system is
pressed to unlock the doors and tailgate, the Dead Lock System
is simultaneously cancelled.

Vehicles with keyless entry system

1

NOTE
● If neither a door nor the tailgate is opened within 30 sec-
onds of unlocking, they are automatically relocked and
the Dead Lock System is simultaneously reset.
● Even when it is not possible to use the keyless entry sys-
tem (remote control switch) to unlock the doors, it is pos-
sible to use the key to unlock a door. When the key is used
to unlock a door, the Dead Lock System is cancelled for
only that door. If you wish to subsequently unlock all of
the doors, turn the ignition switch to the “ON” or “ACC”
position.
● It is possible to adjust the time span until automatic
relocking after the UNLOCK switch (B) has been pressed.
For details, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorised Service Point. On vehicles with the Mitsubishi
Multi-Communication System (MMCS), this function can
be customised via the display. Refer to the separate
owner’s manual for details.
1-47
 Locking and unlocking

Testing the system “Child-protection” rear doors

E00305400061 E00300900250
Open all door windows and then set the Dead Lock System.
(Refer to “Setting the system” on page 1-45.)
After setting the Dead Lock System, reach into the vehicle
through a window and confirm that you cannot unlock the
doors using the inside lock knobs.
1
NOTE
● If you need advice on how to set the Dead Lock System,
please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
Service Point.

1- Lock
2- Unlock
Child protection helps prevent the rear doors from being
opened accidentally from the inside.
If the lever is set to the locked position, the rear doors cannot
be opened using the inside handle, but only with the outside
handle.
If the lever is set to the “Unlock” position, the child protection
mechanism does not function.

! CAUTION
● When driving with a child in the rear seat, please
use the child protection to prevent accidental door
opening which may cause an accident.

1-48
 Locking and unlocking

Split tailgate To lock or unlock from outside the vehicle

E00301400760

Vehicle with key cylinder

! WARNING
● It is dangerous to drive with upper, lower or both
tailgates open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
enter the cabin. 1
Carbon monoxide is a colourless and odourless gas.
Exposure can cause unconsciousness and even be
fatal.
● Before opening and closing the tailgate, ensure that
no one is in the vicinity and be careful not to hit your
head or pinch your hands, neck, etc.

1- Lock
2- Unlock

1-49
 Locking and unlocking

To lock or unlock from inside the vehicle RHD (Right-hand drive)

The tailgate can be locked or unlocked by pushing the central
door lock switch (driver’s door).
LHD (Left-hand drive)

1- Lock
2- Unlock
NOTE
● Repeated switching between locking and unlocking could
trigger the central locking system’s built-in protection cir-
cuit and temporarily prevent the system from operating.
Should this occur, wait about 1 minute before operating
the central door lock switch.

1-50
 Locking and unlocking

To open 2. Move the lever (A) in the direction of the arrow and
1. After unlocking the tailgate, pull the handle and lift the slowly fold down the lower gate.
upper gate.

! CAUTION
● If a trailer hitch is mounted, do not open the lower
gate!
Otherwise, the trailer hitch could scratch and dam-
age the lower gate.

1-51
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE To close
● Do not jump on the lower gate or subject it to a strong 1. Raise the lower gate until it locks properly in position
impact. This could damage the lower gate. with a click.
● If you do not open the tailgate immediately after pulling
the handle, the tailgate will automatically be relocked.
If this happens, pull the handle again and lift the tailgate.
● The tailgate cannot be opened when the battery is flat or
1 disconnected. After replacement of the battery, the tailgate
will be in the locked position.

NOTE
● Before closing the upper gate, push and pull the lower
gate to make sure it is securely locked.
You cannot close the upper gate unless the lower gate is
properly closed.

1-52
 Locking and unlocking
2. Pull the upper gate grip (B) downward as illustrated. Gen-
tly slam the upper tailgate from the outside so that it is ! CAUTION
completely closed. Always make sure that the upper gate ● Before closing the upper gate, always make sure that
is securely closed. your or other persons’ fingers will not be caught by
the upper gate.
● When closing the lower gate, make sure there is no
foreign matter around the striker (C). Otherwise, it
could be damaged, making it impossible to close the 1
lower gate.

NOTE
● Always close the lower gate before closing the upper gate.
If you try to close the gates in the reverse order, they could
strike each other and be damaged.

1-53
 Locking and unlocking
● Gas struts (D) and wires (E) are installed to support the Tailgate emergency release lever
tailgate. E00303400168
To prevent damage or faulty operation: The tailgate emergency release lever allows opening of the tail-
• Do not hold the gas struts when closing the tailgate. gate in case of a discharged battery.
• Also, do not push or pull the gas struts. This tailgate emergency release lever (see illustration) is
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape, etc. to the gas mounted on the tailgate.
struts.
1 • Do not tie strings, etc. around the gas struts.
• Do not hang any objects on the gas struts.

You and your family should familiarise yourselves with the

location and operation of the tailgate emergency release lever.

1-54
 Locking and unlocking

To open 2. Move the lever (B) up to open the tailgate.

1. Open the lid (A) on the inside of the tailgate.

3. Push out the upper gate to open it.

4. Slowly lower the lower gate.

! CAUTION
● Always keep the emergency release lever lid on tail-
gate closed when driving so that your cargo cannot
accidentally strike the lever and open the tailgate.

1-55
 Locking and unlocking

Electric window control Electric window control switch

E00302200446 E00302300997

The electric windows can only be operated with the ignition Each door window opens or closes while the corresponding
switch in the “ON” position. switch is operated.

Driver’s switch (LHD)

! WARNING
1 ● Before operating the power window control, make
sure that nothing can be trapped (head, hand, finger,
etc.) by the window.
● Never leave the vehicle without removing the key.
● Never leave a child (or another person who might be
incapable of safely operating the power window con-
trol) alone in the vehicle.
● If a child plays with the switch, it could trap its
hands or head in the window.

1-56
 Locking and unlocking

Driver’s / Passenger’s switches

Driver’s switch (RHD) The driver’s switches can be used to operate all door windows.
A window can be opened or closed by operating the corre-
sponding switch.
Press the switch down to open the door window, and pull it up
to close the window.

1- Driver’s door window

2- Front passenger’s door window
3- Rear left door window
4- Rear right door window
5- Lock switch

If the switch is fully pressed down/pulled up, the door window

automatically opens/closes completely.
If you want to stop the window movement, operate the switch
lightly.

1-57
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE Lock switch

● Repeated operation of the RHT when the engine is turned E00303100673

off will run down the battery. Operate the window control When this switch is pressed in, the passenger’s switches cannot
switches only while the engine is running. be used to open or close the door windows.
● The electric windows can also be closed with the remote To unlock the function, press the button once again.
control switch of the key on vehicles with keyless entry
system (KES key) or keyless operation system (KOS
1 key).
(Refer to “Dead Lock System' on page 1-6.)
Refer to “Keyless operation system: Keyless entry sys-
tem” on page 1-38.
● On vehicles with the keyless operation system (KOS), the
electric windows can also be closed using the door or tail-
gate “LOCK” switch.
Refer to “Keyless operation system (KOS): keyless opera-
tion” on page 1-14.
● The rear door windows only open halfway.

1- Lock
2- Unlock
NOTE
● The driver’s switch always can open or close any door
windows.

! WARNING
● If a child plays with the switch, it could trap its
hands or head in the window. When driving with a
child in the vehicle, please press the window lock
switch to disable the passenger’s switches.

1-58
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE Timer function

● This function can be customised to disable the operation E00302400363

of front passenger and rear door windows via the driver’s The door windows can be opened or closed for 30 seconds
switches when the lock switch is depressed. after the ignition switch has been turned off. If the driver’s door
Please consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised is opened during this period, the door window can be opened or
Service Point. On vehicles with the Mitsubishi Multi- closed for another 30 seconds.
Communication System (MMCS), this function can be However, once the driver’s door is closed, the windows cannot
customised via the display. Refer to the separate owner’s be operated. 1
manual for details.
NOTE
● This function can be modified as stated below.
Please consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
Service Point. On vehicles with the Mitsubishi Multi-
Communication System (MMCS), this function can be
customised via the display. Refer to the separate owner’s
manual for details.
• The timer period can be adjusted.
• The timer function can be suppressed.
• The opening of front and rear passenger windows via
the driver switch during timer operation can be disabled.

1-59
 Locking and unlocking

Safety mechanism ● If the safety mechanism is activated three or more times in

E00302500292 a row, the safety mechanism will be cancelled and the
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing window, it will lower door window will not close correctly.
automatically. In such a case, the following procedure should be imple-
Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their head or hand out mented to rectify this situation. If the window is open,
of the window when closing a window. repeatedly raise the appropriate window switch until that
The lowered window will become operational after a few sec- window has been fully closed. Thereafter, release the
1 onds. switch, raise the switch once again, hold it in this position
for at least 1 second and then release it. You should now
! WARNING be able to operate all windows in the normal fashion.
● If the safety mechanism is activated three or more
times in succession, the safety mechanism will be
temporarily cancelled.
A serious injury could occur if a hand or head
should get trapped.

! CAUTION
● The safety mechanism is cancelled just before the
window is fully closed. This allows the window to
close completely. Consequently, be especially careful
that no fingers are trapped in the window.

NOTE
● The safety mechanism can be triggered if driving condi-
tions or other circumstances cause the door windows to be
subjected to a physical shock similar to that caused by a
trapped hand or head.

1-60
 Locking and unlocking

Sunroof* To close, press the switch (3)

E00302800237 To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch (1) or (2).
Sunroof To tilt up, press the switch (2)
The sunroof can only be operated when the ignition switch is in The rear sunroof will rise to ventilate the car interior.
the “ON” position.
To tilt down, press the switch (3)
1
Safety mechanism
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing sunroof, it will re-
open automatically.
Nonetheless, make sure that nobody sticks their head or hand
out of the sunroof when opening or closing it.
The opened sunroof will become operational after a few sec-
onds.
If the safety mechanism is triggered 5 or more times consecu-
tively, normal closing of the sunroof will be aborted. In this
case, reset the mechanism by the following steps:
1. Tilt up the sunroof by pressing the switch (2) repeatedly.
2. Hold down the tilt up switch (2) for about 3 seconds or
1- Open more.
2- Tilt up 3. Then press the switch (1) to open the sunroof completely.
3- Close, Tilt down Finally, press the switch (3) to close the sunroof com-
pletely.
To open, press the switch (1).
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch (2) or (3).
NOTE
● The sunroof automatically stops just before reaching the
fully open position.
Press the switch again to fully open it.

1-61
 Locking and unlocking

NOTE Sunshade
● The safety mechanism can be triggered if driving condi- Slide the sunshade manually to open and close it.
tions or other circumstances cause the door windows to be
subjected to a physical shock similar to that caused by a
trapped hand or head.
● Avoid stopping the sunroof before it reaches the fully
open or closed position. If this happens, repeat the process
1 from step 1.

! CAUTION
● The safety mechanism is cancelled just before the
sunroof is fully closed. This allows the sunroof to
close completely.
Consequently, be especially careful that no fingers
are trapped in the sunroof.

4. After this procedure the sunroof should work normally

again. ! CAUTION
● Ensure hands are not trapped when closing the sun-
shade.

NOTE
● Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before closing the sun-
shade.
● The sunshade cannot be closed while the sunroof is open.

1-62
 Locking and unlocking
● Depending on the ski carrier or roof carrier models, the
! WARNING sunroof may touch the carrier when it is tilted up. Be care-
● Do not stick your head, hands or anything else out of ful when tilting up the sunroof if such a ski carrier or a
the sunroof opening while the vehicle is in motion. roof carrier is installed on the vehicle.
● Never leave a child (or any other person who might ● Ensure you close the sunroof completely when washing or
be incapable of safely operating the sunroof switch) leaving the vehicle.
alone in the vehicle. ● Be careful not to put any wax on the weatherstrip (black
● Before operating the sunroof, make sure that noth- rubber) around the sunroof opening. If stained with wax, 1
ing is capable of being trapped (head, hand, finger, the weatherstrip cannot maintain a weatherproof seal with
etc.). the sunroof.
● After washing the vehicle or after it has rained, wipe off
any water on the sunroof before operating it.
NOTE ● Operating the sunroof repeatedly while the engine is
● The sunroof stops just before reaching the fully open posi-
tion. turned off will run down the battery. Operate the sunroof
while the engine is running.
If the vehicle is driven with the sunroof in this position,
the wind draft reaches lower down than when the sunroof
is fully open.
● Before leaving the vehicle unattended, always close the
sunroof and take the ignition key with you.
● Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is frozen shut (after
snow fall or during extreme cold).
● Do not sit or place heavy luggage on the sunroof or roof
opening edge.
● Release the switch as soon as the sunroof reaches the fully
open or fully closed position.
● If the sunroof does not function when the sunroof switch
is operated, release the switch and check whether some-
thing has been trapped by the sunroof. If nothing is
trapped, we recommend you have the sunroof checked.

1-63
Seat and seat belts

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 2
Arrangement of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 3
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 5
Front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 6
Second seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 11
Third seat (7 persons). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 13 2
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 23
Making a luggage room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 25
Making a flat seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 31
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 34
Pregnant women restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 40
Seat belt pre-tensioner system and
force limiter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 41
Child restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 42
Seat belt inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 54
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag . . . . .2- 55
 Seat and seat belts

Seats
E00400101061

1-Front seat 2- Second seat

● To adjust forward or backward → P. 2-6 ● To adjust forward or backward (vehicles with second seat
● To recline the seatback → P. 2-7 slide function) → P. 2-11
● To adjust seat height (driver’s seat only) → P. 2-8 ● To recline the seatback → P. 2-11
● Armrest → P. 2-9 ● Armrest → P. 2-12
● Seat heater* → P. 2-10 ● Accessing the underfloor-stowable third seat (7 persons)
→ P. 2-13
3- Third seat (7 persons)
● To fold out the underfloor-stowable third seat → P. 2-13

2-2
 Seat and seat belts

Arrangement of seats
E00400200342

The seats can be arranged as desired to the patterns shown below.

5 persons 7 persons

Normal usage

7 persons → P. 2-13 -

Flat seat → P. 2-31

Folding the seatbacks for-

Making a luggage
ward
room
(Second seat) → P. 2-25

2-3
 Seat and seat belts

5 persons 7 persons

To collapse the second

seat → P. 2-25

2-4
 Seat and seat belts

Seat adjustment ! CAUTION

E00400300271

Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are comfortable and that ● Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or with
you can reach the pedals, steering wheel, switches etc. while adult supervision for correct and safe operation.
retaining a clear field of vision. ● Do not place a cushion or the like between your back
and the seatback while driving. The effectiveness of
! WARNING the head restraints will be reduced in the event of an
accident.
● Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving. This ● When sliding the seat rearward, be careful not to
can cause loss of vehicle control and result in an catch your hand or foot.
accident. After adjustments are made, ensure the 2
seating is locked in position by attempting to move
the seat forward and rearward without using the
adjusting mechanism.
● Do not let children or adults ride in areas of the
vehicle that are not equipped with seats or seat belts.
Also, make sure that all occupants are sitting in
their seats and wearing their seat belts, and that
children are sitting in child restraints.
● To minimize the risk of personal injury in the event
of a collision or sudden braking, the seatbacks
should always be in the almost upright position
while the vehicle is in motion. The protection pro-
vided by the seat belts may be reduced significantly
when the seatback is reclined. There is greater risk
that the passenger will slide under the seat belt,
resulting in serious injury, when the seatback is
reclined.

2-5
 Seat and seat belts

Front seat Power type

E00400400142 Adjust the seat by operating the switch as indicated by the
arrows.
To adjust forward or backward
E00400500462

Manual type
Pull the seat adjusting lever and adjust the seat forward or
backward to the desired position, and release the adjusting
lever.

1- Adjustment forward
2- Adjustment backward
NOTE
● To prevent the battery from discharging, use the power
seat while the engine is on.

! WARNING
● To ensure the seat is locked securely, try to move the
seat forward or backward without using the adjust-
ing lever.

2-6
 Seat and seat belts

To recline the seatback Power type

E00400600580 Adjust the seatback angle by operating the switch as indicated
Manual type by the arrows.
In order to recline the seatback, lean forward slightly, pull the
seatback lock lever up, and then lean backward to the desired
position and release the lever. The seatback will lock in that
position.

1- To move to forward direction

2- To recline rearward
NOTE
● To prevent the battery from discharging, use the power
seat while the engine is on.
! CAUTION
● The reclining mechanism of the seatback is spring
loaded, causing it to return to the vertical position
when the lock lever is operated. When using the
lever, sit close to the seatback or hold it with your
hand to control its return motion.

2-7
 Seat and seat belts

To adjust seat height (driver’s seat only) Power type

E00400700549 To adjust the seat height, operate the switch as indicated by
Manual type arrows.
To adjust the seat height, operate the lever repeatedly to adjust. NOTE
● To prevent the battery from discharging, use the power
seat while the engine is on.

1- Raise
2- Lower
1- To move the front of the seat up and down

2-8
 Seat and seat belts

Armrest
E00400900206

The lid of the floor console box can be moved forward and
backward, and used as an armrest.

2- To move the rear of the seat up and down

3- To move the whole seat up and down

2-9
 Seat and seat belts

Seat heaters
E00401100380 ! CAUTION
The seat heaters can only be operated with the ignition switch ● Switch off the seat heaters when not in use.
in the “ON” position. The indicator lamp (A) will illuminate ● Operate in the high position for quick heating. Once
while the heater is on. the seat is warm, set the heater to low to keep it
warm. Slight variations in seat temperature may be
felt while using the seat heaters. This is caused by
the operation of the heater’s internal thermostat and
does not indicate a malfunction.
● If the following types of persons use the heated seats,
2 they might become too hot or receive minor burns
(red skin, heat blisters, etc.):
• Children, elderly or ill people
• People with sensitive skin
• Excessively tired people
• People under the influence of alcohol or sleep-
inducing medication (cold medicine, etc.)
● Do not place heavy objects on the seat or stick pins,
needles or other pointed objects into it.
● Do not use a blanket, cushion or other material with
1- Heater high (for quick heating). high heat-insulation properties on the seat while
2- Heater off. using the heater as this might cause the heater ele-
3- Heater low (to keep the seat warm). ment to overheat.
● Do not use benzene, petrol, alcohol or other organic
solvents for cleaning the seats. Otherwise, there is a
risk of damage not only to the seat cover, but also to
the heater element.
● If water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat,
allow it to dry thoroughly before attempting to use
the heater.
● Turn the heater off immediately if it appears to be
malfunctioning during use.

2-10
 Seat and seat belts

Second seat ! WARNING

E00402000256

When the second seat is used raise the head restraints to a ● To make sure that the seat is securely locked in place
height at which they lock in position. Refer to “Head after adjustment, try to move it forward and back-
restraints” on page 2-23. ward without using the adjustment lever.
NOTE
● It is possible to adjust each of the second seats forward To recline the seatback
and backward independently (vehicles with second seat To recline the seatback, lean forward slightly, pull the seatback
slide function), and to incline the seatback independently lock lever up and lean backward to the desired position. Then
on each side. release the lever and the seatback will lock in place. 2
To adjust forward or backward
(vehicles with second seat slide function)
Pull the seat adjustment lever and slide the seat forward or
backward to the desired position. Release the adjustment lever
and the seat will lock in place.

2-11
 Seat and seat belts

Armrest
! WARNING E00402400247

● To reduce the risk of serious or life-threatening inju- To use the armrest, fold it down.
ries in case of accident or sudden stops, make sure To return it to the original position, push it backward until it is
that not only the driver’s seat seatback but also all flush with the seat.
the other seatbacks are in an upright position while
driving.
● In order to use the middle position of the second
seat, its two outer seats must have the same for-
ward/backward adjustment (vehicles with second
2 seat slide function) and the same seatback angle.
Otherwise, the seat belt for the middle position may
not be adequately effective in the event of hard
braking or a collision.

! CAUTION
● The reclining mechanism of the seatback is spring-
loaded. Therefore, when operating the lock lever sit
in a position close to the seatback or support the
seatback with your hand. NOTE
● Do not climb or sit on the armrest.
Doing so could damage the armrest.

2-12
 Seat and seat belts

Accessing the underfloor-stowable third seat Third seat (7 persons)

(7 persons) E00402700211

E00412600011

The passenger gets on or off the third seat after collapsing the To fold out the underfloor-stowable third seat
The third seat is stowed under the floor. Use the seat when
second seat. Refer to “To collapse the second seat” on page
additional people ride in your vehicle. When not in use, stow
2-25 the seat under the floor and use the compartment as luggage
area.

! WARNING
● Be sure to set up the third seat before starting to 2
drive. Mounting the seat while driving could cause
them to shift, resulting in a serious or life-threaten-
ing injury.
● After setting up the third seat, make sure that the
seat is securely locked in place. If the third seat is
not securely fixed , it could move and cause a serious
or life-threatening injury.
● Do not use the third seat with the second seat folded
up. The second seat could fall back during sudden
braking or a collision and result in a serious or life-
threatening injury.
● Always make sure that the head restraints of the sec-
ond seat are raised when the third seat is to be occu-
pied. If the head restraints of the second seat remain
lowered, they could cause a serious or life-threaten-
ing head injury during sudden braking or a colli-
sion.

2-13
 Seat and seat belts

To fold out
! WARNING 1. Open the tailgate. Refer to “Split tailgate” on page 1-49
● For safety reasons, whenever a passenger sits in the 2. Pull up the cover from the rear.
third seat, ensure that all head restraints of the sec- Fasten the pulled up cover to the seatback with the band
ond seats are raised. (A).

! CAUTION
● The third seat may only be set up by an adult. If you
let a child mount it, an accident could result.
● When setting up or folding down the third seat, keep
hands and feet away from the seat’s underside and
any moving parts.
● The exhaust pipe is still hot for a while after stop-
ping the engine, so be sure not to touch it.

2-14
 Seat and seat belts
3. Pull the belt (B) located in the centre of the seatback and 4. Pull the belt (C- black) to release the lock.
raise the seatback.

2-15
 Seat and seat belts
5. Tilt the whole of the third seat to the rear. 6. Raise the head restraints.

NOTE
● If the third seat is locked to the floor after tilting it to the
rear, pull the belt (C-black) again to release the lock.

2-16
 Seat and seat belts
7. Lift up the whole of the third seat from the floor and push NOTE
it forward to lock it in place. ● Push the third seat once more to the front to make sure it is
securely locked in place.

2-17
 Seat and seat belts
8. Return the cover to its position.
! WARNING Lightly push the seat and seatback to make sure they are
● When lifting the third seat, keep your hands away firmly fixed in place.
from the areas indicated by the red labels (D). Oth-
erwise, you could trap your fingers in the seat hinge
and be injured.

2-18
 Seat and seat belts

To retract 3. Slide the knob (C) while folding the head restraint to the
1. Open the tailgate. Refer to “Split tailgate” on page 1-49 rear, then fold it down the seat front. Fold them one side at
2. Pull up the cover (A) from the rear. Fasten the pulled up a time.
cover to the seatback with the band (B).

2-19
 Seat and seat belts
4. Pull the belt (D - grey) and stow the whole of the third seat
under the floor. ! CAUTION
● Do not put your hands on the end trim (E) when
stowing the third sea. Doing so you could trap and
injure your hand.

2-20
 Seat and seat belts

NOTE 5. Tilt the whole of the seat to the front.

● Push down on the rear of the third seat until it is securely
locked to the floor.
● If the third seat is difficult to lock, return it to its original
position. Then push it down while strongly pulling on the
belt until the rear of the seat makes contact with the floor
and locks in place.

2-21
 Seat and seat belts

NOTE 6. Fold the seatback while pulling the belt (F) located in the
● Before folding the seatback, make sure that the front of centre of the seatback.
the third seat is securely locked to the floor.
● If the third seat is difficult to lock, make sure that the rear
of the seat is securely locked to the floor, and then
strongly tilt the whole of the seat to the front to lock in
place.

NOTE
● When stowing the third seat, make sure there is no lug-
gage in the stowing area. If the seat is stowed while there
is luggage in the stowing area, it could damage the seat.
7. Return the cover to its position.

2-22
 Seat and seat belts

Head restraints
E00403300937

! WARNING
● Driving without the head restraints in place can
cause you and your passengers serious injury or
death in an accident. To reduce the risk of injury in
an accident, always make sure the head restraints
are installed and properly positioned when the seat
is occupied. 2
● Never place a cushion or similar device on the seat-
back. This can adversely affect head restraint per-
formance by increasing the distance between your
head and the restraint.

To adjust the height

Adjust the head restraint height so that the centre of the
restraint is as close as possible to eye level to reduce the
chances of injury in the event of a collision. Any person too tall
for the restraint to reach their eye level when seated should
adjust the restraint as high as possible.
To raise the head restraint, move it upward. To lower the
restraint, move it downward while pushing the height adjusting
knob (A) in the direction of the arrow. After adjustment, push
the head restraint downward and make sure it is locked.

2-23
 Seat and seat belts

To remove
To remove the head restraints, lift them with the height adjust- ! CAUTION
ing knob (A) pushed in. ● Confirm that the height adjusting knob (A) is cor-
rectly adjusted as shown in the illustration, and also
lift the head restraints to ensure they do not come
out of the seatback.

Installation
First confirm that the head restraint is facing in the correct
direction and then insert it into the seatback while pressing the
height adjusting knob (A) in the direction indicated by the
arrows.

2-24
 Seat and seat belts

! CAUTION Making a luggage room

E00403400156
● The head restraints for the front and rear seats dif-
fer in size. When installing head restraints, make
sure the head restraints are fitted in their respective
! WARNING
● When making a luggage area, never arrange the
seats.
seats while the vehicle is being driven or is on an
incline. The seats could move unexpectedly or more
than required and cause a serious accident.

2
! CAUTION
● Do not stack luggage in the vehicle higher than the
seatback height. Also, firmly secure the luggage.
Serious accidents could result due to unrestrained
objects entering the passenger compartment during
sudden braking.
● Be careful not to catch your hands or feet when
arranging the seat. Personal injury could result.

To collapse the second seat

E00403500346

The second seat can be collapsed automatically by operating

the second seat lever or the luggage area switch (if so
equipped). On vehicles with a third seat, the same operation
can be performed with the second seat lock release belt.
NOTE
● On vehicles with a third seat, collapse the second seat to
get on or off the third seat. Refer to “Accessing the under-
floor-stowable third seat” on page 2-13
● The seatbacks can be folded separately.

2-25
 Seat and seat belts

To collapse Luggage area switch operation (if so equipped)

1. Lower the head restraints of the second seat to the lowest While the tailgate or a rear door is open, pull the switch
position. (B) for about 1 second or more.
Refer to “Head restraints: To adjust height” on page2-23
2. Use the second seat lever (A), the luggage area switch (B)
(if so equipped) or the second seat lock release belt (C).

Second seat lever operation

2-26
 Seat and seat belts
Second seat lock release belt operation 3. On vehicles with second seat slide function, the seatbacks
first fold forward, and then the entire seat unit rises up
while moving forward.

2-27
 Seat and seat belts
On vehicles without second seat slide function, the seat-
backs fold forward. Lift the entire seat unit until you hear ! CAUTION
a click. ● The exhaust pipe is still hot for a while after stop-
ping the engine, so be sure not to touch it.
● Do not let people sit on the folded seats, and do not
place luggage on them. The installation fittings of
the seat could be deformed, making it impossible to
secure the seat to the vehicle.

2 NOTE
● Always store the seatbelt buckles in the second seat cush-
ion slits before folding the seatbacks forward. If the seat-
back is folded forward with the buckles not stored,
damage to the seat could result.(Refer to “Second and
third seat belt storage” on page 2-39)

4. Lightly push the seat and seatback to make sure they are
firmly fixed in place.

! WARNING
● Folding the seatbacks forward should be performed
by an adult after making sure there is no one in the
second seat. The seatback could fall forward sud-
denly and trap the person between it and the seat
cushion, causing a serious injury.
It is difficult to have a clear view of the second seat
from behind, so be especially careful of small chil-
dren.

2-28
 Seat and seat belts

To replace
1. Pull the lock release belt (A) on the rear of the seat cush- ! CAUTION
ion while supporting the seat with the other hand and ● When returning the second seat on vehicles with a
lower it. third seat, be careful not to trap the feet of any third
seat occupants with the second seat.

2-29
 Seat and seat belts

NOTE 2. Push down the seats until they click to firmly lock them in
● On vehicles with a third seat, the rear of the seat cushion place.
of the second seat is equipped with a foot lamp (B). When
the lock release belt is pulled, the lamp illuminates for
about 10 seconds to light the foot area of the third seat
occupants.

NOTE
● With the seatbacks folded forward luggage can be loaded.

2-30
 Seat and seat belts
3. Pull the lock release belt on the rear of the seatback to fold Making a flat seat
up the seatback. E00404300471

You can transform the rear seats into a large flat laying area by
removing the head restraints and fully reclining the seatbacks
of the seats.

! WARNING
● Never drive while there are occupants on the flat-
tened seat. This can be extremely dangerous.
2
! CAUTION
● To flatten the seat, stop the vehicle in a safe place.
● Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or with
adult supervision for correct and safe operation.
● When sliding the seat, be sure not to catch your
4. After returning the seatback, lightly push the seat and hand or leg.
seatback to make sure they are set firmly in place. ● Do not walk around on top of the seats after they
have been laid flat.
● To ensure the seats are locked securely, attempt to
move them back and forth.
● Do not jump on the seatbacks and avoid heavy
impact to them.
● To return the seatback, raise it slowly while support-
ing it with your hand. Never let a child perform this
operation. Doing so could result in an accident.

2-31
 Seat and seat belts
1. Remove the head restraints from the front seats, raise the 2. Move the second seat fully to the rear (vehicles with sec-
armrest and remove the cargo area cover (if so equipped). ond seat slide function).
(Refer to “Head restraints” on page 2-23 and “Cargo area (Refer to “To adjust forward or backward” on page 2-6.)
cover” on page 5-137)

2-32
 Seat and seat belts
3. Slide the front seats fully forward, then recline their seat- 4. Recline the seatbacks of the second seat backwards.
backs backwards to form a flat surface. (Refer to “To recline the seatback” on page 2-7)
(Refer to “To adjust forward or backward” on page 2-6
and “To recline the seatback” on page 2-7)

2-33
 Seat and seat belts
5. Flattening the seat is now complete. To return the seats to Seat belts
their normal position, reverse the above procedure. E00404800636

In order to protect you and your passengers in the event of an

accident, it is extremely important that seat belts are worn cor-
rectly while the vehicle is in motion.
The front seat belts have a pre-tensioner system. These belts
are used in the same way as a conventional seat belt.
Refer to “Seat belt pre-tensioner system and force limiter sys-
tem” on page 2-41.

2-34
 Seat and seat belts

! WARNING ! WARNING
● Always place the shoulder belt over your shoulder ● Never hold a child in your arms or on your lap when
and across your chest. Never put it behind you or riding in this vehicle, even if you are wearing your
under your arm. seat belt. If you do so, your child could suffer severe
● One seat belt should be used by one person only. or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden
Doing otherwise can be dangerous. stop.
● The seat belt will provide its wearer with maximum ● Always adjust the belt so that it fits snugly.
protection if the recliner seatback is placed in a fully ● Always place the lap portion of the belt across your
upright position. When the seatback is reclined, hips.
there is a greater risk that the passenger will slide 2
under the belt, especially in a frontal collision, and
be injured by the belt or by striking the instrument
panel or seatbacks.
● Seat belts should always be worn by every adult who
drives or rides in this vehicle and by all children
who are large enough to wear seat belts properly.
If children are too small for seat belts, use the
proper child restraint system for their age and
weight.
● Remove any twists when using the belt.
● No modifications or additions should be made by the
user that will either prevent the seat belt adjusting
devices from operating to remove any slack or pre-
vent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to
remove any slack.

2-35
 Seat and seat belts

3-point-type seat belt

(with emergency locking mechanism) ! WARNING
E00404900897 ● Never wear the lap portion of the belt across your
This type of belt requires no length adjustment. Once fastened, abdomen. The risk of injury in an accident is
the belt adjusts itself to the movement of the wearer. However, increased due to sharp pressure on the abdomen
in the event of a sudden or strong shock, the belt automatically from the seat belt.
locks to restrain the wearer’s body. ● The seat belts must not be twisted when worn.
To fasten
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding the latch plate. 3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust the tension as desired.
2 NOTE
● When the seat belt cannot be pulled due to locking, pull To unfasten
the belt once forcefully and let it retract. Then pull the belt Hold the latch plate and push the button on the buckle.
out slowly once again.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.

NOTE
● As the belt retracts automatically, hold the latch plate
while retracting so that the belt stows away slowly. Fail-
ure to do so could damage the vehicle.

2-36
 Seat and seat belts

Driver’s seat belt warning lamp and display the seat belt whenever the vehicle is stopped and started off
E00409800426 again. The warning will operate in the same way if the seat belt
A warning tone and warning lamp are used to remind the driver is unbuckled while driving the vehicle. The warning will stop
and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. when the seat belt is fastened.

If the ignition switch is turned to “ON” while the driver’s seat

belt is unbuckled, the warning lamp flashes and the tone
sounds for about 6 seconds to remind the driver to fasten the
seat belt.
If the vehicle is driven without fastening the seat belt, approxi-
mately 1 minute after the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the warning lamp flashes repeatedly and the tone
sounds continuously. At the same time, “FASTEN SEAT
BELT” is displayed on the multi-information display.
The warning lamp goes off and the tone stops after approxi-
mately 90 seconds.
Subsequently, if the seat belt is still not fastened, the warning
lamp and tone will be activated to remind the driver to fasten

2-37
 Seat and seat belts

Front passenger seat belt warning lamp Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats)
E00411600027 E00405000329

The front passenger seat belt warning lamp is located in the The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.
instrument panel. Raise or lower the seat belt anchor (A) while pressing the lock
knob (B).

Down Up

The lamp comes on when a person sits on the front passenger

seat but does not fasten the seat belt. It goes off when the seat
belt is subsequently fastened. ! WARNING
● When adjusting the seat belt anchor, set it at a posi-
! WARNING tion that is sufficiently high so that the belt will
make full contact with your shoulder but will not
● Do not install any accessory or sticker that makes
touch your neck.
the light difficult to see.

2-38
 Seat and seat belts

Second and third seat belt storage Seat belt plate storage
E00405300205 After passing the belt through the rear notch (C), insert the
Store the second seat belts (excluding the centre seat belt) and plate into the front notch (D).
third seat belts as shown in the illustration.

A- Second seat belt

B- Third seat belt (Seating 7 passengers)

2-39
 Seat and seat belts

To store the second seat belt buckles Pregnant women restraint

E00412100016 E00405600077
When the second seat belts are not in use, insert the buckles
into the seat cushion slits. ! WARNING
● Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Pregnant women should use the available
seat belts. This will reduce the likelihood of injury to
both the woman and the unborn child. The lap belt
should be worn across the thighs and as snug against
2 the hips as possible, but not across the waist. Consult
your doctor if you have any additional questions or
concerns.

2-40
 Seat and seat belts

Seat belt pre-tensioner system and force ! WARNING

limiter system ● To obtain the best results from your pre-tensioner
E00405700166

The driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat each have a seat seat belt, make sure you have adjusted your seat
belt equipped with a pre-tensioner system. correctly and wear your seat belt properly.

Pre-tensioner system
E00405800662

The pre-tensioner system will retract their respective seat belts

! CAUTION
instantaneously, thus maximizing the seat belt’s effectiveness, ● Any installation of audio equipment or repairs in the
vicinity of the pre-tensioner seat belts or floor con-
if there is a frontal impact severe enough to injure the driver
sole must be performed in line with MITSUBISHI
2
and/or front passenger and the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position. MOTORS guidelines. It is important to do so
because the work could affect the pre-tensioner sys-
tems.
● If you need to scrap the vehicle, please consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
It is important to do so because unexpected activa-
tion of the pre-tensioner seat belts could cause inju-
ries.

NOTE
● The pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated if the vehicle
suffers a severe frontal impact, even if the seat belts are
not worn.
● The pre-tensioner seat belts are designed to work only
once. After the pre-tensioner seat belts have been acti-
vated, we recommed you have it replaced by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.

2-41
 Seat and seat belts

SRS warning Child restraint

E00405900243 E00406401196
The same warning lamp/display is shared by the SRS airbags When transporting children in your vehicle, some type of child
and the pre-tensioner seat belts. restraint system should always be used according to the size of
Refer to “SRS warning lamp/display” on page 2-72. the child. This is a legal requirement in most countries.
The regulations concerning driving with children in the front
Force limiter system seat may differ from country to country. You are advised to
E00406000140

In the event of a collision, each force limiter system will effec- comply with the relevant regulations.
tively absorb the load applied to the seat belt to minimize the
2 impact to the passenger. ! WARNING
● Where possible, put children in the rear seat. Acci-
dent statistics indicate that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seat rather than in the front seat.
● Holding a child in your arms is no substitute for a
restraint system. Failure to use a proper restraint
system can result in severe or fatal injury to your
child.
● Each restraint device or fixture is to be used by one
child only.
● When attaching a child restraint to the rear seat,
place the front seatbacks in the upright position.
Otherwise, the child could be seriously injured in
the event of hard braking or a collision.

2-42
 Seat and seat belts

Caution for installing a child restraint on vehicles Use rearward facing child restraints only in the rear seat or turn
with front passenger airbag off the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch. (Refer to “To
The label shown here is affixed to vehicles with a front passen- turn an airbag off” on page 2-61)
ger airbag.

Front passenger’s airbag ON

! WARNING
! WARNING ● A REARWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
● Extreme Hazard! must NOT be used in the front passenger seat, if the
Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint in a front passenger’s airbag has not been deactivated.
seat protected by an airbag in front of it! The force of an inflating airbag could kill or cause
serious injuries to the child. A rearward-facing child
restraint should be used in the rear seat.

2-43
 Seat and seat belts

Infants and small children

! WARNING E00406600609

● A FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT When transporting infants and small children in your vehicle,
should be used in the rear seat whenever possible; if follow the instructions provided below.
used in the front seat, adjust the seat to the most
rearward position.

Instructions:
● An infant carrier should be used for small infants. A child
seat should be used for small children if the shoulder belt
touches their face or throat.
● The child restraint system should be appropriate for your
child’s weight and height and should fit the vehicle prop-
erly. For a higher degree of safety: THE CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN
THE REAR SEAT.

2-44
 Seat and seat belts

NOTE Depending on the seating position in the vehicle and the

● Before purchasing a child restraint system, try installing it child restraint system that you have, the child restraint can
in the rear seat to make sure it fits properly. Due to the be attached using one of the following two locations:
location of the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat • To the lower anchorage in the rear seat ONLY if the
cushion, some manufacturer’s child restraint systems may child restraint has ISOFIX mountings (see page 2-47).
be difficult to install securely. • To the seat belt (see page 2-34, 2-53).
If the child restraint system can be pulled forward or to
either side easily on the seat cushion after the seat belt has
been tightened, choose another manufacturer’s child
restraint system.
2
! WARNING
● When installing a child restraint system, refer to the
instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
restraint system. Failure to use a proper restraint
system can result in severe or fatal injury to your
child.
● After installation, push and pull the child restraint
system back and forth and from side to side to check
that it is secured properly. If the child restraint sys-
tem is not installed securely, it may cause injury to
the child or other occupants in the event of an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
● When the child restraint system is not in use, keep
your child restraint system secured with the seat belt
or remove it from the vehicle to prevent it from
being thrown around inside the vehicle during an
accident.

2-45
 Seat and seat belts

Older children
E00406700105

Children who have outgrown the child restraint system should

be seated in the rear seat and wear combination lap shoulder
belt.
The lap portion of the belt should be snug and positioned low
on the abdomen so that it is below the top of the hip-bone. Oth-
erwise, the belt could intrude into the child’s abdomen during
an accident and cause injury.

2-46
 Seat and seat belts

Suitability for various ISOFIX positions

E00411400113

Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Mass Group Size class Fixture
Front Passenger Second Outboard
carrying cot F ISO/L1 X X
G ISO/L2 X X
X X
0 -Up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X IL 2
X X
0+ -Up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X IL, IL*1
D ISO/R2 X IL
C ISO/R3 X IL
X X
I -9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X IL
C ISO/R3 X IL
B ISO/F2 X IUF
B1 ISO/F2X X IUF, IL*2
A ISO/F3 X IUF
X X
II -15 to 25 kg X X
III -22 to 36 kg X X

2-47
 Seat and seat belts

Key for letters to be inserted into the table above:

● IUF- Suitable for ISOFIX forward oriented child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
● IL- Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in the attached list.
These ISOFIX CRS are of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semiuniversal” categories.
● X- ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.

IL (Genuine part information)

Genuine part No. ECE no.

2 *1 MZ313589 E1-04301146
*2 MZ313045 E1-04301133

NOTE
● MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to make changes without any prior announcement.
For detailed information, please consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.

2-48
 Seat and seat belts

Suitability for various seating positions

E00406800597

Seating Position
Front Passenger
Mass Group Second
Activated Deactivated Second Centre Third
Outboard
Airbag Airbag*1
0 -Up to 10 kg X X U X X
0+ -Up to 13 kg X L*2, L U, L*2, L*3 X X 2
I -9 to 18 kg L*4, L*5 L*4, L*5 U, L*4, L*5 L*4, L*5 X
II & III -15 to 36 kg L*6 L*6 U, L*6 X X

*1: With front passenger’s airbag deactivated by means of front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
Key for letters to be inserted into the table above:
● U - Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
● UF - Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
● L- Suitable for particular child restraints (MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts.)
● B - Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.
● X - Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

2-49
 Seat and seat belts
L (Genuine part information)

Genuine parts no. ECE no.

*2 MZ312807 E1-04301146
*3 MZ313589 E1-04301146
*4 MZ312745 E1-04301136
*5 MZ313045 E1-04301133
2 *6 MZ312808 E1-04301148

NOTE
● There are no applicable MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts for the Mass Group “0 - Up to 10 kg (0 - 9 months)”.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to make changes without any prior announcement.
For detailed information, please consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.

2-50
 Seat and seat belts

Installing a child restraint system on the lower Tether anchorage locations

anchorage (ISOFIX child restraint mountings) There are 3 child restraint anchorage points located on the back
and tether anchorage of the seatbacks of the 2nd seat. These are for fastening the
E00406900471
child restraint tether straps to the 3 seating positions of the sec-
ond seat.
Lower anchorage location
Your vehicle’s rear seat is fitted with lower anchorages for
attaching a child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings.

! WARNING
● Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attach-
ing other items or equipment to the vehicle.

2-51
 Seat and seat belts

Child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings To install

The child restraint system is only designed for seats that incor- 1. Remove any foreign material in or around the connectors
porate lower anchorages. Retain the child restraint system and ensure the vehicle seat belt is in its normal storage
using the lower anchorages. position.
It is not necessary to retain the child restraint system using the 2. Push the child restraint system’s connectors (A) into the
vehicle’s seatbelts. slit (B) in accordance with the instructions provided by
the child restraint system’s manufacturer.

A: Child restraint system connectors

A: Connector
B: Slit
C: Vehicle seatback
D: Vehicle seat cushion
E: Lower anchor

2-52
 Seat and seat belts
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat on which you Installing a child restraint system to a 3-point
wish to install a child restraint. type seat belt (with emergency locking
4. Latch the tether strap hook (F) of the child restraint sys-
tem to the tether anchor (G) and tighten the strap so that it
mechanism)
E00408700196
is securely fastened.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in all directions to ensure

it is secure.
To remove
Remove the child restraint in accordance with the instructions
provided by the child restraint system’s manufacturer.
Installation:
1. Fasten the seat belt to secure the child restraint system.
Make sure you hear a “click” when you insert the latch
plate in the buckle.
2. Use the locking clip to completely eliminate any slack-
ness.

2-53
 Seat and seat belts
3. Push and pull the child restraint in all directions to be sure Seat belt inspection
it is secure. E00406300475

● Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed webbing and for
! WARNING cracked or deformed metallic parts. Replace the belt
assembly if it is defective.
● For some types of child restraint, the locking clip (A)
● A dirty belt should be cleaned with neutral detergent in
should be used to help avoid personal injury during
warm water. After rinsing in water, let it dry in the shade.
a collision or sudden manoeuvre.
Do not attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts because this
It must be fitted and used in accordance with the
will affect their characteristics.
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2 The locking clip must be removed when the child
restraint is removed. ! WARNING
● We recommend you have all seat belt assemblies
including retractors and attaching hardware
inspected after any collision. We recommend that
seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts
show no damage and continue to operate properly.
● Do not attempt to repair or replace any part of the
seat belt assemblies; we recommend you have this
work done by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ised Service Point. Incorrect repair or replacement
could reduce the effectiveness of the belts and could
result in serious injury in the event of a collision.
● Once the pre-tensioner has been activated, it cannot
be re-used.
It must be replaced together with the retractor.

2-54
 Seat and seat belts

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag How the supplemental restraint system works
E00407201410 E00407300948

This information about SRS airbags includes important infor- The SRS includes the following components:
mation concerning the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags,
the side airbags and the curtain airbags.
The SRS are designed to supplement the primary protection of
the driver and front passenger seat belt systems by providing
those occupants with protection against head and chest injuries
in certain moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
The driver’s and front passenger’s airbags are dual-stage air-
bags. Their deployment stages are controlled by impact sensors 2
(on the front of the vehicle and in the centre of the vehicle
floor) corresponding to the severity of the impact.
The SRS side airbags (if so equipped) are designed to supple-
ment properly worn seat belts and provide the driver and front
passenger with protection against chest and abdomen injuries
in certain moderate-to-severe side impact collisions.
1- Airbag module (Driver)
The SRS curtain airbags (if so equipped) are designed to sup-
plement properly worn seat belts and provide the driver and 2- Front passenger’s airbag off indicator lamp
passenger with protection against head injuries in certain mod- 3- Airbag module (Passenger)
erate-to-severe side impact collisions. 4- Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch

The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat belts. To ensure the
maximum protection during all types of collisions and acci-
dents, all occupants, including the passengers as well as the
driver, must wear their seat belts.

2-55
 Seat and seat belts
The deployment of the airbags produces a sudden, loud noise
and releases some smoke and powder, but these conditions are
not injurious and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle. People
with respiratory problems may feel some temporary irritation
from chemicals used to produce the deployment; open the win-
dows after airbag deployment, if safe to do so.
The airbags deflate very rapidly after deployment, so there is
little danger of obscured vision.

2 ! CAUTION
● Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid speed. In cer-
tain situations, contact with inflating airbags can
result in light cuts, bruises and the like.

5- Side airbag modules*

6- Curtain airbag modules*
The airbags will operate only when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” or “START” position.

2-56
 Seat and seat belts

! WARNING ! WARNING
● IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROPERLY ● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean your head
SEATED. or chest close to the steering wheel or instrument
A driver or front passenger seated too close to the panel. Do not put feet or legs on or against the
steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag instrument panel.
deployment might be killed or seriously injured. ● Place all infants and small children in the rear seat
Airbags inflate very fast and with great force. and properly restrain them using an appropriate
If the driver and front passenger are not properly child restraint system.
seated and restrained, the airbags may not protect The rear seat is the safest place for infants and chil-
them properly and could cause serious or fatal inju- dren. 2
ries when they inflate.

2-57
 Seat and seat belts
Use rearward facing child restraints only in the rear seat or turn
! WARNING off the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch. (Refer to “To
● Infants and small children should never be unre- turn an airbag off” on page 2-61)
strained, allowed to stand up against the instrument
panel or held in your arms or on your lap. They
could be seriously injured or killed in a collision, Front passenger’s airbag ON
including when the airbag inflates. They should be
properly seated in the rear seat in an appropriate
child restraint system. See the “Child restraint” sec-
tion of this owner’s manual.
2

! WARNING
● A REARWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
must NOT be used in the front passenger seat, if the
front passenger’s airbag has not been deactivated.
The force of an inflating airbag could kill or cause
serious injuries to the child.
A rearward-facing child restraint should be used in
the rear seat.

2-58
 Seat and seat belts

Caution for installing the child restraint on

! WARNING vehicle with front passenger airbag
● A FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT E00408800038
should be used in the rear seat whenever possible; if The label shown here is attached on vehicles with front passen-
it must be used in the front passenger seat, adjust ger airbag.
the seat to the most rearward position. Failure to do
so could kill or seriously injure the child.

! WARNING
● Extreme Hazard!
Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a
! WARNING seat protected by an airbag in front of it!
● Older children should be seated in the rear seat and
be wearing the seat belt properly, with an appropri-
ate booster seat if needed.

2-59
 Seat and seat belts

Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch Front passenger’s airbag off indicator lamp
E00410100083 E00410200130

The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch can be used to The front passenger’s airbag off indicator is located on the
disable the front passenger’s airbag. If you have a rearward instrument panel.
facing child restraint system that cannot be fitted to any seat
other than the front passenger seat, be sure to turn OFF the
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch before using it.
(Refer to “To turn an airbag off” on page2-61)
Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is located in the
glove box.
2

The indicator lamp should light when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position, and should go off after a few sec-
onds.
When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned
OFF, the indicator will stay on to indicate that the passenger
front airbag is not operational. After the front passenger’s air
bag ON-OFF switch has been returned to the ON position, the
indicator will turn off to indicate that the front passenger’s air
bag is operational.

2-60
 Seat and seat belts

To turn the front passenger airbag off

! WARNING E00412300034

● Do not fit any accessory that makes the indicator

impossible to see, and do not cover the indicator ! WARNING
with a sticker. You would not be able to verify the ● To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury:
status of the passenger airbag system. • Always remove the key from the ignition switch
before operating an airbag ON-OFF switch. Fail-
ure to do so could adversely affect airbag perform-
ance.
• Wait at least 60 seconds to operate the airbag ON-
OFF switch after turning the ignition switch from 2
the “ON” position to the “LOCK” position.
The SRS airbag system is designed to retain
enough voltage to deploy the airbag.
• Always remove the key from an airbag ON-OFF
switch after operating that switch. Failure to do so
could lead to improper position of the airbag ON-
OFF switch.
• Do not turn OFF the front passenger’s airbag ON-
OFF switch except when a rearward facing child
restraint system is fitted to the front passenger
seat.
• If the indicator does not come on when the front
passenger’s air bag ON-OFF switch is turned OFF,
do not fit a rearward-facing child restraint system
to the front passenger seat. We recommend you to
have the system inspected by a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
• If the indicator remains on when the front passen-
ger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned ON, do not
allow anyone to sit on the front passenger seat. We
recommend you to have the system inspected by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service
Point.
2-61
 Seat and seat belts
To turn the front passenger airbag off, follow these steps: Driver’s and passenger’s front airbag system
1. Insert the key into the airbag ON-OFF switch, and turn it E00407400486

to the “OFF” position. The driver’s airbag is located under the padded cover in the
2. Remove the key from the key slot of the airbag ON-OFF middle of the steering wheel. The front passenger’s airbag is
switch. contained in the instrument panel above the upper glove box.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition The driver’s airbag and the front passenger’s airbag are
to the “ON” position. The front passenger’s airbag off designed to inflate simultaneously even if the passenger seat is
indicator lamp will illuminate permanently. not occupied.
The driver’s airbag inflates at two different rates according to
the severity of the impact.
2 The front passenger’s airbag deploys at the same time as the
driver’s airbag, even if the passenger seat is not occupied, and
inflates at two different rates according to the severity of the
impact.

The front passenger’s airbag is now deactivated and cannot

deploy until switched on again.

2-62
 Seat and seat belts

Deployment of front airbags The front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact
E00407501149 exceeds the designed threshold level, comparable to a collision
The front airbags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY at approximately 25 km/h when impacting straight into a solid
wall that does not move or deform. If the severity of the impact
when… is below the threshold level above, the front airbags may not
The front airbags are designed to deploy when the vehicle suf- deploy. However, this threshold speed will be considerably
fers a moderate-to-severe frontal impact. Examples of some higher if the vehicle strikes an object that absorbs the impact
typical conditions are shown in the illustration. by either deforming or moving (for example, another stationary
vehicle, a pole or guard rail).
Since frontal collisions can easily move you out of position, it
is important that seat belts are always worn properly. Your seat 2
belt will help keep you at a safe distance from the steering
wheel and instrument panel during the initial stages of airbag
deployment. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most
forceful and may cause serious or fatal injuries. Moreover, the
seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of protection
in a collision. The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) air-
bags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore,
ensure that seat belts are always worn properly for the benefit
of your personal safety and that of all occupants.

1- Head-on collision with a solid wall at a speed of approxi-

mately 25 km/h (15 mph) or higher
2- Moderate-to-severe frontal impact within the shaded area
between the arrows

2-63
 Seat and seat belts

The front airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY when… The front airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY
With certain types of frontal collisions, the vehicle’s body when…
structure is designed to absorb the shock to help protect the The front airbags are not designed to deploy in conditions
occupants from harm. (The vehicle body’s front area may where they cannot typically provide protection to the occupant.
deform significantly as it absorbs the impact.) Under such cir- Such conditions are shown in the illustration.
cumstances the front airbags may not deploy, irrespective of
the deformation and damage to the vehicle body.
Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the illustra-
tion.

1- Rear-end collisions
2- Side collisions
3- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

1- Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object Since the front airbags do not protect the occupant in all types
2- Vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck of frontal collisions, ensure seat belts are always worn prop-
3- Oblique frontal impacts erly.

Since the front airbags do not protect the occupant in all types
of frontal collisions, ensure seat belts are always worn prop-
erly.

2-64
 Seat and seat belts

The front airbags MAY DEPLOY when…

The front airbags may deploy if the bottom of the vehicle suf- ! WARNING
fers a moderate-to-severe impact (undercarriage damage). ● Do not attach anything to the steering wheel’s pad-
Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the illustra- ded cover, such as badges or accessories. They might
tion. strike and injure occupants when the airbag inflates.
● Do not place anything on or attach anything to the
instrument panel above the glove box. They might
strike and injure occupants when the airbag inflates.

1- Collision with an elevated median/island or curb

2- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
3- Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the ground
It is important that seat belts are always worn properly since
the front airbags may deploy in certain types of unexpected ! WARNING
impacts, as shown in the illustration, that can easily move you ● Do not attach accessories to or place them in front of
out of position. Your seat belt will help keep you at a safe dis- the windscreen. These objects could restrict airbag
tance from the steering wheel and instrument panel during the inflation or strike and injure an occupant when the
initial stages of airbag deployment. The initial stage of airbag air bags inflate.
inflation is the most forceful and may cause serious or fatal
injuries if you come into contact with it at this moment.

2-65
 Seat and seat belts

Side airbag system*

! WARNING E00407600303
● Do not place packages, pets or other objects between The side airbags (A) are contained in the driver and front pas-
the airbags and the driver or front passenger. They senger seatbacks.
could affect airbag performance or cause injury The side airbag is designed to inflate only on the side of the
when the airbag inflates. vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front
● Immediately after airbag inflation, several airbag seat.
system components will be hot. Do not touch these
components. There is a danger of being burnt.
● The airbag system is designed to work only once.
2 Once the airbags have deployed, they will not work
again. They must be replaced immediately. We rec-
ommend you have the entire airbag system
inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
Service Point.

2-66
 Seat and seat belts
The label shown here is attached to the seatbacks equipped Curtain airbag system*
with a side airbag. E00409100113

The curtain airbags are contained in the front pillars and roof
side rail. The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only on the
side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in
the front seat or second seat.

2-67
 Seat and seat belts

Deployment of side airbags and curtain airbags The side airbags and curtain airbags MAY NOT
E00407700593 DEPLOY when...
The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE DESIGNED With certain types of side collisions, the vehicle’s body struc-
TO DEPLOY when... ture is designed to absorb the shock to help protect the occu-
The side airbags and curtain airbags are designed to deploy pants from harm. (The vehicle body’s side area may deform
when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe side impact to significantly as it absorbs the impact.) Under such circum-
the middle of the passenger compartment. stances, the side airbags and curtain airbags may not deploy
The typical condition is shown in the illustration. irrespective of the deformation and damage to the vehicle
body. In addition, depending on the location of the impact, the
side airbags and curtain airbags may not deploy simultane-
2 ously. Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the
illustration.

The seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of pro-
tection in a collision. The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem) side airbags and curtain airbags are designed to provide
additional protection. Therefore, ensure that seat belts are
always worn properly for the benefit of your personal safety 1- Side impacts in an area away from the passenger compart-
and that of all occupants. ment
2- Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle collides with the
side of vehicle
3- Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object
2-68
 Seat and seat belts

The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE NOT

DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when...
The side airbags and curtain airbags are not designed to deploy
in conditions where they cannot usually provide protection to
the occupant. Typical conditions are shown in the illustration.

4- Oblique side impacts

5- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not protect the
occupant in all types of side collisions, be sure to always prop-
erly wear your seat belts.
1- Head-on collisions
2- Rear-end collisions

2-69
 Seat and seat belts
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not protect the
occupant in all types of collisions, be sure to always properly
wear your seat belts.

! WARNING
● The side airbags and curtain airbags are designed to
supplement the driver and passenger seat belts in
certain side impacts. Seat belts should always be
worn properly, and the driver and passengers
2 should sit well back and upright without leaning
against the window or door.

! WARNING
● The side airbags and curtain airbags inflates with
great force. The driver and passenger should not put ! WARNING
their arms out the window, and should not lean ● Do not allow any second seat occupant to hold onto
against the door, in order to reduce risk of serious or the seatback of either front seat, in order to reduce
possible fatal injury from the deploying side airbags risk of injury from the deploying side airbags. Spe-
and curtain airbags. cial care should be taken with children.
● Do not place any objects near or in front of the seat-
back of either front seat. They could interfere with
proper side airbag inflation, and also could cause
injury if thrown free by side airbag deployment.
● Do not place stickers, labels or additional trim on
the seatback of either front seat. They could inter-
fere with proper side airbag inflation.
● Do not install seat covers on seats with side airbags.
Do not re-cover seats that have side airbags. This
could interfere with proper side airbag inflation.

2-70
 Seat and seat belts

! WARNING ! WARNING
● Do not attach a microphone (A) or any other device ● Do not put a hanger or any heavy or pointed object
or object to the area where the curtain airbags (B) on the coat hook. If the curtain airbag were to be
activate such as on the windscreen, door windows, activated, any such item could be propelled away
front and rear pillars and roof side or assist grips. with great force and could prevent the curtain air-
When the curtain airbags inflate, the microphone or bag from inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
other device or object will be hurled away with great on the coat hook (without using a hanger). Make
force or the curtain airbags may not activate cor- sure there are no heavy or sharp objects in the pock-
rectly, resulting in death or serious injury. ets of clothes that you hang on the coat hook.
● Never install a rearward-facing child restraint in the 2
front passenger seat. A forward-facing child
restraint should only be used in the rear seat when-
ever possible. If a forward-facing child restraint
must be used in the front passenger seat, adjust the
seat to the most rearward position and use care to
ensure that the child stays in the child restraint and
away from the door.
● Do not allow a child to lean against or close to the
front door even if seated in a child restraint system.
A child should also not lean with the head against or
be close to the area where the side airbags and cur-
tain airbags are located. This is dangerous if the side
airbags and curtain airbags inflate.
Failure to follow all of these instructions could lead
to serious or fatal injury to a child.
● We recommend work around and on the side airbag
system to be done by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorised Service Point.

2-71
 Seat and seat belts

SRS warning lamp/display

E00407801038 ! WARNING
The warning lamp/display illuminates when there is a fault ● When the warning lamp/display acts as follows, the
with the system. In addition, the message “SERVICE system could be faulty. In this case, the SRS airbag
REQUIRED” will appear on the multi-information display. or seat belt pre-tensioner might not operate nor-
Normally, when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”, the mally during a collision, etc., possibly resulting in
warning lamp should illuminate for several seconds and then injury. Therefore, have them inspected by an
go out. authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon
After deployment of an SRS airbag or operation of the pre-ten- as possible.
sioner system, the warning lamp will illuminate and stay on. • The warning lamp does not illuminate or stays on
2 The SRS warning lamp is shared by the Supplemental when the ignition switch is turned to “ON”.
Restraint System (SRS) and the seat belt pre-tensioner system. • The warning lamp illuminates while driving.
• The warning message appears while driving.

2-72
 Seat and seat belts

SRS servicing NOTE

E00407900960 ● When you transfer ownership of the vehicle to some other
person, we urge you to alert the new owner that it is
! WARNING equipped with the SRS and refer that owner to the applica-
● We recommend any maintenance performed on or ble section in this owner’s manual.
near the components of the SRS to be performed by ● If your vehicle has to be scrapped do this in line with local
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service legislation and contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Point. Authorised Service Point to safely dismantle the airbag
Improper work on the SRS components or wiring system.
could result in inadvertent deployment of the air-
bags, or could render the SRS inoperative; either
2
situation could result in serious injury.
● Do not modify your steering wheel, seat belt retrac-
tor or any other SRS components. For example,
replacement of the steering wheel, or modifications
to the front bumper or body structure can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury.
● If your vehicle has received any damage, we recom-
mend you to have the SRS inspected to ensure it is in
proper working order.
● Do not modify your front seats, centre pillar and
centre console.
It can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to
possible injury.
If you found any tear scratch, crack or damage to
the seat fabric near the side airbag, the portion of
the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, you
should have the SRS inspected by a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorised Service Point.

2-73
Instruments and controls

Instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 2
Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 4
Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and
information screen display list . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 41
Indicator lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 53
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 54
Information screen display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 56
Combination headlamps and dipper switch . . . . . .3- 60
Headlamp levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 65 3
Turn-signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 68
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 69
Fog lamp switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 69
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 71
Wiper deicer switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 79
Headlamp washer switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 78
Rear window demister switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 80
Horn switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 81
 Instruments and controls

Instruments Tachometer
E00500100573 E00500300445

The tachometer indicates the engine speed (r/min). The

tachometer can help you obtain more economical driving and
also warns you of excessive engine speeds (Red zone).

1- Speedometer (km or mph + km/h)

2- Multi-information display → P. 3-4
Information screen display list → P. 3-41
3- Tachometer → P. 3-2
4- Daytime dipper button (meter illumination control)
! CAUTION
→ P. 3-3 ● When driving, watch the tachometer to make sure
that the engine speed indication does not rise into
the red zone (excessive engine rpm).

3-2
 Instruments and controls

Daytime dipper button

(meter illumination control)
E00519800055

Each time you press this button, there is a confirmation sound

and the brightness of the instruments changes.
NOTE
● If you press and hold the button for longer than about 1
second, the brightness automatically scrolls through its
different levels, and stops scrolling when you release the
button.
Select your desired level of brightness.
● You can adjust to 8 different levels for when the tail lamps
are illuminated and 8 for when they are extinguished. 3
● When the lamp switch is in the “AUTO” position, the
meter illumination switches automatically to the adjusted
brightness, depending on the brightness outside the vehi-
cle.
● The brightness level of the instruments is stored when the
ignition switch is turned off.

1- Brightness display

3-3
 Instruments and controls

Multi-information display
E00519900186

The multi-information display gives following information: warnings, odometer/tripmeter, service reminder, engine coolant tem-
perature, fuel level, outside temperature, selector lever position, 4WD operation status, average and momentary fuel consumption,
driving range, average speed and meter illumination.
It is also possible to change the language and units used on the multi-information display etc.

When the ignition switch When the ignition switch When the ignition switch is
is “OFF” is “ON” (A/T, CVT) “ON” (M/T)

1- “!” mark display screen (when the ignition switch is “OFF”) 5- “!” mark display screen (when the ignition switch is “ON”)
→ P. 3-6 → P. 3-12
2- Information display screen (when the ignition switch is 6- Active Stability Control (ASC) OFF display screen*
“OFF”) → P. 3-12
→ P. 3-6 7- Information screen (when the ignition switch is “ON”)
Interrupt display screen (when the ignition switch is “OFF”) → P. 3-13
→ P. 3-8 Interrupt screen (when the ignition switch is “ON”) →
3- Door ajar warning display screen (when the ignition switch P. 3-19
is “OFF”) → P. 3-10 8- Selector lever position display screen* → P. 3-20
4- Drive mode display screen* → P. 3-12 9- Outside temperature display screen → P. 3-21
10- Fuel level display screen → P. 3-22

3-4
 Instruments and controls

NOTE
● The fuel units, temperature units, display language, and
other settings can be changed. Information screen (when the ignition switch is “OFF”)
Refer to “Changing the function settings (when the igni- P. 3-6
tion switch is “ON”)” on page 3-28.
● The display contents differ according to whether the igni-
tion switch is in the “OFF” or “ON” position.
Refer to “Information screen (when the ignition switch is
“OFF”)” on page 3-6.
Refer to “Warning display list (when the ignition switch is
“OFF”)” on page 3-43.
Refer to “Information screen (when the ignition switch is Information screen (when the ignition switch is “ON”)
turned from “OFF” to “ON”)” on page 3-10. P. 3-13
Refer to “Information screen (when the ignition switch is 3
“ON”)” on page 3-13.
Refer to “Warning display list (when the ignition switch is
“ON”)” on page 3-45.
Multi-information meter switch
E00520000028

Each time the multi-information meter switch is operated, a

sound is emitted and the multi-information display changes
between information such as warnings, odometer/tripmeter,
service reminder, engine coolant temperature, average and
momentary fuel consumption, driving range, and average
speed.
It is also possible to change elements such as the language and
units used on the multi-information display by operating the
multi-information meter switch.

3-5
 Instruments and controls

“!” mark display screen

(when the ignition switch is “OFF”)
E00520100016

If you press the multi-information meter switch

and return from the warning display screen to the
previous screen, the “!” mark is displayed.
Refer to “To return to the screen displayed
before the warning display” on page 3-8. When there is no
This mark is also displayed if there is another warning display
warning other than the one displayed. When the
cause of the warning display is eliminated, the
“!” mark goes out automatically.
3 NOTE
● When the “!” mark is displayed, the warn- When there is a
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the warning display
information screen.
Refer to “Information screen (when the
ignition switch is “OFF”)” on page 3-6.
Refer to “Information screen (when the
ignition switch is “ON”)” on page 3-13.
Information display screen
(when the ignition switch is “OFF”)
E00520200235

Each time you lightly press the multi-information meter

switch, the display switches in the following order.

3-6
 Instruments and controls

1- Odometer/Tripmeter
2- Odometer/Tripmeter
3- Service reminder
4- Redisplay of a warning display screen
Odometer / Tripmeter
E00521200434

Each time you lightly press the multi-information meter

switch, the display screen switches.

Odometer / Tripmeter → Odometer / Tripmeter →

Service reminder → Redisplay of a warning display screen →
Odometer / Tripmeter 3
Odometer
The odometer indicates the distance travelled.
Tripmeter
The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled between two
points.

Example usage of tripmeter and tripmeter

It is possible to measure two currently travelled distances, NOTE
● If there is no warning display, the switching sequence is:
from home using tripmeter and from a particular point
Odometer / Tripmeter → Odometer / Tripmeter →
on the way using tripmeter .
Service reminder → Odometer / Tripmeter .
To reset the tripmeter
● Both tripmeters and can count up to 9999.9 km
To return the display to 0, hold down the multi-information
(9999.9 miles).
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more. Only the currently
When a tripmeter goes past 9999.9 km (9999.9 miles), it
displayed value will be reset.
returns to 0.0 km (0.0 miles).
Example
If tripmeter is displayed, only tripmeter will be reset.
3-7
 Instruments and controls
● When disconnecting the battery terminal, the memories of Interrupt display screen
tripmeter display and display are erased, and their (when the ignition switch is “OFF”)
displays return to 0.0 km (0.0 miles). E00520500010

When there is information to be announced, such as lamp

Service reminder reminders, the buzzer sounds and the multi-information display
E00521300451
switches to the warning display screen. Refer to the appropriate
This displays the distance and number of months
page and take the necessary measures.
until the next periodic inspection.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warn-
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 3-24.
ing display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list (when the ignition switch is
“OFF”)” on page 3-43.

1- Information generated
2- Cause eliminated

3-8
 Instruments and controls

To return to the screen displayed before the warning NOTE

display ● Warning display screens with a “ ” or “ ” mark dis-
Even if the cause of the warning display is not eliminated, you played in the upper right of the screen can be switched. If
can return to the screen that was displayed before the warning you want to switch the display, press the multi-informa-
display. tion meter switch as follows.
If you press the multi-information meter switch, the display “ ”: Press lightly.
screen switches to the screen that was displayed before the
warning display and the “!” mark is displayed. “ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more.
Redisplay of a warning display screen
When the “!” mark is displayed, if you lightly press the multi-
information meter switch a few times, the warning display
screen you switched from is redisplayed.
Refer to “Information screen (when the ignition switch is
“OFF”)” on page 3-6. 3

A- “!” mark

3-9
 Instruments and controls

Door ajar warning display screen Information screen

(when the ignition switch is “OFF”) (when the ignition switch is turned from “OFF”
E00520600011
to “ON”)
If any of the doors or the tailgate is not completely closed, this E00520700184
displays the open door or tailgate. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
display switches in the following order.

1- Doors and tailgate are closed

2- Doors or tailgate is open 1- Screen when the ignition switch is “OFF”
2- System check screen
3- Screen when the ignition switch is “ON”

3-10
 Instruments and controls

System check screen Service reminder

When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the When the time for periodic inspection arrives, “PERIODIC
system check screen is displayed for about 4 seconds. If there INSPECTION” is displayed for a few seconds after the igni-
is no fault, the information screen (for ignition “ON”) is dis- tion switch “ON” screen. Refer to “Service reminder” on page
played. 3-24.
If there is a fault, the screen changes to the corresponding
warning display.
Refer to “Warning display list (when the ignition switch is
“ON”)” on page 3-45.

NOTE
● The system check screen display varies depending on the
vehicle’s equipment.

3-11
 Instruments and controls

Drive mode display screen* Active Stability Control (ASC) OFF

E00520800198
display screen*
This displays the 4WD system status. E00521000012
If you select “4WD LOCK” mode with the drive This is displayed when the active stability con-
mode selector, “4WD LOCK” is displayed; if trol (ASC) is turned off with the ASC OFF
you select “4WD AUTO” mode, “4WD” is dis- switch.
played. If there is a fault with the ASC, the ASC OFF
When the 2WD mode is selected nothing is dis- display is shown.
played. Refer to “Drive mode selector” on page Refer to “ASC OFF switch” on page 4-65.
4-47.

“!” mark display screen (when the

3 ignition switch is “ON”)
E00520900014

This is displayed when you press the multi-infor-

mation meter switch and switch the warning dis-
play screen.
This mark is also displayed if there is another
warning other than the one displayed.
When the cause of the warning display is elimi-
nated, the “!” mark goes out automatically.
NOTE
● When the “!” mark is displayed, the warn-
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
information screen.
Refer to “Information screen (when the
ignition switch is “OFF”)” on page 3-6.
Refer to “Information screen (when the
ignition switch is “ON”)” on page 3-13.

3-12
 Instruments and controls

Information screen
(when the ignition switch is “ON”)
E00521100198

Each time you lightly press the multi-information meter

switch, the display screen switches in the following order.

When there is no
warning display

When there is a
warning display

3-13
 Instruments and controls

Service reminder
1- Odometer / Tripmeter E00521300448

2- Odometer / Tripmeter This displays the distance and number of months

3- Service reminder until the next periodic inspection.
4- Engine coolant temperature display Refer to “Service reminder” on page 3-24.
5- Driving range display
6- Average speed display, average fuel consumption display, Engine coolant temperature display
momentary fuel consumption display E00521400162

7- Function setting screen This indicates the engine coolant temperature.

8- Redisplay of a warning display screen If the coolant becomes hot, the engine coolant
temperature display screen will automatically
NOTE appear and “ ” will blink.
● While driving, the function setting screen is not displayed
Pay careful attention to the engine coolant tem-
3 even if you operate the multi-information meter switch.
perature display while you are driving.
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before operating.
Refer to “Changing the function settings (when the igni-
tion switch is “ON”)” on page 3-28. ! CAUTION
● When there is information to be announced, such as a sys- ● If the engine is overheating, the display
tem fault, the buzzer sounds and the screen display is will be interrupted with a warning dis-
switched. play. Then the engine coolant tempera-
Refer to “Interrupt display screen (when the ignition ture display screen will appear and
switch is “ON”)” on page 3-19. “ ” will blink. In this case, the bar
Odometer / Tripmeter graph is on the red zone. lmmediately
E00521200014 park the vehicle in a safe place and
The operation method is the same as when the take the required measures. Refer to
ignition switch is “OFF”. “Engine overheating” on page 6-7.
Refer to “Odometer / Tripmeter” for further
details on page 3-14.

3-14
 Instruments and controls

Driving range display ● The display setting can be changed to the

E00521500017 preferred units (km or miles).
This displays the approximate driving range Refer to “Changing the function settings
(how many more kilometres or miles you can (when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on
drive). When the driving range falls below page 3-28.
approximately 50 km (30 miles), “---” is dis-
played.
Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
● The remaining distance is based on the pre-
vious fuel consumption data. The actual
distance will depend on the driving condi-
tions (road conditions, how you drive, etc.). 3
When the battery terminal is disconnected,
the previous fuel consumption data is
erased. A value different from before may
be displayed. Treat the distance displayed
as just a rough guideline.
● When you refuel, the driving range display
is updated.
However, if you only add a small amount of
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
Fill with a full tank whenever possible.
● On rare occasions, the value displayed for
the driving range may change if you are
parked on an extremely steep incline. This
is due to the movement of fuel in the tank
and does not indicate any malfunction.

3-15
 Instruments and controls

Average speed display Auto reset mode

E00521600210 ● When the average speed is being displayed,
This displays the average speed from the last if you hold down the multi-information
reset to the present time. meter switch, the average speed displayed
There are the following 2 mode settings. at that time is reset.
For the method for changing the average speed ● If the ignition switch is at “ACC” or
display setting, refer to “Changing the function “LOCK” for about 4 hours or longer, the
settings (when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on average speed display is automatically
page 3-28. reset.
Manual reset mode NOTE
● When the average speed is being displayed, ● The average speed display can be reset indi-
if you hold down the multi-information vidually for the auto reset mode and manual
3 meter switch, the average speed displayed reset mode.
at that time is reset. ● “---” is displayed when the average speed
● When the ignition switch is switched from cannot be measured.
“ACC” or “LOCK” to “ON”, the mode set- ● The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
ting is automatically switched from manual mode”.
to auto. ● The display setting can be changed to the
Although the mode setting is automatically preferred units (km/h or mph).
switched to the auto reset mode, if you Refer to “Changing the function settings
switch the mode setting to the manual reset (when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on
mode, the average speed from the last time page 3-28.
the display is reset will be displayed. ● The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
ual reset mode for the average speed display
is erased if the battery is disconnected.

3-16
 Instruments and controls

Average fuel consumption display ● If the ignition switch is at “ACC” or

E00521700208 “LOCK” for about 4 hours or longer, the
This displays the average fuel consumption from average fuel consumption display is auto-
the last reset to the present time. matically reset.
There are the following 2 mode settings.
For information on how to change the average NOTE
fuel consumption display setting, refer to ● The average fuel consumption display can
“Changing the function settings (when the igni- be reset individually for the auto reset mode
tion switch is “ON”)” on page 3-28. and manual reset mode.
● “---” is displayed when the average fuel
Manual reset mode consumption cannot be measured.
● When the average fuel consumption is ● The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
being displayed, if you hold down the mode”.
multi-information meter switch, the average ● The average fuel consumption will depend 3
fuel consumption displayed at that time is on the driving conditions (road conditions,
reset. how you drive, etc.). The displayed fuel
● When the ignition switch is switched from consumption may vary from the actual fuel
“ACC” or “LOCK” to “ON”, the mode set- consumption. Treat the fuel consumption
ting is automatically switched from manual displayed as just a rough guideline.
to auto. ● The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
Although the mode setting is automatically ual reset mode for the average fuel con-
switched to the auto reset mode, if you sumption display is erased if the battery is
switch the mode setting to the manual reset disconnected.
mode, the average fuel consumption from ● The display setting can be changed to the
the last time the display is reset will be dis- preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg
played. (UK) or L/100 km}.
Auto reset mode Refer to “Changing the function settings
● When the average fuel consumption is (when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on
being displayed, if you hold down the page 3-28.
multi-information meter switch, the average
fuel consumption displayed at that time is
reset.

3-17
 Instruments and controls

Momentary fuel consumption display Function setting screen

E00521800010 E00521900011

While driving, this displays the momentary fuel The “Display language”, “Temperature unit”,
consumption, using a bar graph. “Fuel consumption unit”, and “Average fuel con-
sumption and speed reset method” settings can
NOTE be modified as desired.
● When the momentary fuel consumption Refer to “Changing function settings (when the
cannot be measured, the bar graph is not ignition switch is “ON”)” for further details on
displayed. page 3-28.
● The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg
(UK) or L/100 km}.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
3 (when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on
page 3-28.

3-18
 Instruments and controls

Interrupt display screen

(when the ignition switch is “ON”)
E00522000080

Warning display
When there is information to be announced, such as a system
fault, a sound is emitted and the information screen is switched
to the warning display screen.
Refer to the warning list and take the necessary measures.
Refer to “Warning display list (when the ignition switch is
“ON”)” on page 3-45.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warn-
ing display goes out automatically.
To return to the screen displayed before the warning dis- 3
play
Even if the cause of the warning display is not eliminated, you
can return to the screen that was displayed before the warning
display.
If you press the multi-information meter switch, the display
screen switches to the screen that was displayed before the
warning display and the “!” mark is displayed.
A- “!” mark
NOTE
● Warning display screens with a “ ” or “ ” mark dis-
played in the upper right of the screen can be switched. If
you want to switch the display, press the multi-informa-
tion meter switch as follows.
“ ”: Press lightly.
“ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more.

3-19
 Instruments and controls

Redisplay of a warning display screen Selector lever position display screen*

When the “!” mark is displayed, if you lightly press the multi- E00532500118

information meter switch a few times, the warning display Shows the position of the selector lever.
screen you switched from is redisplayed. Refer to “Selector lever operation” on page 4-28.
Other interrupt displays
The operation status of each system is displayed on the infor-
mation screen.
Refer to the appropriate page in the warning display list for fur-
ther details.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays (when the ignition switch is
“ON”)” on page 3-51.

3-20
 Instruments and controls

Outside temperature display screen

E00522100140

This displays the temperature outside the vehi-

cle.
NOTE
● The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units (°C or °F).
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on
page 3-28.
● The outside temperature can be displayed in
a range of -30 °C to 50 °C (-22 °F to 122
°F). 3
● Depending on factors such as the driving
conditions, the displayed temperature may
vary from the actual outside temperature.

3-21
 Instruments and controls

Fuel remaining display screen NOTE

E00522200011 ● It may take several seconds to stabilise the display after
This displays the amount of fuel remaining. refilling the tank.
● If fuel is added with the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
tion, the fuel gauge may incorrectly indicate the fuel level.
Fuel lid mark
E00522300070

The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank filler is located on
the left side of the body.

! CAUTION
● Do not run out of fuel, or the catalytic converter
may be adversely affected. If the warning display
appears, refuel as soon as possible.

3-22
 Instruments and controls

Fuel remaining warning display

E00522400071

When the fuel is reduced to about 10 litres, the information

screen switches to the interrupt display of the fuel remaining
warning display, and the “ ” mark (B) on the fuel remaining
display flashes slowly (about once per second). After a few
seconds, the information screen returns from the fuel remain-
ing warning display to the previous screen.
When the fuel is reduced further to about 5 litres, the informa-
tion screen switches to the fuel remaining warning display and
the “ ” mark (B) on the fuel remaining display flashes
quickly (about twice per second).
3

NOTE
● On inclines or curves, the display may be incorrect due to
the movement of fuel in the tank.

3-23
 Instruments and controls

Service reminder 1. Displays the time until the next periodic inspection.
E00522500160

Displays the approximate time until the next periodic inspec- NOTE
tion recommended by MITSUBISHI MOTORS. When the ● The distance is shown in units of 100 km (100 miles). The
inspection time has arrived “---” is displayed. time is shown in units of months.
2. The display alerts the driver when the inspection time has
NOTE arrived. We recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
● Depending on the vehicle specifications, the displayed MOTORS Authorised Service point.
time may differ from the next periodic inspection time
recommended by MITSUBISHI MOTORS. When the time for periodic inspection arrives, “PERI-
In addition, the display settings for the next periodic ODIC INSPECTION” is displayed for a few seconds after
inspection time can be modified. the ignition switch is turned from 'OFF' to “ON”.
For modification of the display settings please contact a
3 MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
For more details, please consult a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorised Service Point.

3-24
 Instruments and controls
3. After your vehicle has been inspected by a MITSUBISHI 1. When you lightly press the multi-information meter
MOTORS Authorised Service Point, the display will switch a few times, the information screen switches to the
show the time until the next periodic inspection. service reminder display screen.
To reset
The “---” display can be reset while the ignition switch is
“OFF”. After the display has been reset, the time until the next
periodic inspection will be displayed. “PERIODIC INSPEC-
TION” will no longer be displayed when the ignition switch is
switched from “OFF” to “ON”.

2. Press the multi-information meter switch for about 2 sec-

onds, until the symbol “ ” flashes on the display. (If
there is no further operation within 10 seconds after the
symbol starts flashing, the display will return to the previ-
ous screen.)

3-25
 Instruments and controls
3. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch while
the icon is flashing to change the display from “---” to ! CAUTION
“CLEAR”. After this, the time until the next periodic ● The customer is responsible for ensuring that peri-
inspection will be displayed. odic inspection and maintenance are performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be performed to
prevent accidents and malfunctions.

NOTE
● The “---” display cannot be reset while the ignition switch
is “ON”.
● When “---” is displayed, after a certain distance and a cer-
tain period of time, the display is reset and the time until
3 the next periodic inspection is displayed.
● If you accidentally reset the display, we recommend you
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service
Point.

3-26
 Instruments and controls

Door ajar warning display screen

(when the ignition switch is “ON”) ! CAUTION
E00522600073 ● Before moving your vehicle, check that the warning
If any of the doors or the tailgate is not completely closed, this lamp is OFF.
displays the open door or tailgate.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 km/h while a
NOTE
door is ajar, the warning lamp will flash while a buzzer sounds ● In order to prevent the battery from running down, if you
4 times. This notifies the driver that a door is ajar. leave the door open a long time, the lamp goes out auto-
matically.
Refer to “Lamps (room lamps, etc.) auto-cutout function”
on page 5-124.

3-27
 Instruments and controls

Changing the function settings

(when the ignition switch is “ON”)
E00522700016

The multi-information display average fuel consumption and

speed reset mode, fuel consumption unit, temperature unit, dis-
play language, language cooperative control, buzzer sound,
and the time until the “REST REMINDER” display appears
can be modified as desired.
When there is no
Also, all settings can be returned to their factory settings.
warning display
Changing function settings
E00522800150

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.

3 Firmly apply the parking brake and put the gearshift lever
into the “N” (Neutral) position (M/T) or the selector lever
into the “P” (PARK) position (A/T or CVT). Function setting
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch a few screen
times to switch the information screen to the function set-
ting screen. When there is a
Refer to “Information screen (when the ignition switch is warning display
“ON”)” on page 3-13.

3-28
 Instruments and controls

NOTE
! CAUTION ● To return the menu screen to the function setting screen,
● For safety, stop the vehicle before operating. press and hold the multi-information meter switch for
While driving, even if you operate the multi-infor- about 2 seconds or more.
mation meter switch, the function setting screen is ● If no operations are made within about 15 seconds of the
not displayed. menu screen being displayed, the display returns to the
function setting screen.
3. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for 4. Select the item to change on the menu screen and change
about 2 seconds or more to switch from the setting mode to the desired setting. Refer to the following items for fur-
screen to the menu screen. ther details on the operation methods.

Refer to “Changing the reset mode for average fuel con-

sumption and average speed” on page 3-30. 3
Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption display unit” on
page 3-31.
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” on page 3-33.
Refer to “Changing the display language” on page 3-33.
Refer to “Changing the language cooperative control*” on
page 3-35.
Refer to “Operation sound setting” on page 3-36.
Refer to “Changing the time until “REST REMINDER” is
displayed” on page 3-38.
Refer to “Returning to the factory settings” on page 3-39.

3-29
 Instruments and controls

Changing the reset mode for average fuel consumption

and average speed
E00522900180

The mode conditions for the average fuel consumption and

average speed display can be switched between “Auto reset”
and “Manual reset”.
1. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for
about 2 seconds or more to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing function settings” on page 3-28.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch to select
“AVG (average fuel consumption and average speed set-
ting)”.
3

3. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for

about 2 seconds or more to switch in sequence from A
(Auto reset mode) ¨ M (Manual reset mode) ¨ A (Auto
reset mode).
The setting is changed to the selected mode condition.

3-30
 Instruments and controls
Manual reset mode Changing the fuel consumption display unit
• When the average fuel consumption and average speed E00523000159

are being displayed, if you hold down the multi-infor- The display unit for fuel consumption can be switched. The
mation meter switch, the average fuel consumption and distance, speed, and amount units are also switched to match
average speed displayed at that time are reset. the selected fuel consumption unit.
• When the ignition switch is switched from “ACC” or 1. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for
“LOCK” to “ON”, the mode setting is automatically about 2 seconds or more to switch from the setting mode
switched from manual to auto. screen to the menu screen.
Although the mode setting is automatically switched to Refer to “Changing function settings” on page 3-28.
the auto reset mode, if you switch the mode setting to 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch to select
the manual reset mode, the average fuel consumption “AVG UNIT (fuel consumption display setting)”.
and average speed from the last time the display is reset
will be displayed.
3
Auto reset mode
• When the average fuel consumption and average speed
are being displayed, if you hold down the multi-infor-
mation meter switch, the average fuel consumption and
average speed displayed at that time are reset.
• If the ignition switch is at “ACC” or “LOCK” for about
4 hours or longer, the average fuel consumption display
and average speed display are automatically reset.
NOTE
● The average fuel consumption display and average speed
display can be reset individually for the auto reset mode
and manual reset mode.
● The memory of the auto reset mode or manual reset mode
for the average fuel consumption display and average
speed display is erased if the battery is disconnected.
● The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset mode”.

3-31
 Instruments and controls
3. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for NOTE
about 2 seconds or more to display “AVG UNIT” (fuel ● The display units for the driving range, the average fuel
consumption display unit setting). consumption, the average speed and the momentary fuel
4. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch to switch consumption are switched, but the units for the indicating
in sequence from km/L → L/100 km → mpg (US) → mpg needle (speedometer), the odometer and the tripmeter will
(UK) → RETURN → km/L. remain unchanged.
● The memory of the unit setting is erased if the battery is
disconnected, and it returns automatically to L/100km.
The distance and speed units are also switched in the following
combinations to match the selected fuel consumption unit.

Distance Speed
Fuel consumption
3 (driving range) (average speed)
L/100 km km km/h
mpg (US) mile (s) mph
mpg (UK) mile (s) mph
km/L km km/h

5. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for

about 2 seconds or more to change the setting to the
selected unit.

3-32
 Instruments and controls

Changing the temperature unit 3. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for
E00523100147 about 2 seconds or more to switch in sequence from °C →
The display unit for temperature can be switched. °F → °C.
1. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for The setting is changed to the selected temperature unit.
about 2 seconds or more to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen. NOTE
Refer to “Changing function settings” on page 3-28. ● If the battery is disconnected, the unit setting is erased
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch to select from memory and is automatically set to °C.
“ ” (temperature unit setting). Changing the display language
E00523200018

The language of the multi-information display can be switched.

1. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for
about 2 seconds or more to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen. 3
Refer to “Changing function settings” on page 3-28.

3-33
 Instruments and controls
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch to select 4. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch to switch
“LANGUAGE” (language setting). in sequence from JAPANESE → ENGLISH → GER-
MAN → FRENCH → SPANISH → ITALIAN → “---”
(do not display warning message) → RETURN → JAPA-
NESE.

3. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for

about 2 seconds or more to display “LANGUAGE” (lan-
guage setting).

3-34
 Instruments and controls
5. If you hold down the multi-information meter switch for 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch to select
about 2 seconds or more, the setting is changed to the “ ” (language cooperative control). (Located on MENU
selected language. 2/2).
NOTE
● The memory of the language setting is erased if the bat-
tery is disconnected, and it returns automatically to ENG-
LISH.
● If “---” is selected in the language setting, a warning mes-
sage is not displayed when there is a warning display or
interrupt display.
Changing the language cooperative control*
E00523300093

The language used in Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys- 3

tem (MMCS) (if so equipped) or the Hands-free Bluetooth®
cellular phone interface system with voice recognition (if so
equipped) can be changed automatically to the same language
as that shown in the multi-information display.
1. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for
about 2 seconds or more to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing function settings” on page 3-28.

3-35
 Instruments and controls
3. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch to Operation sound setting
switch in sequence from A (language cooperation ena- E00523400010

bled) → M (language cooperation disabled) → A (lan- You can turn off the operation sounds of the multi-information
guage cooperation enabled). meter switch.
The setting is changed to the selected condition. 1. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for
about 2 seconds or more to switch from the setting mode
NOTE screen to the menu screen.
● The memory of the language cooperative control is erased Refer to “Changing function settings” on page 3-28.
if the battery is disconnected, and it returns automatically 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch to select
to A (language cooperation enabled).
“ ” (operation sound setting). (Located on MENU 2/2).
● The language display modified with the language setting
can be switched in the following manner.
• When A (language cooperation enabled) has been
3 selected with the language cooperative control, the lan-
guage for Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System
(MMCS) (if so equipped) or the Hands-free Bluetooth®
cellular phone interface system with voice recognition
(if so equipped) is automatically changed to the lan-
guage selected for the multi-information display.
• When M (language cooperation disabled) has been
selected with the language cooperative control, the lan-
guage for Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System
(MMCS) (if so equipped) or the Hands-free Bluetooth®
cellular phone interface system with voice recognition
(if so equipped) is not automatically changed to the lan-
guage selected for the multi-information display.

3-36
 Instruments and controls

NOTE
● The memory of the operation sound setting is erased if the
battery is disconnected, and it returns automatically to ON
(operation sound on).
● The operation sound setting only deactivates the operation
sound of the multi-information meter switch. The warning
display and other sounds cannot be deactivated.

3. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for

about 2 seconds or more to switch in sequence from ON
(operation sound on) → OFF (operation sound off) → ON
(operation sound on).
The setting is changed to the selected condition.

3-37
 Instruments and controls

Changing the time until “REST REMINDER” is 3. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for
displayed about 2 seconds or more to display “ALARM” (rest time
E00523500011 setting).
The time until the display appears can be changed.
1. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for
about 2 seconds or more to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing function settings” on page 3-28.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch to select
“ALARM” (rest time setting).(Located on MENU 2/2).

4. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch to select

the time until the display.

3-38
 Instruments and controls
5. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for Returning to the factory settings
about 2 seconds or more, the setting is changed to the E00523600012

selected time. All of the function settings can be returned to their factory set-
tings.
NOTE 1. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for
● If the battery is disconnected, the unit setting is erased about 2 seconds or more to switch from the setting mode
from memory and is automatically set to OFF. screen to the menu screen.
● The drive time is reset when the ignition switch is turned Refer to “Changing function settings” on page 3-28.
off. 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch to select
“RESET” (returning to the factory settings).(Located on
MENU 2/2).

3-39
 Instruments and controls
3. When you press and hold the multi-information meter
switch for about 5 seconds or more, the buzzer sounds and
all of the function settings are returned to the factory set-
tings.
NOTE
● The factory settings are as follows.
• Average fuel consumption and average speed reset
mode: A (Auto reset)
• Fuel consumption display unit: L/100 km
• Temperature unit: °C (Centigrade)
• Display language: ENGLISH
• Cooperative language setting: A
3 • Operation sounds: ON (Operation sounds on)
• “REST REMINDER” display: OFF

3-40
 Instruments and controls

Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list

E00523700013

Indicator and warning lamps

E00523800131

1- Turn-signal indicator lamps/Hazard warning indicator lamps 11- Cruise control indicator lamp* → P. 4-70
→ P. 3-53 12- Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning lamp
2- High-beam indicator lamp → P. 3-53 → P. 2-72
3- Diesel preheat indicator lamp (diesel-powered vehicles) 13- Check engine warning lamp → P. 3-55
→ P. 3-53 14- Information screen display list → P. 3-42
4- Position lamp indicator lamp → P. 3-53
5- Front fog lamp indicator lamp* → P. 3-53
6- Seat belt warning lamp → P. 2-38
7- Rear fog lamp indicator lamp → P. 3-53
8- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning lamp → P. 4-59
9- Charge warning lamp → P. 3-56
10- Brake warning lamp → P. 3-54
3-41
 Instruments and controls

Information screen display list

E00523900015

When there is information to be announced, such as lamp reminders, a sound is emitted and the screen switches to the displays
shown below. Refer to the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list (when the ignition switch is “OFF”)” on page 3-23.
Refer to “Warning display list (when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on page 3-45.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays (when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on page 3-51.
NOTE
● A warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound in the following rare cases.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as noise or strong electromagnetic waves, and is not a functional
problem.
3 • An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a
radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of installed electrical equipment (including
after-market parts).
If the warning display appears many times, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service
Point.

3-42
 Instruments and controls

Warning display list (when the ignition switch is “OFF”)

E00524000130

Screen Cause Solution (Reference)

● You have forgotten to turn off the Refer to “Lamp auto-cutout function (head-
lamps. lamps, fog lamp, etc.) ” on page 3-60.

● After turning off the engine, an attempt ● Turn the ignition switch to the
was made to open the driver’s door “LOCK” (PUSH OFF) position.
with the ignition switch in a position Refer to “Ignition switch reminder sys-
other than “LOCK” (PUSH OFF). tem” on page 1-43.
3
● An attempt was made to lock all the ● Turn the ignition switch to the
doors and the tailgate with the ignition “LOCK” (PUSH OFF) position.
switch in a position other than Refer to “Ignition switch reminder sys-
“LOCK” (PUSH OFF). tem” on page 1-24.

3-43
 Instruments and controls

Screen Cause Solution (Reference)

● There is a fault in the keyless operation Refer to “Keyless operation system” on
system. page 1-10.

3-44
 Instruments and controls

Warning display list (when the ignition switch is “ON”)

E00524100131

Screen Cause Solution (Reference)

● There is a fault in the keyless operation Refer to “Keyless operation system” on
system. page 1-10.

3-45
 Instruments and controls

Screen Cause Solution (Reference)

● The brake fluid level in the reservoir ● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and
has fallen to a low level. inspect it.
● There is a fault in the brake system. ● If the warning remains on after the
inspection of the vehicle, we recom-
mend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on
page 3-57.
● There is a fault in the ABS. ● Avoid sudden braking and high-speed
driving, stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and take corrective measures. Refer to
3 “ABS warning” on page 4-59.

● One of the doors or the tailgate is not ● Close the door or tailgate.
completely closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display
The open door is indicated. (when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on
page 3-27.

● The engine is overheated. ● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and

take corrective measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page
8-6.

3-46
 Instruments and controls

Screen Cause Solution (Reference)

● The automatic transmission (A/T or Refer to “Automatic transmission INVECS-
CVT) fluid temperature is too high. II Sports Mode 6A/T (Intelligent & Innova-
tive Vehicle Electronic Control System II)”
on page 4-27.
Refer to “Automatic transmission INVECS-
III Sports Mode 6CVT (Intelligent & Inno-
vative Vehicle Electronic Control System
III)” on page 4-37.
● You turned the ignition switch to the ● Fasten your seat belt properly. Refer to
“ON” position without fastening your “Seat belt warning” on page 2-37.
seat belt.
3
● There is a fault in the fuel system. ● We recommend you to consult a MIT-
SUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Serv-
ice point.

● You are driving with the parking brake ● Release the parking brake. Refer to
still applied. “Brake warning display” on page 3-57.

● There is a fault in the engine oil circu- ● Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
lation system. place. We recommend you have it
checked.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning dis-
play” on page 3-59.

3-47
 Instruments and controls

Screen Cause Solution (Reference)

● There is a fault in the charging system. ● Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place. We recommend you to consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
Service point.
Refer to “Charge warning display” on
page 3-58.
● There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the ● We recommend you have it checked.
pre-tensioner system. Refer to “Supplemental restraint sys-
tem (SRS) warning lamp” on page
2-72.

3 ● There is a fault in the automatic head- ● We recommend you have it checked.

lamp levelling system. Refer to “Automatic headlamp level-
ling” on page 3-67.

● There is a fault in the active stability ● We recommend you have it checked.

control system (ASC). Refer to “Active stability control
(ASC)” on page 4-63.

● There is a fault in the electronically ● We recommend you have it checked.

controlled 4WD system. Refer to “Electronically controlled
4WD system” on page 4-47.

3-48
 Instruments and controls

Screen Cause Solution (Reference)

● There is a fault in the A/T or CVT. ● We recommend you have it checked.
Refer to “Automatic transmission
INVECS-II Sports Mode 6A/T (Intelli-
gent & Innovative Vehicle Electronic
Control System II)” on page 4-27.
Refer to “Automatic transmission
INVECS-III Sports Mode 6CVT (Intel-
ligent & Innovative Vehicle Electronic
Control System III)” on page 4-37.
● The electronically controlled 4WD sys- Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD
tem is hot. system” on page 4-47.
3

● There is a problem with one of the sys- We recommend you to consult a MITSUBI-
tems without a specific message. SHI MOTORS Authorised Service point.

● The fuel additives are running low. ● Refill the fuel additives at a MITSUBI-
SHI MOTORS Authorised Service
Point.

● Fuel is running low. ● Refuel as soon as possible. Refer to

“Fuel remaining warning display” on
page 3-23.

3-49
 Instruments and controls

Screen Cause Solution (Reference)

● More than the specified amount of par- ● We recommend you to consult a
ticulate matter (PM) has accumulated MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
inside the diesel particulate filter Service point.
(DPF). Refer to “Diesel particulate filter
(DPF)” on page 4-23.
● The engine oil is running low. ● Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off
the engine, and check the engine oil
level.
Refer to “Engine oil level warning dis-
play” on page 3-59.
● More than specified limit of water has ● Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off
3 accumulated in the fuel filter. the engine, and drain the water from
the fuel filter.
Refer to “Fuel filter indicator display”
on page 3-56.
● The outside temperature is 3 °C (37 °F) ● Be careful of ice on the road.
or less. ● The road can be icy even when this
warning is not displayed, so drive care-
fully.

3-50
 Instruments and controls

Other interrupt displays (when the ignition switch is “ON”)

E00524200057

The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, please refer to the appropriate page
about the system.

Screen System operation status Reference

● When “2WD” mode is selected with Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD
the drive mode selector system” on page 4-47.

● When “4WD AUTO” mode is selected

with the drive mode selector 3

● When “4WD LOCK” mode is selected

with the drive mode selector

● When the active stability control Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)” on
(ASC) is operating page 4-63.

3-51
 Instruments and controls
Alerts the driver in time for periodic inspections.

Screen Solution
We recommend you have it checked. Refer to “Service reminder” for further details on
page 3-24.

The setting for rest intervals can be changed.

Screen Solution
3 Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the function settings (when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on page 3-
28.
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to
drive without having a rest, the buzzer sounds about every 5 minutes to encourage you
to take a rest.
● In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previ-
ous display screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the buzzer and
display will encourage you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
• The multi-information meter switch is held for about 2 seconds or more.

3-52
 Instruments and controls

Indicator lamps Rear fog lamp indicator lamp

E00501600100 E00502000185

This lamp illuminates while the rear fog lamp is

Turn-signal indicator lamps/Hazard on.
warning indicator lamps
E00501700172

These indicator lamps blink on and off when a Position lamp indicator lamp
turn-signal lamp is operating. E00508900173

This indicator lamp illuminates while the front

NOTE fog lamps are on.
● If the blinking is too fast, the cause may be
a blown lamp bulb or a faulty turn-signal
connection.
Diesel preheat indicator lamp
When the hazard warning lamp switch is (diesel-powered vehicles) 3
pressed, all turn-signal lamps will flash on and E00502300087

off continuously. This indicator lamp illuminates when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position. As the
glow plug becomes hot, the lamp goes out and
High-beam indicator lamp the engine can be started.
E00501800173

This indicator lamp illuminates when the high NOTE

beam is used. ● If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indi-
cator lamp will stay on for a longer time.
● When the engine has not been started within
Front fog lamp indicator lamp* about 5 seconds after the diesel preheat
E00501900350
indicator lamp went out, return the ignition
This lamp illuminates while the front fog lamps switch to the “LOCK” position. Then turn
are on. the switch to the “ON” position to preheat
the engine again.
● When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat
indicator lamp will not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion.
3-53
 Instruments and controls

Warning lamps ! CAUTION

E00502400147
● If the brake warning lamp comes on at
Brake warning lamp the same time as the ABS warning
E00502501073
lamp, the brake force distribution
This lamp will illuminate for a few seconds function is not working so hard brak-
when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” ing could make the vehicle unstable.
position. A warning will also appear on the Avoid hard braking and high-speed
multi-information display. driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place
With the ignition switch “ON”, the brake warn- and have it checked.
ing lamp illuminates under the following condi- ● In case of impaired braking perform-
tions: ance, bring the vehicle to a halt in the
● When the parking brake lever has been following manner:
3 engaged. • Depress the brake pedal harder than
● When the brake fluid level in the reservoir usual.
falls to a low level. Even if the brake pedal moves down
● When the brake circuit is not operating cor- to the very end of its possible stroke,
rectly. keep it pressed down hard.
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake is • Should the brakes fail, use engine
fully released and the brake warning lamp is off. braking to reduce your speed and
pull the parking brake lever.
! CAUTION Depress the brake pedal to switch on
● If either of the situations described the stop lamp to alert the vehicles
below occur, there is a risk of reduced behind you.
brake effectiveness. Stop the vehicle in
a safe place and have it checked.
• The brake warning lamp does not
turn off when the parking brake is
released.
• The brake warning lamp remains
illuminated during driving.

3-54
 Instruments and controls

Check engine warning lamp

E00502600703
! CAUTION
This lamp is a part of an onboard diagnostic sys- ● If the lamp illuminates while the
tem which monitors the emissions, engine and engine is running, avoid driving at
automatic transmission control systems. high speeds and we recommend you to
If a problem is detected in one of these systems, have the system checked.
this lamp illuminates or flashes. Accelerator pedal and brake pedal
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable response may be negatively influenced
and not need towing, we recommend you to have under these conditions.
the system checked as soon as possible.
This lamp will also illuminate when the ignition
NOTE
switch is turned “ON”, and goes off after the ● The engine electronic control module
engine has started. If it does not go off after the accommodating the onboard diagnostic sys-
engine has started, we recommend you to have tem has various fault data (especially about 3
the vehicle checked. the exhaust emission) stored.
This data will be erased if a battery cable is
! CAUTION disconnected which will make a rapid diag-
● Prolonged driving with this lamp on nosis difficult. Do not disconnect a battery
may cause further damage to the emis- cable when the check engine warning lamp
sion control system. It could also affect is ON.
fuel economy and drivability.
● If the lamp does not illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to the-
gONh position, we recommend you to
have the system checked.

3-55
 Instruments and controls

Charge warning lamp Information screen display

E00502700456 E00502400150
This lamp illuminates when the ignition switch
is turned “ON”, and goes off after the engine has Fuel filter warning display
started. E00503500028

If the water accumulated in the fuel filter exceeds the limit

A warning is also displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. when the ignition switch is turned to “ON”, the message
“REMOVE WATER IN SEPARATOR” will appear on the
multi-information display.
! CAUTION
● If it illuminates while the engine is run-
ning, there is a problem in the charg-
ing system. Immediately park your
3 vehicle in a safe place and we recom-
mend you to have it checked.

! CAUTION
● If this warning is displayed while driving, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and drain
the water from the fuel filter.
Prolonged driving while the message “REMOVE
WATER IN SEPARATOR” is displayed may dam-
age the engine.

3-56
 Instruments and controls

NOTE
● If “REMOVE WATER IN SEPARATOR” does not go out ! CAUTION
or appears frequently after removing the water, we recom- ● If a vehicle is driven without releasing the parking
mend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- brake, the brake will be overheated, resulting in
ised Service Points. ineffective braking and possible brake failure.
If this warning is displayed, release the parking
Brake warning display brake.
E00502500786

When “RELEASE PARKING BRAKE” is displayed When “CHECK” is displayed

This warning is displayed if you drive with the parking brake
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, if the
still applied. The warning lamp in the instrument cluster only
brake fluid is low, this warning is displayed.
illuminates when the parking brake is applied.
The warning lamp in the instrument cluster also illuminates.
3

3-57
 Instruments and controls

Charge warning display

! CAUTION E00502700502

● If this warning stays illuminated and does not go out If there is a fault with the charging system, the “SERVICE
while driving, there is a danger of ineffective brak- REQUIRED” warning is displayed on the information screen
ing. If this happens, immediately park your vehicle in the multi-information display. The warning lamp in the
in a safe place and we recommend you to have it instrument cluster also illuminates.
checked.
● If the brake warning display is displayed and the
brake warning lamp and the ABS warning lamp are
illuminated at the same time, the braking force dis-
tribution function will not operate, so the vehicle
may be destabilised during sudden braking. Avoid
sudden braking and high-speed driving, stop the
3 vehicle in a safe place, and we recommend you to
have it checked.
● The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the follow-
ing manner when brake performance has deterio-
rated.
• Depress the brake pedal harder than usual.
Even if the brake pedal moves down to the very
end of its possible stroke, keep it pressed down
hard.
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking to
! CAUTION
reduce your speed and pull the parking brake ● If the warning is displayed while the engine is run-
lever. ning, immediately park your vehicle in a safe place
Depress the brake pedal to operate the stop lamp and we recommend you to have it checked.
to alert the vehicles behind you.

3-58
 Instruments and controls

Oil pressure warning display Engine oil level warning display

E00524300090 E00502900113

If the engine oil pressure drops while the engine is running, the If the engine oil level falls the specified limit with the ignition
“CHECK” warning is displayed on the information screen of switch turned to “ON”, the “CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
the multi-information display. warning appears on the multi-information display.

! CAUTION
● If the vehicle continues to be driven while this warn-
! CAUTION
ing is displayed, doing so could cause engine seizure ● If this warning is displayed while driving, stop the
or damage since the engine oil level is either low or vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and check
there is a fault in the lubrication system. the engine oil level.
● If the warning is displayed while the engine is run- Refer to “Engine oil” on page 8-6.
ning, immediately park your vehicle in a safe place
and check the engine oil level.
● If the warning is displayed while the engine oil level
is normal, have the engine inspected.

3-59
 Instruments and controls

Combination headlamps and dipper switch Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.
E00506001236

Headlamps
NOTE
● Do not leave the lights on for a long time while the engine
is stopped. Otherwise, the battery will discharge.
● When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the
inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy, but this does
not indicate a functional problem.
When the lamp is switched on, the heat will remove the
fog. However, if water gathers inside the lamp, we recom-
mend you have it checked.
3

OFF All lamps off

With the ignition switch in the “ON” position, head-
lamps, position, tail, licence plate, and instrument
panel lamps turn on and off automatically in accord-
AUTO
ance with the outside light level. All lamps turn off
automatically when the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
Position, tail, license plate and instrument panel lamps
on
Headlamps and other lamps switch on

3-60
 Instruments and controls

NOTE Type 1
● The sensitivity of the automatic light control can be
adjusted. For further information, please contact your
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
On vehicles with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication
System (MMCS), this function can be customised via the
display.
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details.
● When the headlamps are turned off by the automatic light
control, the front fog lamps (if so equipped) and rear fog
lamps also go off. When the headlamps are subsequently
turned back on by the automatic light control, the front
fog lamps also come on but the rear fog lamps stay off. If
you wish to turn the rear fog lamps back on, operate the 3
switch again.
● Do not place anything on the automatic light sensor (A),
Type 2
and do not clean with a glass cleaner.

3-61
 Instruments and controls
● If the lamps do not turn on or off with the switch in the Lamp automatic cut-out function
“AUTO” position, operate the switch manually. We rec- (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.)
ommend you have your vehicle checked. ● If the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC”
Vehicles with Daytime Running Lamp* position or the key is removed from the ignition switch,
When the engine is running while the ignition switch is in the while the lamp switch is in the “ ” position, the lamps
“ON” position and the lamp switch is set to 'AUTO' or “OFF”, automatically go out when the driver’s door is opened.
the low beam of the headlamps, the tail lamps, etc., will illumi-
nate. [When the engine was started using the key]
• If the key is removed and the driver’s door is opened, a
high-pitched buzzer will sound intermittently to remind
the driver to turn off the lamps.
[When the engine was started by keyless operation
3 function]
• If the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” (PUSH
OFF) position and the driver’s door is opened, a high-
pitched buzzer will sound intermittently to remind the
driver to turn off the lamps.
● If the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” position or
“ACC” position, or the key is removed from the ignition
switch, while the lamp switch is in the “ ” position, the
lamps will remain on for about 3 minutes after the driver’s
door has been shut and then turn off automatically.

3-62
 Instruments and controls

NOTE ● If the driver’s door is opened with the ignition switch in

● The lamp auto-cutout will not function when the lamp the “LOCK” position (vehicles with keyless operation
switch is in the “ ” position. key), the high pitched lamp reminder buzzer will sound
● The lamp auto-cutout function can also be disabled. intermittently.
For further information, we recommend you to consult a The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is closed. (A
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point. warning will also appear on the multi-information dis-
On vehicles with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication play.)
System (MMCS), this function can be customised via the The buzzer can be stopped in the following manner:
display. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details. • Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
• Close the driver’s door.
When you want to keep the lamps on:
1. Turn the lamp switch to the “OFF” position while the
ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
2. If you turn on the lamps again with the switch in the “ ” 3
or “ ” position, then the lamps will remain on.
NOTE
● If the driver’s door is opened with the ignition key
removed (vehicles with conventional key), the high
pitched lamp reminder buzzer sounds intermittently.
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is closed. (A
warning will also appear on the multi-information dis-
play.)
The buzzer can be stopped in the following manner:
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
• Close the driver’s door.

3-63
 Instruments and controls

Lamp reminder buzzer Dipper (High/Low beam change)

E00506100344 E00506200329

[When the engine was started using the key] When the lamp switch is in the “ ” position, the beam
If the lights are on when the driver’s door is opened while the changes from high to low (or low to high) each time the lever is
ignition key is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or has been pulled fully (1). While the high beam is on, the high beam indi-
removed from the ignition switch, a buzzer will sound to cator lamp in the instrument cluster will also illuminate.
remind the driver to turn them off.
[When the engine was started by keyless operation func-
tion]
If the lights are on when the ignition switch is turned to
“LOCK” or “ACC” or if the driver’s door is opened with the
ignition switch on “LOCK”, a buzzer will sound to remind the
3 driver to turn them off.
In both cases, the buzzer will automatically stop if the lamp
auto-cutoff function is activated, or the lamp switch is turned
off, or the door is closed.

3-64
 Instruments and controls

Headlamp flasher Headlamp levelling

E00506300199 E00517400031
The high beams flash when the lever is pulled slightly (2), and
will go off when it is released. Headlamp levelling switch
When the high beam is on, the high beam indicator lamp in the (except for vehicles with discharge headlamps)
instrument cluster will illuminate. E00517500146

The angle of the headlamp beam varies depending on the load

NOTE carried by the vehicle.
● The high beams can also flash when the lamp switch is The headlamp levelling switch can be used to adjust the head-
OFF. lamp illumination distance (of the low beam) so that the head-
● If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps set to high- lamps’ glare does not dazzle the drivers of approaching
beam, the headlamps are automatically returned to their vehicles.
low-beam setting when the lamp switch is next turned to Set the switch according to the following table.
the “ ” position. 3

3-65
 Instruments and controls
5 seat configuration 7 seat configuration

Vehicle
Vehicle
condition
condition

Switch Switch
“0” “0” “2” “3” “4”
position position “0” “0” “2” “3” “3” “4”

●:1 person
:Full luggage loading ●:1 person
:Full luggage loading
Switch position 0 - Driver only/Driver + 1 front passenger
3 Switch position 2 - 5 passengers (including driver) Switch position 0 - Driver only/Driver + 1 front passenger
Switch position 3 - 5 passengers (including driver) + Full lug- Switch position 2 - Driver + 1 front passenger + 2 passengers on
gage load third seat
Switch position 4 - Driver + full luggage load Switch position 3 - 7 passengers (including driver)
7 passengers (including driver) + Full lug-
gage load
Switch position 4 - Driver + Full luggage load

3-66
 Instruments and controls

Automatic headlamp levelling

(vehicles with discharge headlamps) ! CAUTION
E00517600118 ● If this warning is displayed, the system may be mal-
This system automatically adjusts the direction of the head- functioning and we recommend you to have your
lamps (beam position) depending on changes in the loading vehicle inspected.
condition of the vehicle, such as the number of occupants or
luggage weight. While the headlamps are turned ON with the
ignition switch ON, the beam height is automatically adjusted
when the vehicle is stopped.
Headlamps
(with automatic headlamp levelling system) warning
display
If there is a fault in the automatic headlamp levelling system, 3
the message “SERVICE REQUIRED” appears on the multi-
information display.

3-67
 Instruments and controls

Turn-signal lever NOTE

E00506500801 ● If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the bulb in a turn-
signal lamp may have burned out. We recommend you
have the vehicle inspected.
● It is possible to change the following functions: For fur-
ther information, we recommend you to consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
On vehicles with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication
System (MMCS), this function can be customised via the
display. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details.
• Flashing of turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is
operated with the ignition switch in the “ACC” position.
• Deactivation of the turn-signal lamp 3-flash function for
3 lane changes
● Adjustment of time required to operate the lever for the 3-
flash function.
For further information, we recommend you to consult a
1- Turn signals MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
When making a normal turn, use position (1). The lever will
return automatically when cornering is completed.
2- Lane-change signals
When moving the lever to (2) slightly to indicate a lane
change, the turn-signal lamps and indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster will only flash while the lever is operated.
If you only pull the lever to (2) and then release it, the turn-
signal lamps and indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
will flash three times.

3-68
 Instruments and controls

Hazard warning flasher switch Fog lamp switch

E00506600408 E00506700034

Use the hazard warning flasher switch when the vehicle has to
be parked on the road for any emergency. Front fog lamp switch*
E00508300294
The hazard warning flashers can always be operated, regard- The front fog lamps can be operated while the headlamps or
less of the position of the ignition switch. tail lamps are on. Turn the knob in the “ON” direction to
Push the switch to turn on the hazard warning flashers, all turn switch on the front fog lamps. An indicator lamp in the instru-
signal lamps flash continuously. To turn them off, push the ment cluster will also come on. Turn the knob in the “OFF”
switch again. direction to switch off the front fog lamps. The knob will auto-
matically return to its original position when you release it.

NOTE
● The front fog lamps are automatically switched off when
the headlamps and tail lamps turn off. To switch the front
fog lamps on again, turn the knob in the “ON” direction
after turning on the headlamps or tail lamps.

3-69
 Instruments and controls
● In the case of vehicles with a Daytime Running Lamp, the
front fog lamps can be operated even if the lamp switch is
set to the “OFF” position.
Rear fog lamp switch
E00508400107

The rear fog lamp can be operated when the headlamps or front
fog lamps (if so equipped) turn on.
An indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when the
rear fog lamp is turned on.

[Vehicle without front fog lamp]

Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to turn on the rear
3 fog lamps. To turn the rear fog lamp off, turn the knob once in
the “OFF” direction. The knob will automatically return to its
original position when you release it.
NOTE
● The rear fog lamp is automatically turned off when the
[Vehicle with front fog lamp] headlamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped) are turned
Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to turn on the front off.
fog lamps. Turn the knob once more in the “ON” direction to ● To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the knob once in
turn on the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog lamp off, turn the the “ON” direction after turning on the headlamps. (Vehi-
knob once in the “OFF” direction. Turn the knob once more in cle without front fog lamps)
the “OFF” direction to turn off the front fog lamps. The knob ● To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the knob twice in
will automatically return to its original position when you the “ON” direction after turning on the headlamps. (Vehi-
release it. cle with front fog lamps)
● In case of vehicles with Daytime Running Lamp, the rear
fog lamp can be operated even if the lamp switch is set to
the “OFF” position.

3-70
 Instruments and controls

Wiper and washer switch Windscreen wipers

E00507101218 E00516900055

Except for vehicles with rain sensor

! CAUTION The windscreen wipers can be operated with the ignition
● If the washer is used in cold weather, washer fluid switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
sprayed against the glass may freeze, resulting in If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or rear window, do
poor visibility. Heat the glass with the defroster or not operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the blades
rear window demister before using the washer. are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.

MIST - Misting function

The wipers will operate once.
OFF - Off
INT - Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
LO - Slow
HI - Fast

3-71
 Instruments and controls

To adjust intermittent intervals Misting function

With the lever in the “INT” (speed-sensitive) position, inter- The misting function can be used when the ignition switch is in
mittent intervals can be adjusted by turning the knob (A). the “ON” or “ACC” position.

1- Fast The wipers will operate once when the wiper lever is raised to
2- Slow the “MIST” position and released. This operation is useful
when it is drizzling, etc. The wipers will only operate while the
NOTE lever is held in the “MIST” position.
● The speed-sensitive-operation function of the windscreen
wipers can be deactivated.
For further information, we recommend you to consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
On vehicles with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication
System (MMCS), this function can be customised via the
display. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details.

3-72
 Instruments and controls

Vehicles with rain sensor Rain sensor

E00517000024 E00517100025

The windscreen wipers can be operated with the ignition Only functional when the ignition switch is “ON” position.
switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position. If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the rain sensor (A)
If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or rear window, do will detect the extent of rain (or snow, other moisture, dust,
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the blades etc.) and the wipers will operate automatically.
are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.

MIST - Misting function

The wipers will operate once.
OFF - Off
AUTO- Auto-wiper control
Rain sensor
The wipers will automatically operate depending on the
degree of wetness on the windscreen.
LO - Slow
HI - Fast

3-73
 Instruments and controls

NOTE
! CAUTION ● To protect the rubber blades of the wipers, the wipers do
● With the ignition switch in the “ON” position and not operate when the vehicle is stationary and the ambient
the lever in the “AUTO” position, the wipers may temperature is 0 °C or lower.
automatically operate in the situations described ● Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker or label to the
below. windscreen. Do not put any water-repellent coating on the
Under the following circumstances your hands windscreen either. The rain sensor would not be able to
might get trapped and you could suffer injuries or detect the extent of rain, and the wipers might stop func-
the wipers could be damaged. Therefore, be sure to tioning normally.
turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position or ● In the following cases, the rain sensor may be malfunc-
move the lever to the “OFF” position to deactivate tioning.
the rain sensor. Have the vehicle checked at an authorised MITSUBISHI
• If you cover the rain sensor when cleaning the out- MOTORS dealer.
3 side surface of the windscreen. • When the wipers operate at a constant interval despite
• If you wipe the area around rain sensor with a changes in the extent of rain.
cloth when cleaning the outside surface of the • When the wipers do not operate even though it is rain-
windscreen. ing.
• When driving into an automatic car wash. ● The wipers may operate automatically when water, dust,
• The windscreen is subjected to a physical shock. mud, insects, tree sap, oil or salt, etc. adhere to the wind-
• The rain sensor is subjected to a physical shock. screen on top of the rain sensor or when the windscreen is
frozen. (Strong electromagnetic waves, etc. may also
cause incorrect operation.) The wipers will stop function-
ing if they cannot remove objects attached to the wind-
screen.
To make the wipers start operating again, place the lever
in the “LO” or “HI” position after the objects stuck to the
windscreen have been removed.
● Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer for
replacing the windscreen or reinforcing the glass around
the sensor.

3-74
 Instruments and controls

To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor NOTE

E00517200039 ● It is possible to change the following functions: For fur-
With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor) position, it is possi- ther information, we recommend you to consult a
ble to adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor by turning the MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
knob (B).

On vehicles with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication

System (MMCS), this function can be customised via the
display. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details.
• Automatic operation (rain drop sensing function) can be
changed to intermittent operation (vehicle-speed sensing
function).
• Automatic operation (rain drop sensing function) can be
changed to intermittent operation (not vehicle-speed 3
sensing function).

“+”- Higher sensitivity to rain

“-”- Lower sensitivity to rain

3-75
 Instruments and controls

Mist removal function

E00517300027

If you pull the lever in direction of the arrow and release it, the
wipers will operate once.
Use this function when you are driving in mist or drizzle.

3
The wipers will operate once if the lever is in the “AUTO”
position and the knob (C) is turned in the “+” direction, pro-
vided the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The wipers will operate once if the lever is raised to the

“MIST” position and released, provided the ignition switch is
in the “ON” or “ACC” position. The wipers will continue to
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST” position.

3-76
 Instruments and controls

Windscreen washer Rear window wiper and washer

E00507200371 E00507300776

The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the windscreen by pull- The rear window wiper and washer switch can be operated
ing the lever toward you. The wipers operate automatically with the ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
several times while the washer fluid is being sprayed
On a vehicle equipped with the headlamp washer, the head-
lamp washer operates together with the windscreen washer the
first time the windscreen washer is used if the headlamps are
on.

INT - The wiper operates continuously for several seconds and

then operates intermittently at roughly 8-second inter-
vals.
OFF - Off
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the rear window
-
when the knob is turned fully in either direction.
! CAUTION The wipers operate automatically several times while the
● If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer washer fluid is being sprayed.
fluid sprayed against the glass may freeze resulting
in poor visibility. Heat the glass with the defroster or
demister before using the washer.

3-77
 Instruments and controls

NOTE Headlamp washer switch*

● To ensure a clear rear view, the wiper performs several E00507800188
continuous operations when the reverse gear is engaged The headlamp washer can be operated with the ignition switch
while the switch is in the “INT” position. in the “ON” or “ACC” position and the lamp switch at the
After this continuous operation, the wiper will automati- “ ” position.
cally switch to intermittent operation.
● It is possible to change the following functions: For fur- Push the button once and the washer fluid will be sprayed on to
ther information, we recommend you to consult a MIT- the headlamps.
SUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
On vehicles with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication
System (MMCS), this function can be customised via the
display. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details.
• Adjustment of the interval for intermittent operation
3 • Changing intermittent wiper operation to continuous
wiper operation

NOTE
● If the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position
and the headlamps are on, the headlamp washer operates
together with the windscreen washer the first time the
windscreen washer lever is pulled.

3-78
 Instruments and controls

Precautions to observe when using wipers and Wiper deicer switch*

washers E00507700057

E00510000025 The rear window demister switch can be operated when the
● If the moving wipers become blocked by ice or other engine is running.
deposits on the glass, the motor may burn out even if the When the front wipers have frozen to the windscreen at the
wiper switch is turned to OFF. If obstruction occurs, park parked positions, turning on this switch will heat the wind-
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the ignition, and screen to make the wipers operable. Press the switch and the
clean the deposits from the glass so that the wipers operate deicer will operate and turn on the indicator lamp (A).
smoothly.
● Do not use the wipers when the glass is dry.
They may scratch the glass surface and the blades wear
out prematurely.
● Before using the wipers in cold weather, check that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the glass. The motor may 3
burn out if the wipers are used with the blades frozen onto
the glass.
● Avoid using the washer continuously for more than 20
seconds. Do not operate the washer when the fluid reser-
voir is empty.
Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
● Periodically check the level of washer fluid in the reser-
voir and refill if required.
During cold weather, add a recommended washer solution
that will not freeze in the washer reservoir. Failure to do NOTE
so could result in loss of washer function and frost dam- ● The switch is automatically turned off after operating for
age to the system components. approximately 20 minutes. To turn off the switch while it
is operating, press the switch again.

3-79
 Instruments and controls

Rear window demister switch ● When cleaning the inside of the rear window, use a soft
E00507900697 cloth and wipe lightly along the heater wires, being care-
The rear window demister switch can be operated when the ful not to damage the wires.
engine is running. ● Do not allow objects to touch the inside of the rear win-
Push the switch to turn on the rear window demister. It will be dow glass, damaged or broken wires may result.
turned off automatically in about 20 minutes. To turn off the
demister within about 20 minutes, push the switch again.
The indicator lamp (A) will illuminate while the demister is on.

NOTE
● When the rear window demister switch is pressed, the out-
side rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. Refer to
“Heated mirror” on page 4-14.
● When the rear window demister switch is pushed, the
window glass becomes warm and the wipers become
operable. Refer to “Wiper deicer switch” on page 3-79.
● The demister switch is not to melt snow but to clear mist.
Remove snow before use of the demister switch.
3-80
 Instruments and controls

Horn switch
E00508000318

Press the steering wheel on or around the “ ” mark.

3-81
Starting and driving

Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 2 Inspection and maintenance following

Driving, alcohol and drugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 3 rough road operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 55
Safe driving techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 3 Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive
Running-in recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 5 vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 55
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 6 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 57
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 8 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 58
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 9 Power steering system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 63
Inside rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 9 Cruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 68
Outside rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 10 Reversing sensor system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 76
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 15 Active stability control (ASC)*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 63
Steering wheel lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 18 Rear-view camera* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 82
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 19 Cargo loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 86 4
Diesel particulate filter (DPF)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 23 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 89
Manual transmission* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 25
Automatic transmission INVECS-II Sports
Mode 6A/T (Intelligent & Innovative
Vehicle Electronic Control System II)* . . . . . . .4- 27
Automatic transmission INVECS-III Sports
Mode 6CVT (Intelligent & Innovative
Vehicle Electronic Control System III)* . . . . . .4- 37
Electronically controlled 4WD system* . . . . . . . .4- 47
4-wheel drive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 51
 Starting and driving

Economical driving Idling

E00600100789 The vehicle consumes fuel even during idling. Avoid extended
For economical driving, there are some technical requirements idling whenever possible.
that have to be met. The prerequisite for low fuel consumption
is a properly adjusted engine. In order to achieve longer life of Speed
the vehicle and the most economical operation, we recommend At higher the vehicle speed, more fuel is consumed. Avoid
you to have the vehicle checked at regular intervals in accord- driving at full speed. Even a slight release of the accelerator
ance with the service standards. pedal will save a significant amount of fuel.
Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas and noise are
highly influenced by personal driving habits as well as the par-
Tyre inflation pressure
Check the tyre inflation pressures at regular intervals. Low tyre
ticular operating conditions. The following points should be
observed in order to minimize wear of brakes, tyres and engine inflation pressure increases road resistance and fuel consump-
as well as to reduce environmental pollution. tion. In addition, low tyre pressures adversely affect tyre wear
and driving stability.
Starting the engine
Avoid sudden acceleration and sudden starts, as they will
Cargo loads
Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the luggage compart-
4 increase fuel consumption.
ment. Especially during city driving where frequent starting
Shifting and stopping is necessary, the increased weight of the vehicle
Shift only at an appropriate speed and engine speed. Always will greatly affect fuel consumption. Also avoid driving with
use the highest shift position possible. unnecessary luggage or carriers, etc., on the roof; the increased
The drive mode-selector should be set to “2WD” when driving air resistance will increase fuel consumption.
4WD vehicles on normal roads and express ways to obtain best
possible fuel economy.
Cold engine starting
Starting of a cold engine consumes more fuel.
City traffic Unnecessary fuel consumption is also caused by keeping a hot
Frequent starting and stopping increases the average fuel con- engine running. After the engine is started, commence driving
sumption. Use roads with smooth traffic flow whenever possi- as soon as possible.
ble. When driving on congested roads, avoid use of a low shift
position at high engine speeds.
Air conditioning
The use of the air conditioning will increase the fuel consump-
tion.

4-2
 Starting and driving

Driving, alcohol and drugs Safe driving techniques

E00600200070 E00600300446

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Driving safety and protection against injury cannot be fully
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired even with blood ensured. However, we recommend that you pay extra attention
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you have been to the following:
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab or a friend, or use public transportation. Seat belts
Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will not make you Before starting the vehicle, make sure that you and your pas-
sober. sengers have fastened your seat belts.
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs affect your
alertness, perception and reaction time. Consult with your doc-
tor or pharmacist before driving while under the influence of
any of these medications.

! WARNING
● NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. 4
Your perceptions are less accurate, your reflexes are
slower and your judgment is impaired.

4-3
 Starting and driving

Floor mats Carrying children in the vehicle

● Never leave your vehicle unattended with the key and
! WARNING children inside the vehicle. Children may play with the
driving controls and this could lead to an accident.
● Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by correctly lay- ● Make sure that infants and small children are properly
ing floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle. restrained in accordance with the laws and regulations,
To prevent the floor mats from slipping out of posi- and for maximum protection in case of an accident.
tion, securely retain them using the hook etc. ● Prevent children from playing in the luggage compart-
Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal or laying ment. It is quite dangerous to allow them to play there
one floor mat on top of another can obstruct pedal while the vehicle is moving.
operation and lead to a serious accident.
Loading luggage
When loading luggage, be careful not to load above the height
of seats. This is dangerous not only because rearward vision
will be obstructed, but also the luggage may be projected into
the passenger compartment under hard braking.
4

4-4
 Starting and driving

Running-in recommendations Vehicles with A/T

E00600401196

During the running-in period for the first 1,000 km, it is advis- Shift point Speed limit
able to drive your new vehicle using the following precautions
as a guideline to aid long life as well as future economy and 1st gear 15 km/h
performance. 2nd gear 50 km/h
● Do not race the engine at high speeds. 3rd gear 85 km/h
● Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, braking and prolonged
high-speed running. 4th gear 120 km/h
● Keep to the running-in speed limit shown below. 5th gear 130 km/h
Please note that the legal speed limits displayed must be
6th gear 130 km/h
adhered to.
● Do not exceed loading limits.
● Refrain from towing a trailer. Vehicles with CVT
Vehicles with M/T
Shift point Speed limit 4
Speed limit “D” (DRIVE) 130 km/h
Shift point Petrol-powered Diesel-powered vehicles 1st position 50 km/h
vehicles 2000 models 2200 models 2nd position 60 km/h

1st gear 30 km/h 20 km/h 20 km/h 3rd position 70 km/h

In sports mode
2nd gear 60 km/h 45 km/h 45 km/h 4th position 90 km/h

3rd gear 90 km/h 65 km/h 70 km/h 5th position 120 km/h

4th gear 115 km/h 95 km/h 100 km/h 6th position 130 km/h

5th gear 145 km/h 120 km/h 125 km/h

6th gear - 140 km/h 155 km/h

4-5
 Starting and driving

Parking brake To release

E00600500653

To park the vehicle, first bring in to a complete stop, fully

engage the parking brake.
To apply

4
1- Pull the lever up slightly.
2- Push the button at the end of hand grip.
3- Push the lever downward.

1- Pull the lever up without pushing the button at the end of

hand grip.

4-6
 Starting and driving

! CAUTION ! CAUTION
● Before driving, be sure that the parking brake is ● When you intend to apply the parking brake, firmly
fully released and brake warning lamp is off. press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a com-
If you drive without the parking brake fully plete stop before pulling the parking brake lever.
released, “RELEASE PARKING BRAKE” will Pulling the parking brake lever with the vehicle
appear on the information screen in the multi-infor- moving could make the rear wheels lock up, thereby
mation display. making the vehicle unstable. It could also make the
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the parking parking brake malfunction.
brake, the brake will be overheated, resulting in
ineffective braking and possible brake failure.

4-7
 Starting and driving

Parking NOTE
E00600600856 ● If your vehicle is equipped with A/T or CVT, be sure to
To park the vehicle, fully engage the parking brake, and then apply the parking brake before moving the selector lever
move the gearshift lever to 1st or “R” (Reverse) position for to the “P” (PARK) position. If you move the selector lever
vehicles with M/T, or set the selector lever to “P” (PARK) posi- to the “P” (PARK) position before applying the parking
tion for vehicles with A/T or CVT. brake, it may be difficult to disengage the selector lever
from the “P” (PARK) position when next you drive the
Parking on a hill vehicle, requiring application of a strong force to the
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow these procedures: selector lever to move from the “P” (PARK) position.
Parking on a downhill Parking with the engine running
Turn the front wheels toward the kerb and move the vehicle Never leave the engine running while you take a short
forward until the kerb side wheel gently touches the kerb. sleep/rest. Also, never leave the engine running in a closed or
Set the parking brake and place the gearshift lever into the “R” poorly ventilated place. Leaving the engine running risks
(Reverse) position (with M/T) or the selector lever into the “P” injury or death from accidentally moving the gearshift lever
(PARK) position (with A/T or CVT). (with M/T) or the selector lever (with A/T or CVT) or the accu-
4 If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. mulation of toxic exhaust fumes on the passenger compart-
Parking on an uphill ment.
Turn the front wheels away from the kerb and move the vehicle Where you park
back until the kerb side wheel gently touches the kerb.
Set the parking brake and place the gearshift lever into the 1st
position (with M/T) or the selector lever into the “P” (PARK) ! WARNING
position (with A/T or CVT). ● Do not park your vehicle in areas where combustible
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in
contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.

When leaving the vehicle

Always carry the key and lock all doors and the tailgate when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area.

4-8
 Starting and driving

Steering wheel height adjustment Inside rear-view mirror

E00600700352 E00600800366

1. Release the tilt lock lever while holding the steering wheel Adjust the rear-view mirror only after making any seat adjust-
up. ments so you have a clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired height.
3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pulling the tilt lock
lever fully upward.
! WARNING
● Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view mirror while
driving. This can be dangerous.
Always adjust the mirror before driving.

Adjust the rear-view mirror to maximize the view through the

rear window.
To adjust the vertical mirror position
It is possible to move the mirror up and down to adjust its posi-
tion. 4

A- Locked
B- Release

! WARNING
● Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while
you are driving the vehicle.

4-9
 Starting and driving

To reduce the glare Outside rear-view mirrors

The lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can be used to adjust E00600900338

the mirror to reduce the glare from the headlamps of vehicles

behind you during night driving.
To adjust the mirror position
E00601000479

The outside rear-view mirrors can be operated when the igni-

tion switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

! WARNING
● Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view mirrors while
driving. This can be dangerous.
Always adjust the mirrors before driving.
● Your vehicle is equipped with convex type mirrors.
Please take into consideration, but objects you see in
the mirror will look smaller and farther away com-
pared to a normal flat mirror.
4 Do not use this mirror to estimate distance of follow-
ing vehicles when changing lanes.

1- Normal
2- Anti-glare

4-10
 Starting and driving
1. Place the lever (A) to the same side as the mirror whose 2. Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up or down to adjust
adjustment is desired. the mirror position.

Except for vehicles equipped with the mirror 1- Up

retractor switch 2- Down
3- Right
4- Left
3. Return the lever (A) back to the middle position (•).

Vehicles equipped with the mirror retractor switch

L- Left outside mirror adjustment

R- Right outside mirror adjustment

4-11
 Starting and driving

Retracting and extending the outside mirrors [For vehicles equipped with the mirror retractor switch]
E00601100438

The outside mirror can be folded in towards the side window to Retracting and extending the mirrors using the mirror
prevent damage when parking in narrow areas. retractor switch
With the ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position, push
the mirror retractor switch to retract the mirrors. Push it again
! CAUTION to extend the mirrors to their original positions.
● Do not drive the vehicle with the mirror folded in. After placing the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position, it is
The lack of rearward visibility normally provided possible to retract and extend the mirrors using the mirror
by the mirror could lead to an accident. retractor switch for about 30 seconds.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the mirror

retractor switch]
Push the mirror toward the back of the vehicle with your hand
to retract it in. When extending the mirror, pull it out toward
the front of the vehicle until it clicks to lock in place.
4

4-12
 Starting and driving

NOTE
! CAUTION ● Be careful not to get your hands trapped while a mirror is
● It is possible to retract and extend the mirrors by moving.
hand. After retracting a mirror using the mirror ● If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless entry system or
retractor switch, however, you should extend it by keyless operation system, the mirrors can also be retracted
using the switch again, not by hand. If you extended or extended with the remote control switch.
the mirror by hand after retracting it using the Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 1-6.
switch, it would not properly lock in position. As a Refer to “Keyless operation system: keyless entry system”
result, it could move because of the wind or vibra- on page 1-38.
tion while you are driving, taking away your rear- ● If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless operation sys-
ward visibility. tem, the mirrors can also be retracted with the door or tail-
gate switch.
Refer to “Keyless operation system: To operate using the
keyless operation function” on page 1-14.
● If you move a mirror by hand or it moves after hitting a
person or object, you may not be able to return it to its
original position using the mirror retractor switch. If this 4
happens, push the mirror retractor switch to place the mir-
ror in its retracted position and then push the switch again
to return the mirror to its original position.
● When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail to operate as
intended, please refrain from repeated pushing of the
retractor switch as this action can result in burn-out of the
mirror motor circuits.

4-13
 Starting and driving

Automatic extension of mirrors Heated mirror

If the engine is stopped and started with the mirrors retracted, E00601200282

the mirrors automatically extend for safety when the vehicle To demist or defrost the outside rear-view mirrors, press the
speed reaches 30 km/h. rear window demister switch.
The indicator lamp (A) will illuminate while the demister is on.
NOTE The heater will be turned off automatically in about 20 min-
● If the mirrors are retracted manually or using the mirror utes.
switch after the engine is started, they do not extend auto-
matically. Use the mirror switch to extend the mirrors.
● Functions can be modified as stated below. Please consult
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-Communica-
tion System (MMCS), screen operations can be used to
make the adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s man-
ual for details.
• Automatically extend when the ignition switch is turned
4 to the “ON” position, and automatically retract when the
driver’s door is opened after the ignition switch is turned
to the “OFF” position.
• Deactivate the automatic extension function.
• If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless entry system
or keyless operation system, automatically retract or
extend when all the doors and the tailgate are locked or
unlocked using the remote control switches.
• If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless operation sys-
tem, automatically retract when all the doors and the tail
gate are locked using the door switch.

4-14
 Starting and driving

Ignition switch LOCK

E00601401148 The engine is stopped and the steering wheel locked. The key
[For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system] can only be inserted and removed in this position.
For information on operations for vehicles equipped with the ACC
keyless operation system, refer to “Keyless operation system: The engine is stopped, but the audio system and other electric
Ignition switch” on page1-19,1-30. devices can be operated.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation ON
system] The engine is running, and all the vehicle’s electrical devices
can be operated.
Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with A/T or CVT START
The starter motor operates. Once the engine starts, let go of the
key. The key will automatically return to the “ON” position.
NOTE
● Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobiliser. 4
To start the engine, the ID code which the transponder
inside the key sends must match the one registered to the
immobiliser computer.
Refer to “Electronic immobiliser” on page 1-4.

4-15
 Starting and driving

ACC power auto-cutout function To remove the key

E00620300035 E00620400036

When a certain period has elapsed with the ignition switch in For vehicles with a M/T, when removing the key, push the key
the “ACC” position, the function automatically cuts out the in at the “ACC” position and keep it depressed until it is turned
power for the audio system and other electric devices that can to the “LOCK” position and remove it.
be operated with that position.
When the ignition switch is turned from the “ACC” position,
the power supplies again.
The factory setting is “No Auto Cut”.
If you wish to modify the setting to “Auto Cut”, please consult
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
NOTE
● The time until the power cuts out can be set either “Auto
Cut after 30 minutes” or “Auto Cut after 60 minutes”.
For details, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBI-
4 SHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-Communica-
tion System (MMCS), screen operations can be used to
make the adjustment.
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details.

4-16
 Starting and driving
For vehicles with an A/T or CVT, when removing the key, first
set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and then turn ! CAUTION
the key to the “LOCK” position and remove it. ● Do not remove the ignition key from the ignition
switch while driving. The steering wheel will be
locked, causing loss of control.
● If the engine is stopped while driving, the brake ser-
vomechanism will cease to function and braking
efficiency will deteriorate. Also, the power steering
system will not function and it will require greater
manual effort to operate the steering.
● Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for a long
time when the engine is not running, doing so will
cause the battery to be discharged.
● Do not turn the key to the “START” position while
the engine is running. Doing so could damage the
starter motor.
4

4-17
 Starting and driving

Steering wheel lock ! CAUTION

E00601500429

[For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system] ● Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.
For information on operations for vehicles equipped with the In some countries, it is prohibited to leave the key on
keyless operation system, refer to “Keyless operation system: the vehicle when parked.
Steering wheel lock” on page 1-25, 1-33.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation
system]
To lock
Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
To unlock
Turn the key to the “ACC” position while moving the steering
wheel slightly right and left.
4

4-18
 Starting and driving

Starting the engine ! CAUTION

E00601600723

[For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system] ● Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts
For information on operations for vehicles equipped with the to avoid damaging the starter motor.
keyless operation system, refer to “Keyless operation system: ● If your vehicle is equipped with a turbocharger, do
Starting” on page 1-25, 1-34. not stop the engine immediately after high-speed or
uphill driving. First allow the engine to idle to give
[Except for vehicles equipped with the keyless operation sys- the turbocharger a chance to cool down.
tem]
Tips for starting
Do not operate the starter motor continuously longer than 10
seconds; doing so could run down the battery. If the engine
does not start, turn the ignition switch back to “LOCK”, wait a
few seconds, and then try again. Trying repeatedly with the
starter motor still turning will damage the starter mechanism.
4
! WARNING
● Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated
area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle
in or out of the area. Carbon monoxide gases are
odourless and can be fatal.

! CAUTION
● Never attempt to start the engine by pushing or pull-
ing the vehicle.
● Do not run the engine at high rpm or drive the vehi-
cle at high speed until the engine has had a chance to
warm up.

4-19
 Starting and driving

Starting the engine (petrol-powered vehicles) 6. After turning the ignition key to the “ON” position, make
E00601701415 certain that all warning lamps are functioning properly
Normal conditions before starting the engine.
7. Turn the ignition key to the “START” position without
The starting procedure is as follows:
depressing the accelerator pedal, and release it when the
1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat belt.
engine starts.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal. NOTE
4. Fully depress the clutch pedal (M/T). ● A ticking noise may be heard after starting the engine.
5. On vehicles with M/T, place the gearshift lever in the “N” This is not an abnormal condition. The noise will disap-
(Neutral) position. pear after a short time of engine running.
On vehicles with A/T or CVT, make sure the selector If the ticking noise continues after the engine is warmed
lever is in the “P” (PARK) position. up, we recommend you to have your vehicle checked.

Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with A/T or CVT At extreme cold ambient temperature
If the engine won’t start, depress the accelerator pedal about
halfway while cranking the engine. Once the engine starts,
4 release the accelerator pedal.

! CAUTION
● When starting the engine, make sure that you press
on the brake pedal. At extreme cold ambient tem-
perature move your foot to the brake pedal immedi-
ately after the engine has started.

4-20
 Starting and driving

Flooded engine Starting the engine (diesel-powered vehicles)

If the engine was flooded during starting, first operate the E00601800103

starter for 5 to 6 seconds while fully depressing the accelerator 1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat belt.
pedal, then start the engine without depressing the accelerator 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
pedal. 3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
4. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
Using the MIVEC engine (3000 models) 5. Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position.
The MIVEC engine automatically switches its intake-valve
control between a low-speed mode and a high-speed mode in
accordance with driving conditions for maximum engine per-
formance.
NOTE
● To protect the engine, the high-speed mode may not be
selected while the engine coolant temperature is low. In
such a case, the engine revolutions do not rise to over
5,000 rpm even if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
4

4-21
 Starting and driving
6. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position. Fuel injection amount learning process
The diesel preheat indicator lamp will first illuminate, and (diesel-powered vehicles)
then after a short time go out, indicating that preheating is E00616000086
completed. To keep exhaust emissions and engine noise low, the engine
very occasionally performs a learning process for the fuel
NOTE injection amount.
● If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indicator lamp is
The engine sounds slightly different from usual while the
on for a longer time.
learning process is taking place. The change in the engine
● When the engine has not been started within about 5 sec-
sound does not indicate a fault.
onds after the diesel preheat indicator lamp went out,
return the ignition key to the “LOCK” position. Then, turn
the key to the “ON” position to preheat the engine again.
● When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat indicator
lamp does not come on even if the ignition key is placed
in the “ON” position.
Start the engine by turning the ignition key right to the
4 “START” position.
7. Turn the ignition key to the “START” position without
depressing the accelerator pedal, and release it when the
engine starts.
NOTE
● A ticking noise may be heard after starting the engine.
This is not an abnormal condition. The noise will disap-
pear after a short time of engine running.
If the ticking noise continues after the engine is warmed
up, we recommend you to have your vehicle checked.

4-22
 Starting and driving

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)* DPF warning lamp

E00619800085 There could be a system malfunction if “CHECK” is displayed
The diesel particulate filter (DPF) is a device that captures on the information screen in the multi-information display.
most of the particulate matter (PM) in the exhaust emissions of
the diesel engine. The DPF automatically burns away trapped
PM during vehicle operation. Under certain driving conditions,
however, the DPF is not able to burn away all of the trapped or
PM and, as a result, an excessive amount of PM accumulates
inside it.

! WARNING
● The DPF reaches very high temperatures. Do not
park your vehicle in areas where combustible mate-
rials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact
with a hot exhaust system since a fire could occur.
4
! CAUTION
● Do not use any type of fuel or engine oil that is not
specified for your vehicle. Also, do not use any mois-
ture-removing agent or other fuel additive. Such
substances could have a detrimental effect on the
DPF.
Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 2 and “Engine oil”
on page 8-6.

NOTE
● To minimize the likelihood of excessive accumulation of
PM, try to avoid driving for long periods at low speeds
and repeatedly driving short distances.

4-23
 Starting and driving

If “ ” is displayed during vehicle operation If “ ” is displayed during vehicle operation

If “ ” is displayed, it indicates that there is an abnormality If “ ” is displayed, it indicates that there is an abnormality
in the DPF system. Have the system inspected by a MITSUBI- in the DPF system. Have the system inspected immediately by
SHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point as soon as possible. a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

! CAUTION
● Continuing to drive with “ ” displayed could
result in engine trouble and DPF damage.

4-24
 Starting and driving

Manual transmission* NOTE

E00602000317 ● If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the clutch pedal again;
The shift pattern is shown on the gearshift lever knob. Be sure the shift will then be easier to make.
to always fully depress the clutch pedal before attempting to
shift the lever. Moving the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse)
position
Vehicles with 5M/T Vehicles with 6M/T E00615400054

! CAUTION
● Do not move the gearshift lever to the gRh (Reverse)
position while the vehicle is moving forward; doing
so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles equipped with 5M/T

To shift into the “R” (Reverse) position from 5th gear, move
the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position, and then move 4
it to the “R” (Reverse) position.

! CAUTION
● Do not put the gearshift lever into the reverse posi-
tion while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so
could damage the transmission.
● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driv-
ing. Doing so could cause rapid wear to the clutch.

4-25
 Starting and driving

Vehicles equipped with 6M/T

Pull up the pull-ring (A), then move the gearshift lever to the ! CAUTION
“R” (Reverse) position with the pull-ring still pulled. ● If the pull-ring will not return from the pulled-up
position, we recommend you to have the vehicle
inspected.

! CAUTION
● Do not pull up the pull-ring (A) when moving the
gearshift lever to any position other than the “R”
(Reverse) position. If you always pulled up the pull-
ring (A) when moving the gearshift lever, you could
unintentionally move the gearshift lever to the “R”
(Reverse) position and cause an accident and/or a
transmission fault.

The pull-ring will return to its original position when you

return the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position.

4-26
 Starting and driving

Possible driving speed Automatic transmission INVECS-II Sports

Mode 6A/T (Intelligent & Innovative
E00610800750

Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this may cause excessive

engine speed (the tachometer needle into the red zone) and Vehicle Electronic Control System II)*
damage the engine. E00603200345

Designed for optimum control and equipped with adaptive con-

Petrol-powered vehicles trol capabilities, the electronically controlled transmission opti-
mally matches gear shifts to almost all driving and road
Shift point Speed limit conditions.
1st gear 50 km/h
2nd gear 90 km/h ! CAUTION
● This system is strictly intended to provide supple-
3rd gear 135 km/h
mentary functions. When travelling downhill under
4th gear 175 km/h certain conditions or immediately after starting off
Use 5th gear whenever vehicle speed allows, for maximum when the automatic transmission is cold, no auto-
matic shiftdown may be made. The driver should
fuel economy.
shiftdown to a lower gear to use engine braking. Try
4
Diesel-powered vehicles to drive safely at all time.

Speed limit
Shift point
2000 models 2200 models
1st gear 35 km/h 35 km/h
2nd gear 65 km/h 65 km/h
3rd gear 100 km/h 105 km/h
4th gear 145 km/h 150 km/h
5th gear 185 km/h 190 km/h
Use 6th gear whenever vehicle speed allows, for maximum
fuel economy.

4-27
 Starting and driving

NOTE Selector lever operation

● During running-in period or immediately after reconnec- E00603300636

tion of the battery cable, there may be a case where gear The transmission has 6 forward gears and 1 reverse gear.
shifts are not made smoothly. This does not indicate a The individual gears are selected automatically, depending on
faulty transmission. the speed of the vehicle and the position of the accelerator
Gear shifts will become smooth after the transmission has pedal.
been shifted several times by the electronic control sys- The selector lever (A) has 2 gates; the main gate (B) and the
tem. manual gate (C).
LHD

4-28
 Starting and driving

RHD LHD

RHD

While depressing the brake pedal, move the selector

lever through the gate.

Move the selector lever through the gate.

4-29
 Starting and driving

Selector lever position display

! WARNING E00603500667

● Always depress the brake pedal when shifting the When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
selector lever into a gear from the “P” (PARK) or position of the selector lever is indicated in the multi-informa-
“N” (NEUTRAL) position. tion display.
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while
shifting the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) or
“N” (NEUTRAL) position.

NOTE
● To avoid erroneous operation, move the selector lever
firmly into each position and briefly hold it there. Always
check the position shown by the selector lever position
display after moving the selector lever.
● If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, the shift-lock
4 device activates to prevent the selector lever from being
moved from the “P” (PARK) position.

4-30
 Starting and driving

Selector lever positions (Main gate)

E00603800439
! WARNING
● Always keep your right foot on the brake pedal
“P” PARK when shifting into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL), to
This position locks the transmission to prevent the vehicle minimize the risk of loss of control.
from moving. The engine can be started in this position.
“R” REVERSE “D” DRIVE
This position is to back up. This position is for normal driving. The transmission automati-
cally selects a suitable gear for your speed and acceleration.
! CAUTION Engine braking is automatically applied when necessary,
● Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” depending on road conditions.
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion
to avoid a transmission damage. ! CAUTION
● Never shift into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the
“N” NEUTRAL “R” (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
At this position the transmission is disengaged. It is the same as motion to avoid a transmission damage. 4
the neutral position on a manual transmission, and should only
be used when the vehicle is stationary for an extended length of
time during driving, such as in a traffic jam.

! WARNING
● Never move the selector lever to the “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position while driving. A serious accident
could occur since you could accidentally move the
lever into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) posi-
tion or you will lose engine braking.
● On a gradient the engine should be started in the
“P” (PARK) position, not in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position.

4-31
 Starting and driving

Sports mode SHIFT

E00603900788

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is UP

selected by gently pushing the selector lever from the “D”
(DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A). To return to “D” SHIFT
range operation, gently push the selector lever back into the DOWN
main gate (B).
SHIFT
In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rapidly simply by mov- DOWN
ing the selector lever backwards and forwards. For vehicles SHIFT
equipped with shift paddles, shift paddles at the steering wheel UP
can also be used to perform gearshifts. In contrast to a manual
transmission, the sports mode allows gear shifts with the accel-
erator pedal depressed.
NOTE + (SHIFT UP)
● If your vehicle is equipped with the shift paddles, you can
4 shift into sports mode with shift paddles when the selector
The transmission shifts up by one gear with each operation.
lever is in the main gate as well. Also, you can return to - (SHIFT DOWN)
the “D” range operation in any of following ways. The transmission shifts down by one gear with each operation.
When returning to “D” range operation, the selector lever
position display will change to “D” (DRIVE) position.
• Pull the + (SHIFT UP) side shift paddle forward (toward
the driver) for over 2 seconds.
• Stop the vehicle.
• Push the selector lever from the “D” (DRIVE) position
into the manual gate (A) and push the selector lever
back into the main gate (B).

4-32
 Starting and driving

NOTE
! CAUTION ● In sports mode, only the 6 forward gears can be selected.
● Upward shifts do not take place automatically in To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector lever to
sports mode. The driver must execute upward shifts the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK) position as required.
in accordance with prevailing road conditions, tak- ● To maintain good running performance, the transmission
ing care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. may refuse to perform an upshift when the selector lever
● Repeated continuous operation of the selector lever is moved to the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehi-
or the shift paddles will continuously switch shift cle speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the engine,
position. the transmission may refuse to perform a downshift when
● For vehicles equipped with shift paddles, do not use the lever is moved to the “— (SHIFT DOWN)” position at
the left- and right-hand shift paddles at the same certain vehicle speeds. When this happens, a buzzer
time. Doing so could cause a gearshift that you do sounds to indicate that a downshift is not going to take
not expect. place.
● In sports mode, downward shifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st
gear is automatically selected.
● When driving away on a slippery road, push the selector 4
lever forward into the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position. This
causes the transmission to shift into the 2nd gear which is
better for smooth driving away on a slippery road. Push
the selector lever to the “— (SHIFT DOWN)” side to shift
back to the 1st gear.

4-33
 Starting and driving

Sports mode display When a malfunction occurs in the A/T

E00612300270 E00615100110
In sports mode, the currently selected position is displayed on
the multi-information display. When the warning display appears
There could be a system malfunction if the warning display
and “SLOW DOWN”, or the warning display and “SERV-
ICE REQUIRED”, are displayed on the information screen in
the multi-information display.

or

NOTE
● While driving in sports mode, the sports mode display
may change to show “D” and shifting in sports mode may
no longer be possible.
This indicates that controls to drive in the “D” position are
operating normally in order to lower the temperature of
the A/T fluid; it does not indicate a malfunction. Once the
temperature of the A/T fluid drops, shifting in the sports
mode will be possible again.

4-34
 Starting and driving

Operation of the A/T

! CAUTION E00604200355

● If malfunction occurs in the A/T while driving, the

warning display and “SLOW DOWN” or the ! CAUTION
warning display and “SERVICE REQUIRED” will ● Before selecting a gear with the engine running and
appear on the information screen in the multi-infor- the vehicle stationary, fully depress the brake pedal
mation display. to prevent the vehicle from creeping.
In this case, immediately park your vehicle in a safe The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the gear is
place and follow these procedures: engaged, especially when the engine speed is high, at
fast idle or with the air conditioning operating, the
When warning display is showing brakes should only be released when you are ready
The automatic transmission fluid is overheating. to drive away.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the selector ● Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at all
lever in the “P” (PARK) position, and open the bon- times.
net with the engine running to allow the engine to Using the left foot could cause driver movement
delay in case of an emergency.
cool down.
● To prevent sudden acceleration, never race the
4
After a while, confirm that the warning display is
no longer showing. It is safe to continue driving if engine when shifting from the “P” (PARK) or “N”
the display is no longer showing. If the warning dis- (NEUTRAL) position.
play remains or appears frequently, we recommend ● Operating the accelerator pedal while the other foot
you to have your vehicle inspected. is resting on the brake pedal will affect braking effi-
ciency and may cause premature wear of brake
When warning display is showing pads.
It may be that there is something unusual happening ● Do not race the engine with brake pedal pressed
in the A/T, causing a safety device to activate. We when the vehicle is stationary.
recommend you to have your vehicle inspected as This can damage the A/T.
soon as possible. Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal while
holding down the brake pedal with the selector lever
in the “D” (DRIVE) position, the engine revolutions
may not rise as high as when performing the same
operation with the selector lever in the “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position.
4-35
 Starting and driving

Passing acceleration Waiting

E00604500185 E00604600258

To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) position push the For short waiting periods, such as at traffic signals the vehicle
accelerator to the floor. The A/T will automatically downshift. can be left in gear and held stationary with the service brake.
For longer waiting periods with the engine running, place the
NOTE selector lever in the gNh (NEUTRAL) position and apply the
● In sports mode, downshifts do not take place when the parking brake, while holding the vehicle stationary with the
accelerator is depressed all the way to the floor. service brake.
Uphill/downhill driving
E00610500106
! CAUTION
DRIVING UPHILL ● Never hold the vehicle stationary while in gear on a
The transmission may not upshift to a higher gear if the com- hill with the accelerator, always apply the parking
puter determines the current speed cannot be maintained once a brake and/or service brake.
higher gear is engaged.
For smoother vehicle performance, if you release the throttle
while climbing a steep grade, the transmission may not upshift. Parking
4 This is normal, as the computer is temporarily preventing shift-
E00604700187

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully

ing. After reaching the top of the hill, normal gear shift func- engage the parking brake, and then move the selector lever to
tion will resume. the “P” (PARK) position.
DRIVING DOWNHILL If you are going to leave the vehicle unattended, always switch
When travelling down steep grades, the computer may auto- off the engine and carry the key.
matically select a lower gear. This function assists engine brak-
ing efforts, reducing the need for using the service brakes.
NOTE
● On a slope, be sure to apply the parking brake before
moving the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. If
you move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position
before applying the parking brake, it may be difficult to
disengage the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) position
when next you drive the vehicle, requiring application of a
strong force to the selector lever to move from the “P”
(PARK) position.

4-36
 Starting and driving

When the A/T makes no speed change Automatic transmission INVECS-III Sports
Mode 6CVT (Intelligent & Innovative
E00604800654

If the transmission does not change speeds while driving, or

your vehicle does not pick up enough speed when starting on Vehicle Electronic Control System III)*
an uphill slope, it may be that there is something unusual hap- E00602100031

pening in the transmission, causing a safety device to activate. The INVECS-III uses optimization and adaptation functions to
We recommend you to have your vehicle checked as soon as optimally match the gear ratio to driving and road conditions.
possible. The CVT is capable of changing the gear ratio automatically
and steplessly to suit driving conditions in all phases of vehicle
operation. It therefore realizes smooth, shock-free operation
and excellent fuel efficiency.

! CAUTION
● Automatic downshifts may not take place while the
CVT fluid is still cool immediately after you start
driving. To cause a downshift, depress the brake
pedal, manually shift down when necessary.
4
Always try to drive safely in accordance with road
conditions.

4-37
 Starting and driving

Selector lever operation RHD

E00602200117

The CVT selects an optimum gear ratio automatically, depend-

ing on the speed of the vehicle and the position of the accelera-
tor pedal.
The selector lever (A) has 2 gates; the main gate (B) and the
manual gate (C).

LHD

4-38
 Starting and driving

LHD ! WARNING
● Always depress the brake pedal when shifting the
selector lever into the other position from the “P”
(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while
shifting the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) or
“N” (NEUTRAL) position.

NOTE
● To avoid erroneous operation, move the selector lever
RHD firmly into each position and briefly hold it there. Always
check the position shown by the selector lever position
display after moving the selector lever.
● If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, the shift-lock
device activates to prevent the selector lever from being 4
moved from the “P” (PARK) position.

While depressing the brake pedal, move the selector

lever through the gate.

Move the selector lever through the gate.

4-39
 Starting and driving

Selector lever position display Selector lever positions (Main gate)

E00602300147 E00602400089

When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the

position of the selector lever is indicated in the multi-informa-
“P” PARK
tion display. This position locks the transmission to prevent the vehicle
from moving. The engine can be started in this position.
“R” REVERSE
This position is to back up.

! CAUTION
● Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion
to avoid a transmission damage.

4-40
 Starting and driving

“N” NEUTRAL “D” DRIVE

At this position the transmission is disengaged. It is the same as This position is for normal driving. The transmission automati-
the neutral position on a manual transmission, and should only cally selects a suitable gear ratio for your speed and accelera-
be used when the vehicle is stationary for an extended length of tion.
time during driving, such as in a traffic jam. Engine braking is automatically applied when necessary,
depending on road conditions.
! WARNING
● Never move the selector lever to the “N” (NEU- ! CAUTION
TRAL) position while driving. A serious accident ● Never shift into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the
could occur since you could accidentally move the “R” (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
lever into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) posi- motion to avoid a transmission damage.
tion or you will lose engine braking.
● On a gradient the engine should be started in the
“P” (PARK) position, not in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position.
● Always keep your right foot on the brake pedal 4
when shifting into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL), to
minimize the risk of loss of control.

4-41
 Starting and driving

Sports mode
E00602500064

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is

selected by gently pushing the selector lever from the “D” SHIFT
(DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A). To return to “D” SHIFT
DOWN SHIFT
range operation, gently push the selector lever back into the DOWN
main gate (B). UP

In sports mode, gear ratio shifts can be made rapidly simply by

moving the selector lever backwards and forwards. For vehi-
cles equipped with shift paddles, shift paddles at the steering SHIFT
wheel can also be used to shift the gear ratio. In contrast to a UP
manual transmission, the sports mode allows gear ratio shifts
with the accelerator pedal depressed.
NOTE + (SHIFT UP)
● If your vehicle is equipped with shift paddles, you can
4 shift into sports mode with shift paddles when the selector
The transmission shifts up once by each operation.
lever is in the main gate as well. Also, you can return to — (SHIFT DOWN)
the “D” range operation in any of following ways. The transmission shifts down once by each operation.
When returning to “D” range operation, the selector lever
position display will change to “D” (DRIVE) position.
• Pull the + (SHIFT UP) side shift paddle forward (toward
the driver) for over 2 seconds.
• Stop the vehicle.
• Push the selector lever from the “D” (DRIVE) position
into the manual gate (A) and push the selector lever
back into the main gate (B).

4-42
 Starting and driving

NOTE
! CAUTION ● In sports mode, only the 6 forward gear ratios can be
● Upward shifts do not take place automatically in selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector
sports mode. The driver must execute upward shifts lever to the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK) position as
in accordance with prevailing road conditions, tak- required.
ing care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. ● To maintain good running performance, the transmission
● Repeated continuous operation of the selector lever may refuse to perform an upshift when the selector lever
or the shift paddles will continuously switch shift is moved to the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehi-
position. cle speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the engine,
● For vehicles equipped with shift paddles, do not use the transmission may refuse to perform a downshift when
the left- and right-hand shift paddles at the same the lever is moved to the “— (SHIFT DOWN)” position at
time. Doing so could cause a shift of gear ratio that certain vehicle speeds. When this happens, a buzzer
you do not expect. sounds to indicate that a downshift is not going to take
place.
● In sports mode, downward shifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st
position is automatically selected. 4

4-43
 Starting and driving

Sports mode display When a malfunction occurs in the CVT

E00612200022 E00602300163
In sports mode, the currently selected position is displayed on
the multi-information display. When the warning display appears
There could be a system malfunction if the warning display
and “SLOW DOWN”, or the warning display and “SERV-
ICE REQUIRED”, are displayed on the information screen in
the multi-information display.

or

4-44
 Starting and driving

Operation of the CVT

! CAUTION E00602600094

● If malfunction occurs in the CVT while driving, the

warning display and “SLOW DOWN” or the ! CAUTION
warning display and “SERVICE REQUIRED” will ● Before selecting a position with the engine running
appear on the information screen in the multi-infor- and the vehicle stationary, fully depress the brake
mation display. pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping.
In this case, follow these procedures: The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the CVT is
[When warning display is showing] engaged, especially when the engine speed is high, at
The CVT fluid is overheating. The engine control fast idle or with the air conditioning operating, the
may activate to lower the CVT fluid temperature, brakes should only be released when you are ready
causing the engine revolutions and vehicle speed to to drive away.
decrease, In this case, take one of the following pro- ● Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at all
cedures. times.
• Slow down your vehicle. Using the left foot could cause driver movement
delay in case of an emergency.
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the selector
● To prevent sudden acceleration, never race the
4
lever in the “P” (PARK) position, and open the
bonnet with the engine running to allow the engine engine when shifting from the “P” (PARK) or “N”
to cool down. (NEUTRAL) position.
After a while, confirm that the warning display is ● Operating the accelerator pedal while the other foot
no longer showing. It is safe to continue driving if is resting on the brake pedal will affect braking effi-
the display is no longer showing. If the warning dis- ciency and may cause premature wear of brake
play remains or appears frequently, we recommend pads.
you to have your vehicle inspected. ● Do not race the engine with brake pedal pressed
when the vehicle is stationary.
[When warning display is showing] This can damage the CVT.
It may be that there is something unusual happening Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal while
in the CVT, causing a safety device to activate. We holding down the brake pedal with the selector lever
recommend you to have your vehicle inspected as in the “D” (DRIVE) position, the engine revolutions
soon as possible. may not rise as high as when performing the same
operation with the selector lever in the “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position.
4-45
 Starting and driving

Passing acceleration Waiting

E00602700037 E00602800067

To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) position push the For short waiting periods, such as at traffic signals the vehicle
accelerator to the floor. The CVT will automatically downshift. can be left in seleter lever position and held stationary with the
service brake.
NOTE For longer waiting periods with the engine running, place the
● In sports mode, downshifts do not take place when the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position and apply the
accelerator is depressed all the way to the floor. parking brake, while holding the vehicle stationary with the
Uphill/downhill driving service brake.
E00603000037

DRIVING UPHILL ! CAUTION

The transmission may not upshift to a higher shift position if ● Never hold the vehicle stationary while in CVT on a
the computer determines the current speed cannot be main- hill with the accelerator, always apply the parking
tained once a higher shift position is engaged. brake and/or service brake.
For smoother vehicle performance, if you release the throttle
while climbing a steep grade, the transmission may not upshift.
4 This is normal, as the computer is temporarily preventing shift- Parking
E00602900039
ing. After reaching the top of the hill, normal shift function will To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully
resume. engage the parking brake, and then move the selector lever to
DRIVING DOWNHILL the “P” (PARK) position.
When travelling down steep grades, the computer may auto- If you are going to leave the vehicle unattended, always switch
matically select a lower shift position. This function assists off the engine and carry the key.
engine braking efforts, reducing the need for using the service
brakes.
NOTE
● On a slope, be sure to apply the parking brake before
moving the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. If
you move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position
before applying the parking brake, it may be difficult to
disengage the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) position
when next you drive the vehicle, requiring application of a
strong force to the selector lever to move from the “P”
(PARK) position.
4-46
 Starting and driving

When the CVT makes no speed change Electronically controlled 4WD system*
E00603100139
E00604900176
If the transmission does not change speeds while driving, or The electronically controlled 4WD system is a 4-wheel drive
your vehicle does not pick up enough speed when starting on system that allows one of three drive modes to be selected with
an uphill slope, it may be that there is something unusual hap- a dial, in accordance with the driving conditions.
pening in the transmission, causing a safety device to activate.
We recommend you to have your vehicle checked as soon as The following drive modes are available.
possible.
Drive mode Function
This mode is for economical
driving on normal dry roads
2WD
and motorway.
Driving in front-wheel drive.
The default mode.
This mode is for automatically
4WD AUTO
controlling the distribution of 4
driving torque to all four
wheels according to the driving
conditions.
This mode is for driving in slip-
pery conditions such as on
snow-covered roads or sand.
The large amount of driving
4WD LOCK torque that is applied to the rear
tyres enables getting out of
slippery areas and powerful
driving is possible across all
ranges.
4-wheel drive operation requires special driving skills.
Carefully read the “4-wheel drive operation” section on page 4-
51 and take care to drive safely.

4-47
 Starting and driving

Drive mode-selector Drive mode Display

The drive mode can be switched by turning the dial while the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
2WD

4WD AUTO

4WD LOCK

! CAUTION
● Do not operate the drive mode-selector with the
front wheels spinning on a snowy road or in similar
4 conditions. The vehicle could lunge in an unexpected
direction.
● Driving on dry, paved roads in “4WD LOCK” mode
1- 2WD causes increased fuel consumption and noise.
2- 4WD AUTO ● Do not drive with the tyres spinning in “2WD”
3- 4WD LOCK mode.
Doing so could generate heat in the drive-system
The drive mode is displayed as an interrupt display on the components.
information screen in the multi-information display when the
drive mode is switched.
After a few seconds, the information screen returns from the NOTE
drive mode display to the previous screen. ● The drive mode can be switched while driving or stopped.

4-48
 Starting and driving

Drive mode indicator

Normally the indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is ! CAUTION
turned to the “ON” position, and then the drive mode is dis- ● If the selected drive mode indicator is blinking, the
played a few seconds after the engine is started. vehicle switches automatically to front-wheel drive
in order to protect the drive-system components,
and drive mode selection is no longer possible with
the drive mode-selector.
“SLOW DOWN” is also displayed in the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display.
Reduce speed, and if the indicator goes out after
driving a while, resume driving as before. If the indi-
cator continues blinking for more than about 5 min-
utes, have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorised Service Point.

The status of each drive mode display is as follows. blink

Drive mode
Drive indicator
Mode
“4WD” indicator “LOCK” indicator
2WD OFF OFF
4WD AUTO ON OFF
4WD LOCK ON ON

4-49
 Starting and driving

! CAUTION ! CAUTION
● If the “4WD” and “LOCK” indicators blink alter- ● Always use tyres of the same size, type, and brand
nately and “SERVICE REQUIRED” appears on the that have no wear differences. Using tyres that differ
information screen in the multi-information display, in size, type, brand, or wear amount may activate
a problem has occurred with the electronically con- the protection of the drive-system components, caus-
trolled 4WD system and the safety device has acti- ing the drive mode in “4WD AUTO” mode to lock or
vated. Have an inspection made by a MITSUBISHI the “4WD” and “LOCK” indicators to blink alter-
MOTORS Authorised Service Point. nately.

blink
4

4-50
 Starting and driving

4-wheel drive operation ! WARNING

E00606600643

Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement. ● Do not over-rely on the 4-wheel drive vehicles. Even
But its unique 4-wheel drive system allows you to occasionally 4-wheel drive vehicles have limits to the system and
travel on unpaved roads, to campgrounds, picnic sites, and sim- ability to maintain control and traction. Reckless
ilar locations. driving may lead to accidents. Always drive care-
Not only does this ensure better handling on dry, paved roads fully, taking account of the road conditions.
but also permits better traction when driving on slippery, wet or ● Improperly operating this vehicle on or off-pave-
snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud. ment can cause an accident or rollover in which you
But it is not suitable for heavy off road use or towing in rough and your passengers could be seriously injured or
conditions. killed.
It is particularly important to note that 4-wheel drive may not • Follow all instructions and guidelines in the
give sufficient hill climbing ability and engine braking on steep owner’s manual.
slopes. You should try to avoid driving on steep slopes. • Keep your speed low and do not drive faster than
Also, you must exercise caution when driving on sand and mud conditions.
and when driving through water because sufficient traction
may not be available in certain circumstances. 4
Please avoid driving the vehicle through areas where the tyres
may get stuck in deep sand or mud.

4-51
 Starting and driving

NOTE Turning sharp corners

● Driving on rough roads can be hard on a vehicle. Before When turning a sharp corner in “4WD LOCK” position at low
you leave the pavement, be sure all scheduled mainte- speed, a slight difference in steering may be experienced simi-
nance and service has been done, and that you have lar to feeling as if the brakes were applied. This is called tight
inspected your vehicle. Pay special attention to the condi- corner braking and results from each of the four tyres being at a
tion of the tyres, and check the tyre pressures. different distance from the corner. The phenomenon is typical
● MITSUBISHI MOTORS is not responsible to the opera- of 4-wheel drive vehicles. If this occurs, either straighten out
tor for any damage or injury caused or liability incurred the steering wheel, or change to “2WD” or “4WD AUTO”
by improper and negligent operation of a vehicle. All mode.
techniques of vehicle operation depend on the skill and
experience of the operator and other participating parties.
Any deviation from the recommended operating instruc-
tions above is at their own risk.
● Note that the stopping distance required of the 4-wheel
drive vehicle differs very little from that of the 2-wheel
drive vehicle. When driving on a snow-covered road or a
4 slippery, muddy surface, make sure that you keep a suffi-
cient distance between your vehicle and the one ahead of
you.
● The driving posture should be more upright; adjust the
seat to a good position for easy steering and pedal opera-
tion. Be sure to wear the seat belt.
● After driving on rough roads, check each part of the vehi-
cle and wash it thoroughly with water. Refer to the
“Inspection and maintenance following rough road opera-
tion” section and “Maintenance” sections.

! CAUTION
● Setting the drive mode-selector to “4WD LOCK” to
drive on dry paved road will increase fuel consump-
tion, with possible noise generation.

4-52
 Starting and driving

On snowy or icy roads Driving on sandy or muddy roads

Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD AUTO” or “4WD Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD LOCK” and then gradu-
LOCK” in accordance with the road conditions, and then grad- ally depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep the
ually depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start. pressure on the accelerator pedal as constant as possible, and
drive at low speed.
NOTE
● The use of snow tyres is recommended.
● Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, avoid sudden ! CAUTION
braking, and use engine braking (downshifting). ● Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly on sandy
surfaces. In comparison with normal road surfaces,
! CAUTION the engine and other drive-system components are
put under excessive strain when driving on such a
● Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration and surface. This could lead to accidents.
sharp turning. Skidding occurs and control of the
vehicle could be lost. ● If the engine coolant temperature display flashes
on the information screen in the multi-information
display or the engine power drops suddenly while
the vehicle is being driven, immediately park your 4
vehicle in a safe place.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 6-7 for
details and take the required measures.

! WARNING
● When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck
position, be sure that the area around the vehicle is
clear of people and physical objects. The rocking
motion may cause the vehicle to suddenly launch
forward/backward, causing injury or damage to
nearby people or objects.

4-53
 Starting and driving

NOTE Driving through water

● Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration and sharp E00618900034

turning; such operations could result in the vehicle If the electrical circuits become wet, further operation of the
becoming stuck. vehicle will be impossible; therefore, avoid driving through
● If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or muddy roads, it water unless absolutely necessary. If driving through water is
can often be moved with a rocking motion. Move the unavoidable, use the following procedure:
gearshift lever or selector lever alternately between the 1st
and “R” (Reverse) positions (with M/T), the “D” Check the depth of the water and the terrain before attempting
(DRIVE) and “R” (REVERSE) positions (with A/T or to drive through it. Drive slowly to avoid creating excessive
CVT), while pressing lightly on the accelerator pedal. water splashing.
● Driving on rough road can cause rust on the vehicle; wash
the vehicle thoroughly as soon as possible after such use. ! CAUTION
● Never drive through water that is deep enough to
Climbing/descending sharp grades cover wheel hubs, axles or exhaust pipe. Do not
Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill climbing ability
change the gearshift lever position (M/T) or the
and engine braking on steep slope. Avoid driving on steep
selector lever position (A/T or CVT) while driving
4 slopes even though the vehicle is an 4-wheel drive vehicle.
through water.
Frequent driving through water can adversely affect
the life span of the vehicle; consult we recommend
you to take the necessary measures to prepare,
inspect, and repair the vehicle.
● After driving through water, apply the brakes to be
sure they are functioning properly. If the brakes are
wet and not functioning properly, dry them out by
driving slowly while lightly depressing the brake
pedal. Inspect each part of the vehicle carefully.

4-54
 Starting and driving

Inspection and maintenance following Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive

rough road operation vehicles
E00606700338 E00606800397

After operating the vehicle in rough road conditions, be sure to

perform the following inspection and maintenance procedures: Tyres and wheels
● Check that the vehicle has not been damaged by rocks, Since the driving torque can be applied to the 4 wheels, the
gravel, etc. driving performance of the vehicle when operating in 4-wheel
● Carefully wash the vehicle with water. drive is greatly affected by the condition of the tyres.
Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly depressing the Pay close attention to the tyres.
brake pedal in order to dry out the brakes. If the brakes ● Install only the specified tyres on all wheels. Refer to
still do not function properly, we recommend you to have “Tyres and wheels” on page 9-12.
the brakes checked as soon as possible. ● Be sure all 4 tyres and wheels are the same size and type.
● Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clogging the radiator When it is necessary to replace any of the tyres or wheels,
core. replace all four.
● After driving through water, check the engine, transmis- ● All tyres should be rotated before the wear difference
sion and differential oil. If the oil or grease is milky or between the front and rear tyres is recognisable. 4
cloudy because of water contamination, it must be
replaced with new oil or grease. Good vehicle performance cannot be expected if there is a dif-
● Check the inside of the vehicle. If water entry is found, ference in wear between tyres. Refer to “Tyre rotation” on page
dry the carpet etc. 8-20.
● Inspect the headlamps, If the headlamp bulb is flooded ● Check the tyre inflation pressure regularly.
with water, we recommend you to have it drained.
! CAUTION
● Always use tyres of the same size, type, and same
brand that have no wear differences. Using tyres of
different size, type, brands or degree of wear, will
increase the differential oil temperature and result
in possible damage to the driving system. Further,
the drive train will be subject to excessive loading,
possibly leading to oil leakage, component seizure,
or other serious failures.
4-55
 Starting and driving

Towing ! CAUTION
● Even in “2WD” drive mode, the vehicle cannot be
towed with the front or the rear wheels on the
ground.

Jacking up a 4-wheel drive vehicle

! WARNING
● Do not crank the engine while jacking up the vehi-
cle.
The tyre on the ground may turn and the vehicle
may roll off the jack.

4 Clutch operation
Quick or slight clutch engagement made while the engine is
running at high speed will cause damage to the clutch and
transmission because the tractive force is very great.
Operate the pedal slowly and positively.

! CAUTION
● Do not tow 4-wheel drive vehicles with the front or
rear wheels on the ground (Type A or Type B) as
illustrated. This could result in damage to the drive-
train, or unstable towing.
If you tow 4-wheel drive vehicles, use Type C or
Type D equipment.

4-56
 Starting and driving

Braking Warning display

E00607001029 The brake warning lamp illuminates to indicate a fault in the
All the parts of the brake system are critical to safety. We rec- braking system. A warning is also displayed on the multi-infor-
ommend you to have the vehicle checked at regular intervals mation display. Refer to “Brake warning lamp” and “Brake
according to the service booklet. warning display” on page 3-54, 3-57.
When brakes are wet
! CAUTION Check the brake system while driving at a low speed immedi-
● Avoid driving habits that cause heavy braking and ately after starting, especially when the brakes are wet, to con-
never “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the firm they work normally.
brake pedal while driving. A film of water can be formed on the brake discs and prevent
It causes brake overheating and fade. normal braking after driving in heavy rain or through large
puddles, or after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry the
Brake system brakes out by driving slowly while lightly depressing the brake
The service brake is divided into two brake circuits. And your pedal.
vehicle is equipped with power brakes. If one brake circuit
fails, the other is available to stop the vehicle. If you should 4
lose the power assist for some reason, the brakes will still
work. If these situations occur, however, the brake pedal must
be depressed harder and further than usual; stop driving as
soon as possible and have the brake system repaired.

! WARNING
● Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. Keep the
engine running whenever your vehicle is in motion.
If you turn off the engine while driving, the power
assist will stop working and your brakes will not
work as well.
● If the power assist is lost or if either brake hydraulic
system stops working properly, have your vehicle
checked immediately.

4-57
 Starting and driving

When driving downhill Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

It is important to take advantage of the engine braking by shift- E00607100834

ing to a lower shift position while driving on steep downhill Environmental conditions can have an effect on braking. Dur-
roads in order to prevent the brakes from overheating. ing sudden braking when there is snow, ice, oil, water etc. on
the road surface, a skid may occur. In this situation, steering
! WARNING control and braking effectiveness is reduced and the stopping
distance is increased. The vehicle may also go into an uncon-
● Do not leave any objects near the brake pedal or let trolled spin.
a floor mat slide under it; doing so could prevent the The ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking during brak-
full pedal stroke that would be necessary in an emer- ing, thus maintaining directional stability, ensuring controlla-
gency. Make sure that the pedal can be operated bility and providing optimum braking force.
freely at all times. Make sure the floor mat is
securely held in place. Operating hints
● Always maintain the same distance from the vehicle in
Brake pad front of you as you would for a vehicle not equipped with
ABS.
● Avoid hard braking situations.
4 New brakes need to be broken-in by moderate use for the
Compared with vehicles not fitted with ABS, your vehicle
may require a longer stopping distance in the following
first 200 km.
cases:
● The disc brakes are provided with a warning device which
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads.
emits a shrieking metallic sound while braking if the
• Driving with tyre chains installed.
brake pads have reached their limit. If you hear this sound,
• Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has
have the brake pads replaced immediately.
other differences in surface height.
• Driving on bumpy roads or other poor driving surfaces.
! WARNING ● Operation of ABS is not restricted to situations where
● Driving with worn brake pads will make it harder to brakes are applied suddenly. This system may also operate
stop, and can cause an accident. to prevent wheel lock when you are driving over man-
holes, steel road-work plates, or the vehicle is driven over
steps or level differences in the road, road markings, or
other surfaces which are difficult for the wheels to grip.

4-58
 Starting and driving
● When the ABS is activated, you may feel the brake pedal
pulsation and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steer- ! CAUTION
ing wheel. You may also hear a characteristic noise. At ● Even the ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
this time, you may feel as if the pedal attempts to resist physics from acting on the vehicle. It cannot for
being depressed. instance avoid accidents that may result from exces-
This is a normal result of the ABS operation, and does not sive speed on bends or following another vehicle too
indicate a problem. closely or aquaplaning. It should remain the driver’s
If this situation occurs, depress the brake pedal more task to observe safety precautions to judge speeds
firmly in order to operate the ABS. Do not pump the and brake applications correctly in such conditions.
brake. This will result in reduced braking perform- ● Be sure to use tyres of the same type and size on 4
ance. wheels.
● You will hear the operation sound of the motor coming If tyre types or sizes are mixed, ABS may not func-
from the engine compartment immediately following start tion normally.
off after starting the engine. If the brake pedal is depressed ● Never install a limited slip differential, which is not
at that moment, a brake pedal pulsating is felt. MITSUBISHI Genuine parts, as the ABS may not
This pulsation is due to the self-diagnosis operation of the function normally.
ABS and does not indicate a malfunction. We recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI 4
● The ABS becomes operative after the vehicle has acceler- MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
ated to a speed in excess of about 10 km/h. It stops operat-
ing when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below about 5
km/h.
ABS waning lamp / display
E00607200503

If there is a malfunction in the system, the ABS warning lamp

will come on and “SERVICE REQUIRED” will appear on the
information screen in the multi-information display.
Under normal conditions, the ABS warning lamp only comes
on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and
goes off a few seconds later.

4-59
 Starting and driving

If the waning lamp / display illuminate while

driving
E00607300878

If only the ABS warning lamp/display illuminate

Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in
a safe place.
Restart the engine and check to see whether the lamp goes out
after a few minutes driving; if it then remains off during driv-
ing, there is no problem.
However, if the lamp does not go out, or if it lights up again
when the vehicle is driven, we recommend you to have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.

4 ! CAUTION
● Any of the following warning lamp/display behavior
indicates that the ABS is not functioning and only
the standard brake system is working. (The stand-
ard brake system is functioning normally.) If this
happens, take your vehicle to a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
• When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the warning lamp does not come on or it remains
on and does not go off
• The warning lamp comes on while driving
• The warning display appears while driving

4-60
 Starting and driving

If the ABS warning lamp / display and brake warning NOTE

lamp / display illuminate at the same time ● The ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp illumi-
nate at the same time and the warning displays appear
The ABS and brake force distribution function may not work, alternately on the information screen in the multi-informa-
so hard braking could make the vehicle unstable. tion display.
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in
a safe place and we recommend you to have the vehicle
checked.

or

4-61
 Starting and driving

After driving on icy roads Rear

E00618800020

After driving on snowy roads, remove any snow and ice which
may have become adhered to the wheel areas.
When doing this, be careful not to damage the wheel speed
sensors (A) and cables located at each wheel on vehicles
equipped with an ABS.

Front

4-62
 Starting and driving

Power steering system Active stability control (ASC)*

E00607400156 E00616700155

When the engine is stopped, the power steering system will not The active stability control (ASC) takes overall control of the
function and it will require greater manual effort to operate the anti-lock brake system, traction control function and stability
steering wheel. Keep this in mind in particular when towing the control function to help maintain the vehicle’s control and trac-
vehicle. Never turn off the engine while driving. tion. Please read this section in conjunction with the page on
Periodically check the power steering fluid level. the anti-lock brake system, traction control function and stabil-
ity control function.
! CAUTION Anti-lock brake system (ABS) → P. 4-58
● Do not hold the steering wheel in the fully turned Traction control function → P. 4-64
position (either left or right), for longer than 10 sec- Stability control function → P. 4-64
onds. This can cause damage to the power steering
system.
! CAUTION
● Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on 4
the vehicle.
This system, like any other system, has limits and
cannot help you to maintain traction and control of
the vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driving
can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s responsibility
to drive carefully. This means into account the traf-
fic, road and environmental conditions.
● Be sure to use the same specified type and size of
tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise, the ASC may not
work properly.
● Do not install any aftermarket limited slip differen-
tial (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC may stop func-
tioning properly.

4-63
 Starting and driving

NOTE Traction control function

● An operation noise may be emitted from the engine com- E00619000087

partment in the following situations. The sound is associ- On slippery surfaces, the traction control function prevents the
ated with checking the operations of the ASC. At this drive wheels from spinning excessive, thus helping the vehicle
time, you may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you to start moving from a stopped condition. It also provides suffi-
depress it. These do not indicate a malfunction. cient driving force and steering performance as the vehicle
• When the ignition switch is set to the “ON” position. turns while pressing the acceleration pedal.
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after the engine is
turned on. ! CAUTION
● When the ASC is activated, you may feel a vibration in ● When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy road, be
the vehicle body or hear a whining sound from the engine sure to install snow tyres and drive the vehicle at
compartment. moderate speeds.
This indicates that the system is operating normally. It
does not indicate a malfunction.
● When the anti-lock brake system warning lamp is illumi- Stability control function
nated, the ASC is not active. E00619100017

4 The stability control function is designed to help the driver

maintain control of the vehicle on slippery roads or during
rapid steering maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine
output and the brake on each wheel.
NOTE
● The stability control function operates at speeds of about
15 km/h or higher.

4-64
 Starting and driving

“ASC OFF” switch NOTE

E00619200106 ● When moving out of mud, sand or fresh snow, pressing
the accelerator pedal may not allow the engine speed to
The ASC is automatically activated when the ignition switch is increase. In such situations, temporarily turning off the
turned to the “ON” position. You can deactivate the system by ASC with the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to
pressing down the “ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer. move out your vehicle.
When the ASC is deactivated, the display will be illumi- ● Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both the stability
nated in the multi-information display. To reactivate the ASC, control function and the traction control function.
momentarily press the “ASC OFF” switch; the display is ● If you continue to press the “ASC OFF” switch after the
turned off. ASC is turned off, the “mistaken operation protection
function” will activate and the ASC will turn back on.

! CAUTION
● For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch should be
operated when your vehicle is stopped.
● Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in normal
circumstances.

4-65
 Starting and driving

ASC operation display, ASC OFF display

E00619300093 ! CAUTION
ASC operation display ● When display blinks, ASC is operating, which
- means that the road is slippery or that your vehicle’s
When the ASC is operating, the information screen in the
multi-information display will change and the ASC opera- wheels are beginning to slip. If this happens, drive
tion display will blink. slower with less accelerator input.
ASC OFF display ● If the temperature in the braking system continues
- to increase due to continuous brake control on a
This is displayed when the ASC has been deactivated
with the “ASC OFF” switch. slippery road surface, the display will blink and
operation of the traction control function will be sus-
pended to protect the brake system. (Normal opera-
tion of the vehicle will not be affected.) Park your
vehicle in a safe place. When the temperature in the
braking system has come down, the display will
4 be turned off and the traction control function will
start operating again.

NOTE
● The display may come on in the multi-information dis-
play when you start the engine. This means that the bat-
tery voltage momentarily dropped when the engine was
started. It does not indicate a malfunction, provided that
the display goes out immediately.
● When a spare tyre has been put on your vehicle, the grip-
ping ability of the tyre will be lower, making it more
likely that the display will blink.

4-66
 Starting and driving

ASC warning display

E00619400108 ! CAUTION
If an abnormal condition occurs in the system while driving, ● The system may be malfunctioning.
the display will blink or the warning display, “SERVICE Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.
REQUIRED” and the display will be displayed at the same Restart the engine and check whether the warn-
time. ing display, “SERVICE REQUIRED” and the
display go out. If the warning display goes out, there
is no abnormal condition. If the warning display
does not go out or appears frequently, it is not neces-
sary to stop the vehicle immediately, but we recom-
mend you to have your vehicle inspected.

4-67
 Starting and driving

! CAUTION Cruise control*

E00609100623
● If the 2WD vehicle is towed with the ignition switch Cruise control is an automatic speed control system that keeps
in the “ON” position and only the front wheels or a set speed. It can be activated at about 40 km/h (25 mph) or
only the rear wheels raised off the ground, the ASC more.
may operate, resulting in an accident. When towing
the 2WD vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep
the ignition switch in the “LOCK” or “ACC” posi-
! CAUTION
tion. When towing the vehicle with the rear wheels ● When you do not wish to drive at a set speed, turn
raised, keep the ignition switch in the “ACC” posi- off the cruise control for safety.
tion. ● Do not use cruise control when driving conditions
Refer to “Towing” on page 6-37. will not allow you to stay at the same speed, such as
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, wet, slippery, on a steep downhill
slope.
● On vehicles with M/T, do not move the gearshift
4 lever to the gNh (Neutral) position while driving at a
set speed without depressing the clutch pedal. The
engine will run too fast and might be damaged.

NOTE
● Cruise control may not be able to keep your speed on
uphills or downhills.
● Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill. You may use
the accelerator pedal if you want to stay at your set speed.
● Your speed may increase to more than the set speed on a
steep downhill. You have to use the brake to control your
speed. As a result, the set speed driving is deactivated.

4-68
 Starting and driving

Cruise control switches NOTE

● When operating the cruise control switches, press the
cruise control switches correctly. The set speed driving
may be deactivated automatically if two or more switches
of the cruise control are pressed at the same time.

A- “ON OFF” switch 4

Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
B- “COAST SET” switch
Used to reduce the set speed and to set the desired speed.
C- “ACC RES” switch
Used to increase the set speed and to return to the original set
speed.
D- “CANCEL” switch
Used to deactivate the set speed driving.

4-69
 Starting and driving

To activate NOTE
E00609300582 ● If the cruise control is on when the ignition switch is
1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” position, press the turned to “LOCK” or “ACC” position, cruise control will
“ON OFF” switch (A) to turn on the cruise control. The be on automatically the next time you start the engine.
“CRUISE” indicator lamp in the meter cluster will come The “CRUISE” indicator lamp will also be on.
on. ● If the battery voltage is insufficient, the memory data for
the cruise control may be erased.
As a result, the “CRUISE” indicator lamp may not come
on when you restart the engine.
If this happens, press the “ON OFF” switch once again to
turn on the cruise control.

4-70
 Starting and driving
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired speed, then press To increase the set speed
and release the “COAST SET” switch (B) when the E00609400479

“CRUISE” indicator lamp is illuminated. The vehicle will There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
then maintain the desired speed.
“ACC RES” switch
Press and hold the “ACC RES” switch (C) while driving at the
set speed, and your speed will then gradually increase.
When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your
new cruising speed is now set.

NOTE
● When you release the “COAST SET” switch, the vehicle
speed will be set.
● On diesel-powered vehicles, it is not possible to set the
vehicle speed while driving in 1st gear.
To increase your speed in small amounts, press the “ACC
RES” switch for less than about 1 second and release it.
Each time you press the “ACC RES” switch, your vehicle will
go about 1.6 km/h faster.

4-71
 Starting and driving

Accelerator pedal To decrease the set speed

While driving at the set speed, use the accelerator pedal to E00609500409

reach your desired speed and then press the “COAST SET” There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.
switch (B) and release the switch momentarily to set a new “COAST SET” switch
desired cruising speed.
Press and hold the “COAST SET” switch (B) while driving at
the set speed, and your speed will slow down gradually.
When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your
new cruising speed is now set.

To slow down your speed in small amounts, press the “COAST

SET” switch for less than about 1 second and release it.
Each time you press the “COAST SET” switch, your vehicle
will slow down by about 1.6 km/h.

4-72
 Starting and driving

Brake pedal To temporarily increase or decrease the speed

While driving at the set speed, use the brake pedal, which dis- E00609600136

engages the cruise control, then press the “COAST SET” To temporarily increase the speed
switch (B) and release the switch momentarily to set a new Depress the accelerator pedal as you would normally. When
desired cruising speed. you release the pedal, you will return to your set speed.

4-73
 Starting and driving

To temporarily decrease the speed To deactivate

Depress the brake pedal to decrease the speed. To return to the E00609700658

previously set speed, press the “ACC RES” switch (C). The set speed driving can be deactivated as follows:
Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page 4-75. ● Press the “ON OFF” switch (A) (Cruise control will be
turned off.)
● Press the “CANCEL” switch (D).
● Depress the brake pedal.

The set speed driving is deactivated automatically in any of the

following ways.
● When you depress the clutch pedal (on vehicles with
M/T).
● When your speed slows to about 15 km/h or more below
the set speed because of a hill, etc. (except 2000 models)
● When your speed slows to about 40 km/h or less.
● When the active stability control (ASC) starts operating.
(if so equipped)
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)” on page 4-63.

4-74
 Starting and driving

To resume the set speed

! WARNING E00609800457

● On vehicles with A/T or CVT, although the set speed If the set speed driving is deactivated by the condition
driving will be deactivated when shifting to the “N” described in “To deactivate” on page 4-74, you can resume the
(NEUTRAL) position, never move the selector lever previously set speed by pressing the “ACC RES” switch (C)
to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while driving. while driving at a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or higher.
You would have no engine braking and could cause
a serious accident.

Also, the set speed driving may be deactivated as follow:

● When the engine speed rises and approaches the tachome-
ter’s red zone (the red-coloured part of the tachometer
dial).

! CAUTION
● When the set speed driving is deactivated automati- 4
cally in any situation other than those listed above,
there may be a system malfunction.
Press the “ON OFF” switch to turn off the cruise
control and have your vehicle inspected by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point. Under either of the following conditions, however, using the
switch does not allow you to resume the previously set speed.
In these situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
● The “ON OFF” switch is pressed.
● The ignition switch is turned OFF.
● “CRUISE” indicator lamp is turned OFF.

4-75
 Starting and driving

Reversing sensor system* Obstacle detection areas

E00615500068 E00615600102

This system operates when you are backing the vehicle. It uses The detection areas of the corner and back sensors are limited
corner and back sensors to detect an obstacle and sounds a to those shown in the illustration. Moreover, the sensors are
buzzer to inform you of the approximate distance to the obsta- unable to detect low or thin objects or objects near the rear
cle. bumper. Thus, make sure to check the surroundings as you
operate the vehicle in a safe manner.
! CAUTION Corner and back sensor locations
● The reversing sensor system assists you in determin- There are two corner sensors (A) at the corners of the rear
ing the approximate distance between the vehicle bumper, and two back sensors (B) in the centre of the rear
and an obstacle located behind the vehicle. It has bumper.
limitations in terms of detectable areas and objects,
and may not properly detect some objects. There-
fore, do not place excessive confidence in the revers-
ing sensor system, and operate the vehicle as
4 carefully as you would a vehicle without this system.
● Make sure to check the surroundings with your own
eyes to ensure safety. Do not operate the vehicle by
relying on the reversing sensor system alone.

4-76
 Starting and driving

Reversing sensor system detection areas Vehicles with a towbar

Depending on whether the vehicle is equipped with a towbar, The detection areas are within approximately 60 cm (A) from
you can change the reversing sensor system between the stand- the corner sensors, 150 cm (B) from the back sensors, and 60
ard mode and the towbar mode. The towbar mode changes the cm (C) or less from the ground surface, excluding the area
system to exclude the area in which the towbar is mounted approximately 10 cm (D) from the ground surface. The nonde-
from the detection areas. tection areas (E) are within approximately 20 cm (F) from the
bumper.
Vehicles without a towbar
The detection areas are within approximately 60 cm (A) from
the corner sensors, 150 cm (B) from the back sensors, and 60
cm (C) or less from the ground surface, excluding the area
approximately 10 cm (D) from the ground surface.

NOTE
● If the rear bumper has been exposed to an impact, the cor-
ner or back sensors may fail and prevent the system from
functioning properly. Have the vehicle inspected at a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
● The sensors do not detect objects located in the area
directly below or near the bumper. If the height of an
object is lower than the mounted position of the corner or
back sensors, the sensors may not continue detecting it
even if they detected it initially.

4-77
 Starting and driving
For information on how to change the detection areas, please NOTE
refer to “Changing the detection areas” on page4-81. ● The buzzer may sound lower than the normal warning
sound when the reversing sensor system is receiving ultra-
! CAUTION sonic noise from other sources, but this is not a malfunc-
tion. The buzzer will stop sounding and the system will
● The reversing sensor system may not operate prop-
return to normal operation after the noise is no longer
erly under the following conditions:
received.
• The sensors or surroundings are covered with ice,
snow, or mud. To operate
• The sensors are frozen. E00615700220

• The system receives ultrasonic noise from other To operate the system, move the gearshift lever to the “R”
sources (the horns of other vehicles, motorcycle (Reverse) position (with M/T) or the selector lever to the “R”
engines, brakes, radios, pouring rain, splashing (REVERSE) position (with A/T or CVT) while the ignition
water, tyre chains, etc.). switch is in the “ON” position. To stop the operation, push the
• The sensors are extremely hot or cold (while the “SONAR” switch.
vehicle is parked for a long period of time under a
4 blazing sun or in cold weather).
• The vehicle tilts significantly.
• The vehicle is driven on a rough road (with a
bumpy, gravel, hilly, or grassy surface).
• The vehicle is too close to an obstacle.
• The sensors or surroundings have been wiped by
hand, or stickers or accessories have been
attached.
● The reversing sensor system may not properly
detect the following:
• Objects that are thin, such as wire nets or ropes.
• Objects that absorb sound waves, such as snow.
• Objects that are shaped with a sharp angle.
• Objects with a smooth surface, such as glass.
• Objects that are low, such as kerbstones.

4-78
 Starting and driving

NOTE The reversing sensor system operation indicator lamp (A) will
● Only when the gearshift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) posi- turn off when the system has stopped operating.
tion (with M/T) or the selector lever is in the “R” It will flash in case there is a malfunction in the system. For
(REVERSE) position (with A/T or CVT), the reversing details, refer to “Reversing sensor system operation indicator
sensor system can be operated or be stopped by using the lamp” on page 4-81.
“SONAR” switch.

To return the system to the operating state, push the “SONAR”

switch again. When the system returns to the operating state,
the buzzer sounds once and the indicator lamp illuminates.
NOTE
● The reversing sensor system operation indicator lamp
flashes once when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

4-79
 Starting and driving
The warning buzzer sounds when the system detects an obsta- Warning for obstacles
cle during operation. If there is an obstacle behind the vehicle, a warning buzzer
sounds to indicate the distance between the vehicle and the
NOTE obstacle.
● After pushing the “SONAR” switch, reversing sensor sys-
tem operation differs according to the detection area set-
ting. Corner sensor
• Setting when towbar is not equipped
When the gearshift lever is moved to the “R” (Reverse) Vehicle to obstacle distance Warning sound cycle
position (with M/T) or the selector lever is moved to the Approx. 60 to 40 cm Intermittent
“R” (REVERSE) position (with A/T or CVT), the
reversing sensor system will operate even if corner sen- Approx. 40 to 25 cm Fast intermittent
sor operation was stopped by pushing the “SONAR” Within approx. 25 cm Continuous
switch.
• Setting when towbar is equipped Back sensor (vehicles without a towbar)
When reversing sensor system operation was stopped by
4 pushing the “SONAR” switch, the reversing sensor sys-
Vehicle to obstacle distance Warning sound cycle
tem will not operate until the engine has been stopped
even if the gearshift lever is moved to the “R” (Reverse) Approx. 150 to 80 cm Intermittent
position (with M/T) or the selector lever is moved to the
Approx. 80 to 40 cm Fast intermittent
“R” (REVERSE) position (with A/T or CVT).
To resume reversing sensor system operation, push the Within approx. 40 cm Continuous
“SONAR” switch or stop and restart the engine, and
then move the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) posi-
tion (with M/T) or the selector lever to the gRh
(REVERSE) position (with A/T or CVT).

4-80
 Starting and driving
Back sensor (vehicles with a towbar) Reversing sensor system operation indicator
lamp
Vehicle to obstacle distance Warning sound cycle E00615900088

In case there is a malfunction in the reversing sensor system,

Approx. 150 to 100 cm Intermittent the reversing sensor system operation indicator lamp will blink
Approx. 100 to 60 cm Fast intermittent and the warning buzzer will sound for approximately 5 sec-
Within approx. 60 cm Continuous onds. Even after the buzzer has stopped sounding, the indicator
lamp will continue blinking until the system reverts to the nor-
mal state. Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI
! CAUTION MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
● The distances given are to be used for reference only,
as errors may be caused by various factors, such as
temperature, humidity, or the shape of the obstacles.

Changing the detection areas

E00615800045
4
The detection areas can be changed as follows:
Vehicles with a towbar
While the operation of the system is stopped at the “SONAR”
switch, push the “SONAR” switch approximately 3 seconds or
more, and release it. The buzzer sounds twice to indicate that
the detection area has been changed.
Vehicles without a towbar
While the operation of the system is stopped at the “SONAR”
switch, push the “SONAR” switch approximately 3 seconds or
more, and release it. The buzzer sounds once to indicate that
the detection area has been changed.
NOTE
● The detection area will not change if you keep the
“SONAR” switch pushed for 10 seconds or more.
4-81
 Starting and driving

Rear-view camera* Location of rear-view camera

E00618400042 The rear-view camera (A) is integrated into the part near the
The rear-view camera is a system that shows the view behind tailgate handle.
the vehicle on a screen in the centre panel.

! CAUTION
● The rear-view camera is an assistance system that
enables the driver to check for obstacles behind the
vehicle. Its range of view is limited, so you should
not overly depend on it. Please drive just as carefully
as you would if the vehicle did not have the rear-
view camera.
● Be sure to visually confirm safety around the vehicle
with your own eyes. Do not depend entirely on the
rear-view camera.
4
Range of view of rear-view camera
The range of view of the rear-view camera is limited to the area
shown in the illustrations. It cannot show the both sides and the
lower part of the rear bumper, etc.
When reversing, be sure to visually confirm safety around the
vehicle.

4-82
 Starting and driving

Range of view of rear-view camera How to use the rear-view camera

When you place the gearshift lever in the “R” (Reverse) posi-
tion (with M/T) or the selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE)
position (with A/T or CVT) with the ignition switch in the
“ON” position, the view behind the vehicle will automatically
appear on the screen of the Mitsubishi Multi Communication
System (MMCS). When you move the gearshift lever or the
selector lever to any other position, the screen will return to its
original indication.

4-83
 Starting and driving

Example of rear-view camera screen indication

The lines (E and F) in the view from the rear-view camera have A: Upper part of the rear bumper
the meanings shown below. Please use them as guides. B: Approx. 20 cm
● Red: The point approximately 50 cm behind the vehicle C: Approx. 50 cm
● Green: The point approximately 20 cm beyond the width D: Approx. 1 m
of the vehicle on either side E: Line (red)
F: Line (green)

! CAUTION
● The rear-view camera has a special lens that can
make objects shown on the screen appear to be
closer or further away than they actually are.

4-84
 Starting and driving

NOTE ● It is not possible to fully see obstacles when the lens is

● It is possible to set the display language of the screen to dirty. If the lens becomes contaminated by water droplets,
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Swedish, snow, mud, or oil, wipe off the contamination, taking care
Dutch, Danish or Portuguese. not to scratch the lens.
For details, please refer to the separated owner’s manual ● Please observe the following cautions. Ignoring them
for “Mitsubishi Multi Communication System (MMCS)”. could lead to a camera malfunction.
● When the vehicle is tilting because of the number of peo- • Do not subject the camera to physical shock.
ple in the vehicle, the weight and positioning of luggage, • Do not apply wax to the camera.
and/or the condition of the road surface, the lines in the • Do not splash the camera with boiling water.
view from the rear-view camera may not be accurately • Do not disassemble the camera.
positioned relative to the actual road.
● The lines in the view from the rear-view camera are based
on a level, flat road surface. Do not use them as a guide to
distances to solid objects.
● Because the rear-view camera has a special lens, the lines
on the ground between parking spaces may not look paral-
lel on the screen. 4
● In the following situations, the screen indication may be
difficult to see. There is no abnormality.
• Low light (nighttime)
• When the light of the sun or the light from a vehicle’s
headlamps shines directly into the lens
→When an extremely bright spot is shown on the
screen, colour smearing* (a characteristic of CCD cam-
eras) can occur.
● Colour smearing: When an extremely bright spot (for
example, sunlight that has reflected off the bumper) is
shown on the screen, it appears to leave a vertical trail.
● If the camera is hot and is then cooled by rain or a car
wash, the lens can mist up. This phenomenon does not
indicate a malfunction.

4-85
 Starting and driving

Cargo loads Loading a roof carrier

E00609900995

Cargo loads precautions ! CAUTION

● Use a roof carrier that properly fits your vehicle. Do
! CAUTION not load luggage directly onto the roof.
For installation, refer to the instruction manual
● Do not load cargo or luggage higher than the top of accompanying the roof carrier.
the seatback. Be sure that your cargo or luggage
cannot move once your vehicle is moving. Having
the rear view blocked, and your cargo being thrown NOTE
inside the cabin if you suddenly have to brake can ● We recommend you to use a genuine MITSUBISHI roof
cause a serious accident or injury. carrier, since the brackets to be used have a special shape.
● Load heavy cargo or luggage in the front of the vehi- For details, we recommend you to consult a
cle. If the load in the back of the vehicle is too heavy, MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
steering may become unstable.
4

4-86
 Starting and driving

Roof carrier mounting brackets* Attaching the roof carrier

When installing the roof carrier, use the brackets (A). Slide each cover (B) toward the front of the vehicle to remove
The brackets (A) are located under each cover (B). it.

4-87
 Starting and driving

Refitting the covers Roof carrier precaution

1. With each cover, put the tabs (C) on the cover in the holes
(D) in the roof.
2. Slide the cover (B) toward the rear of the vehicle to install
! CAUTION
it. ● Make sure that the weight of the luggage does not
exceed the allowable roof load.
If the allowable roof load is exceeded, this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
The roof load is the total allowable load on the roof
(the weight of the roof carrier plus the weight of lug-
gage placed on the roof carrier).
For the specific value, refer to “Maximum roof
load” on page9-8.
● When luggage is loaded onto the vehicle, please
make sure to drive slowly and avoid excessive
maneuvers such as sudden braking or quick turn-
4 ing.
In addition, place the luggage on the carrier so that
its weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
items on the bottom. Do not load items that are
wider than the roof carrier.
The additional weight on the roof could raise the
vehicle’s centre of gravity and affect vehicle han-
dling characteristics.
As a result, driving errors or emergency maneuvers
could lead to a loss of control and result in an acci-
dent.
● Before driving and after travelling a short distance,
always check the load to make sure it is securely fas-
tened to the roof carrier.
Check periodically during your travel that the load
remains secure.

4-88
 Starting and driving

NOTE Trailer towing

● To prevent wind noise or reduction in fuel economy, E00610000273
remove the roof carrier when not in use. In order to tow a trailer with your vehicle, when having a trailer
● Remove the roof carrier before using an automatic car towing device mounted that meets all relevant regulations in
wash. your area, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Serv-
● Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for raising ice Point.
the sunroof (if so equipped) and/or the tailgate when The regulations concerning the towing of a trailer may differ
installing a roof carrier. from country to country. You are advised to obey the regula-
tions in each area.

! CAUTION
● Danger of Accident!
A towing bar should be fitted according to
MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines.

Maximum towable weight with brake and 4

maximum trailer-nose weight
Never exceed the maximum towable weight with brake and the
maximum trailer-nose weight as listed in the specifications
(Refer to page 9-8).
If you tow a trailer at an altitude of more than 1,000 m above
sea-level, reduce your weight by 10 % of the gross combina-
tion weight for every increase of 1,000 m above sea-level, as
the engine output is lowered owing to decrease in atmospheric
pressure.

4-89
 Starting and driving

Towing bar mounting specifications

See the following table for fixing points (A) for the towing bar.

4-90
 Starting and driving

1 553 mm Operating hints

● To prevent the clutch from slipping (Vehicle with a M/T
2 171 mm only), do not rev the engine more than is required when
3 353 mm starting off.
4 540 mm ● Be sure that the driving speed does not exceed the 100
km/h for trailer operation. It is also recommended that you
5 505 mm obey the local regulations in case driving speed with a
6 555 mm trailer is limited to less than 100 km/h.
● To prevent shocks from the overrun brake, depress the
7 92 mm
brake pedal lightly at first and then more strongly.
8 77 mm ● To make full use of engine braking, change to a lower
9 2 mm shift point before descending a slope.
10 50 mm Additional precautions for vehicles equipped with an
490 mm (unladen) A/T or CVT
11 It is recommended the “D” position on slopes or at low speed.
372 to 379 mm (laden)
Use the sports mode in mountainous areas in order to make 4
12 528 mm better use of engine braking and to assist the brake system.
13 560 mm However, be sure that the speed does not exceed the maximum
speed limit for the selected shift position.
NOTE
● The values under item 11 can be varied depending on the
loading condition of cargo or luggage.

4-91
For pleasant driving

Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 2 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133

Automatic air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 7 Bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Important operation tips for the air Cargo area cover* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 15 Coat hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Air purifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 16 Luggage hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
LW/MW/FM digital tuning radio Assist grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
with CD player* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 16
LW/MW/FM digital tuning radio
with CD changer*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 40
To use the external audio input function
(vehicles with a rear-seat display)* . . . . . . . . . .5- 66
Steering wheel audio remote control switches*. . .5- 68
Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 70
Handling of compact discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 72 5
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 75
Digital clock*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 76
Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone
interface system with voice recognition* . . . . . .5- 80
Sun visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 118
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 119
Accessory socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 119
Interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-121
Storage spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-125
 For pleasant driving

Ventilators Air flow and direction adjustments

E00700100357 E00700200534

Centre ventilators
Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow direction.
To close the ventilator, move the knob (A) toward the inside
completely.

1- Centre ventilators
2- Side ventilators
5

1- Close
2- Open

5-2
 For pleasant driving

Side ventilators Mode selection dial

Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow direction. E00726500014

To close the ventilator, move the knob (A) toward the outside To change the amount of air flowing from the ventilators, turn
completely. the mode selection dial.

Left Right

1- Close
5
2- Open
NOTE
● The cool air from the ventilators may appear as mist.
This is due to moist air being suddenly cooled by the air
conditioning. This will clear after a few moments.
● Be careful not to spill drinks, etc., into the ventilators.
Doing so might impair the functioning of the air condi-
tioning.

5-3
 For pleasant driving

Changing the mode selection Face position

E00700300942 Air flows only to the upper section of the passenger compart-
To change the position and amount of air flowing from the air ment.
vents, turn the mode selection dial. (Refer to “Mode selection
dial” on page 5-3.)
These symbols are used in the following illustrations to dem-
onstrate the volume of air coming from the ventilators.
: Small volume of air from the ventilators
: Medium volume of air from the ventilators
: Large volume of air from the ventilators

5-4
 For pleasant driving

Foot/face position Foot position

Air flows to the upper section of the passenger compartment Air flows mainly to the leg area.
and to the leg area.

NOTE
● With the mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ”
5
positions, the air flows mainly to the upper part of the pas-
senger compartment. With the mode selection dial
between the “ ” and “ ” positions, the air flows
mainly to the leg area.

5-5
 For pleasant driving

Foot/demister position Demister position

Air flows to the leg area, the windscreen and the door win- Air flows mainly to the windscreen and the door windows.
dows.

NOTE
5 ● With the mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ”
positions, the air flows mainly to the leg area. With the
mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” posi-
tions, the air flows mainly to the windscreen and door
windows.

5-6
 For pleasant driving

Automatic air conditioning NOTE

E00702400211 ● There is an interior air temperature sensor (A) in the
The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is run- shown position.
ning. Never place anything on top of the sensor, since doing so
will prevent it from functioning properly.
Control panel
E00702500674

1- Temperature control dial

2- Air selection switch
3- Blower speed selection dial
4- Air conditioning switch
5- Mode selection dial
6- Rear window demister switch → P. 3-80

5-7
 For pleasant driving

Blower speed selection dial Temperature control dial

E00702800172 E00703000227

Select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or anticlockwise.
dial clockwise or anticlockwise.
Turn the dial clockwise to increase the air flow and anticlock-
wise to decrease the air flow.

5-8
 For pleasant driving

NOTE Air selection switch

● While the engine coolant temperature is low, the tempera- E00703400348

ture of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the
To change the air selection, simply press the air selection
engine warms up even if you have selected warm air with
switch. There is a sound each time the switch is pressed.
the dial.
● Outside air: Indicator lamp (A) is OFF
● When the temperature is set to the highest or the lowest
Outside air is introduced into the passenger compartment.
setting under the AUTO operation, the air selection and
● Recirculated air: Indicator lamp (A) is ON
the air conditioning will be automatically changed as fol-
Air is recirculated inside the passenger compartment.
lows.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set to the high-
est setting)
Outside air will be introduced and the air conditioning
will stop.
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set to the low-
est setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air conditioning
will operate.
The settings described above are the factory settings. The air
selection and air conditioning switches can be customised 5
(function setting changed), and the automatic switching of out-
side air and the air conditioning according to operating condi-
tions can be changed as desired.
For further information, we recommend you to consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
Refer to “Customising the air conditioning switch (Changing
function settings)” on page 5-12.
Refer to “Customising the air selection (Changing function set-
tings)” on page 5-10.

5-9
 For pleasant driving

Customising the air selection

! CAUTION (Changing function settings)
● Normally, use the outside position to keep the wind- E00725800010

screen and side windows clear and quickly remove Functions can be changed as desired, as stated below.
fog or frost from the windscreen.
If high cooling performance is desired, or if the out- ● Enable automatic air control:
side air is dusty or otherwise contaminated use the If the mode selection dial or blower speed selection dial is
recirculation position. Switch to the outside position turned to the “AUTO” position, the air selection switch is
periodically to increase ventilation so that the win- also controlled automatically.
dows do not become fogged up. ● Disable automatic air control:
● Use of the recirculation position for extended time Even if the mode selection dial or blower speed selection
may cause the windows to fog up. dial is turned to the “AUTO” position, the air selection
switch is not controlled automatically.
NOTE
● When the mode selection dial or the blower speed selec- ● Setting change method
tion dial is set to the “AUTO” position again after manual Hold down the air selection switch for about 10 seconds
operation, the air selection dial will also be automatically or more.
controlled. When the setting is changed, a sound is emitted and the
indicator lamp flashes.
5 • When the setting is changed from enable to disable
3 sounds are emitted and the indicator lamp flashes 3
times.
• When the setting is changed from disable to enable
2 sounds are emitted and the indicator lamp flashes 3
times.
NOTE
● The factory setting is “Enable automatic air control.”
● When the mode selection dial is turned to “ ”, in order
to prevent misting of the windows the ventilator automati-
cally switches to outside air even if “Disable automatic air
control” is set.

5-10
 For pleasant driving

Air conditioning switch NOTE

E00703500903 ● If a fault is detected in the air conditioning system, the air
Push the switch to turn the air conditioning on. At the same conditioning operation indicator lamp (A) blinks. Press
time the indicator lamp (A) will come on. the air conditioning switch once to turn the system off,
There is a confirmation sound each time the switch is pressed. then once more to turn it back on. If the air conditioning
operation indicator lamp does not blink any more, there is
nothing wrong. If it starts to blink again, we recommend
you to have the system checked.
● Sometimes, for example when using a high-pressure car
wash, the condenser can get wet, causing the operation
indicator lamp (A) to blink temporarily. In this case there
is nothing wrong. Press the air conditioning switch once
to turn the system off, then once more to turn it back on.
Once the water has evaporated, the blinking will stop.

5
Push the switch again to switch the system off.

! CAUTION
● When using the air conditioning, the idling speed
may increase slightly as the air conditioning com-
pressor is switched on/off automatically. While a
vehicle with an A/T or CVT is stationary, fully
depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from
creeping.

5-11
 For pleasant driving

Customising the air conditioning switch Operating the system in automatic mode
(Changing function settings) E00704100586

E00725900011

Functions can be changed as desired, as stated below.

● Enable automatic air conditioning control:
If the mode selection dial or blower speed selection dial is
turned to the “AUTO” position, or the temperature control
dial is set to the minimum temperature, the air condition-
ing switch is controlled automatically.
● Disable automatic air conditioning control:
The air conditioning switch is not controlled automati-
cally as long as the air conditioning switch is not operated.
● Setting change method
Hold down the air conditioning switch for about 10 sec-
onds or more.
When the setting is changed, a sound is emitted and the In normal conditions, use the system in the AUTO mode and
indicator lamp flashes. follow these procedures:
5 • When the setting is changed from enable to disable 1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the “AUTO” posi-
3 sounds are emitted and the indicator lamp flashes 3 tion.
times. 2. Set the temperature control dial to the desired tempera-
• When the setting is changed from disable to enable ture.
2 sounds are emitted and the indicator lamp flashes 3 3. Set the mode selection dial to the “AUTO” position.
times.
NOTE
● The factory setting is “Enable automatic air conditioning
control”.
● When you turn the mode selection dial to “ ”, in order
to prevent misting of the windows the air conditioning
operates automatically even if “Disable automatic air con-
ditioning control” is set.
5-12
 For pleasant driving

The outlet port (except “ ”), recirculation/outside air selec- Operating the system in manual air mode
tion and blower speed, as well as ON/OFF of air conditioning E00704200167

will be controlled automatically. Blower speed and ventilator mode may be controlled manually
To stop the system, turn the blower speed selection dial to the by setting the blower speed selection dial and the mode selec-
“OFF” position. tion dial to the desired positions. To return to automatic opera-
tion, set the dials to the “AUTO” position.
! CAUTION Demisting of the windscreen and door windows
● When using the air conditioning, the idling speed E00704300373

may increase slightly as the air conditioning com-

pressor is switched on/off automatically. While a ! CAUTION
vehicle with an A/T or CVT is stationary, fully ● For safety, make sure you have a clear view through
depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from all the windows.
creeping.
Use the mode selection dial (“ ” or “ ”) to remove frost or
NOTE mist from the windscreen or door windows.
● While the engine coolant temperature is low, the tempera-
ture of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the
engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with
the dial. To prevent the windscreen and windows from 5
fogging up, the ventilator mode will be changed to “ ”
and the blower speed will be reduced.
● If the blower speed selection dial, air conditioning switch,
mode selection dial, or air selection switch is operated
while the system is operating in the AUTO mode, the acti-
vated function overrides the corresponding function of
automatic control. All other functions remain under auto-
matic control.

5-13
 For pleasant driving
For ordinary demisting For quick demisting
Perform the following settings to prevent the misting of the
windscreen and door windows, and heat the leg area.

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position.

1. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position. 2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
5 2. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position. 3. Set the temperature to the highest position.
3. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower
NOTE
speed selection dial.
● With the mode selection dial in the “ ” position, the air
4. Select your desired temperature by turning the tempera-
conditioning operates automatically and outside air is set
ture control dial.
automatically.
5. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
● To demist effectively, direct the air flow from the side
ventilators toward the door windows.
● Do not set the temperature control dial to the max. cool
position. Cool air will blow against the window glasses
and prevent demisting.

5-14
 For pleasant driving

Important operation tips for the air Air conditioning system refrigerant and
conditioning system lubricant recommendations
E00708300762 If the air conditioning seems less effective than usual, the cause
● Park the vehicle in the shade. might be a refrigerant leak. We recommend you have the sys-
Parking in the hot sun will make the vehicle extremely hot tem inspected.
inside and require more time to cool the interior. The air conditioning system in your vehicle must be charged
If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the windows for with the refrigerant HFC-134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56.
the first few minutes while the air conditioning is on to The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe
expel the hot air. damage and require the replacement of the entire air condition-
● Close the windows when the air conditioning is in use. ing system. The release of refrigerant into the atmosphere is
The entry of outside air through open windows will not recommended.
reduce the cooling efficiency. The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehicle will not harm
● Too much cooling is not good for the health. Keep the dif- the ozone layer.
ference between the vehicle interior temperature and out- We recommend you to recover and recycle the refrigerant for
side temperature to 5 to 6C. reuse.
● When operating the system, make sure the air intake,
which is located in front of the windscreen, is free of During a long period of disuse
obstructions such as leaves. Leaves that collect in the air- The air conditioning should be operated for at least five min-
intake plenum may reduce air flow and plug the plenum utes each week, even in cold weather. This is to prevent the
compressor from seizing and to maintain the air conditioning 5
water drains.
in optimum operating condition.

5-15
 For pleasant driving

Air purifier LW/MW/FM digital tuning radio with CD

E00708400415

An air filter has been incorporated into this air conditioning so

player*
E00708501093
that pollen and dust are cleaned from the air. The audio system can only be used when the ignition switch is
Replace the air filter periodically as its ability to clean the air in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
will be reduced as it collects pollen and dirt. For the mainte-
nance interval, refer to the “SERVICE BOOKLET”. NOTE
● To listen to the audio system while the engine is stopped,
NOTE turn the ignition key to the “ACC” position.
● Operation in certain conditions such as driving on a dusty ● If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, the audio
road and frequent use of the air conditioning can lead to equipment may emit noise. This does not mean that any-
reduction of service life of the filter. When you feel that thing is wrong with your audio equipment. In such a case,
the air flow is lower than normal or when the windshield use the cellular phone as far away from the audio equip-
or windows start to fog up easily, replace the air filter. ment as possible.
We recommend you to have it checked. ● Turn off the audio system immediately if foreign objects
or water get into the audio equipment, or if smoke or a
strange odour starts coming out of it. We recommend that
you have it checked. Never try to repair it yourself. Avoid
continuous usage without inspection by a qualified per-
5 son.
● The audio amplifier (if so equipped) is located under the
front right seat. Do not subject the amplifier to strong
impacts, as this could lead to damage or malfunctioning of
the amplifier.

5-16
 For pleasant driving

Volume and tone control panel To adjust the tone

E00708600693 E00708800738

Press the SOUND switch (4) to select: TYPE → FIELD →

BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADER → BALANCE →
audio control mode OFF.
QUICK ACCESS MODE
To access the sound customisation features directly, push and
hold the SOUND switch (4), then turn the switch clockwise or
anticlockwise to access your desired sound customisation set-
ting. Release the switch to adjust the setting.
HOLD MODE
If the SOUND switch (4) is pushed and held for more than 2
seconds during the audio adjustment mode, it will change to
“Hold” mode. The selected audio mode will be held until the
SOUND switch (4) is pushed for more than 2 seconds again.

1- PWR (On-Off) switch

2- VOL (Volume control) knob
5
3- Display
4- SOUND (Sound control) switch
To adjust the volume
E00708700258

VOL (Volume control)

Turn the VOL knob (2) clockwise to increase the volume; anti-
clockwise to decrease the volume.

5-17
 For pleasant driving

TYPE (Acoustic characteristics selection) FIELD (Sound field selection)

1. Turn the SOUND switch (4) to select the desired music 1. Turn the SOUND switch (4) to select the desired music
type. type.
2. Press the SOUND switch (4) to set the audio system to the 2. Press the SOUND switch (4) to set the audio system to the
selected music type. selected music type.

Acoustic Sound field type Details

Details
characteristics
This sound field produces a sound field
The optimum acoustic characteristics for NORMAL with the vocals in the front and the instru-
CLASSIC classical music, which requires an overall ments surrounding the listener.
sound balance that is flat. This sound field produces a sound effect
The optimum acoustic characteristics for STAGE where the vocals are right in front of the
jazz music, which requires an atmospheric driver, as on a stage.
JAZZ
sound that applies different modulations to This sound field produces a sound effect
the bass, mid-range, and treble. LIVE similar to a live venue, where the listener is
The optimum acoustic characteristics for wrapped in sound from all directions.
POP pop music, which requires a crisp vocal This sound field produces a sound effect
sound with a modulated bass and treble.
5 HALL similar to a concert hall with reverberating
acoustics.
The optimum acoustic characteristics for
ROCK rock music, which requires a dynamic
sound that emphasises the mid range. BASS (Bass tone control)
Turn the SOUND switch (4) to select the desired bass tone.
The optimum acoustic characteristics for
HIP-HOP hip hop music, which requires a powerful MID (Midrange tone control)
sound that emphasises the bass. Turn the SOUND switch (4) to select the desired middle tone.
TREBLE (Treble tone control)
Turn the SOUND switch (4) to select the desired treble tone.
FADER (Front/Rear balance control)
Turn the SOUND switch (4) to balance the volume of the front
and rear speakers.

5-18
 For pleasant driving

BALANCE (Left /Right balance control)

Turn the SOUND switch (4) to balance the volume of the front
and rear speakers.
NOTE
● When set to 0, a beep sounds.
● When TYPE or FIELD is changed, the sound will cut out
briefly, but this does not indicate a malfunction.
● The audio control mode will turn off if either the radio or
CD is operated, or if no adjustment is made within about
10 seconds.
SCV (Speed Compensated Volume) function
E00726800088

SCV function is a feature that automatically adjusts the VOL-

UME, BASS, MID, and TREBLE settings in accordance with
the vehicle speed.
The SCV function can be turned ON and OFF.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-29.
5

5-19
 For pleasant driving

Radio control panel and display

E00708900771

1- PWR (On-Off) switch

2- AM/FM (FM/MW/LW selection) button
5 3- Memory select buttons
4- TUNE switch
5- SEEK (Up-seek) button
6- SEEK (Down-seek) button
7- FM (FM1/FM2/FM3) indicator
8- ST (Stereo) indicator

5-20
 For pleasant driving

To listen to the radio

E00709000522

1. Press the PWR switch (1) or the AM/FM button (2) to turn
ON the radio.
Press the PWR switch again to turn OFF the radio.
2. Press the AM/FM button (2) to select the desired band.
3. Turn the TUNE switch (4), or press the SEEK button (5 or
6) or memory select buttons (3) to tune into a radio broad-
casting station.
To tune the radio
E00709100419

Automatic tuning
After pressing the SEEK button (5 or 6), a receivable station
will be automatically selected and reception of the station will
begin. Follow the steps described below.
1. Press the SEEK button (5 or 6), or turn the TUNE switch
Manual tuning
(4) to tune to the frequency you want to register to in the
The frequency changes every time the TUNE switch (4) is
memory.
turned. Turn the switch to select the desired radio broadcasting
station.
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (3) for 2 seconds 5
or longer.
To enter frequencies into the memory The sound will be momentarily interrupted while the fre-
E00716100831 quency is entered into the memory. The number of the
Manual setting button matching the entry in the memory as well as the
For the memory select buttons (3), you can assign a maximum frequency is displayed.
of 18 stations in the FM band (6 FM1, 6 FM2 and 6 FM3 sta- 3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the
tions) and 6 stations each in the MW and LW band. (Stations button and releasing it within 1 seconds.
already assigned to the memory select buttons are replaced by NOTE
any newly assigned stations.) ● Disconnecting the battery terminal erases all the radio fre-
quencies stored in the memory.

5-21
 For pleasant driving
Automatic setting
Via this method, all manually set stations in the band currently
selected for reception are replaced with stations in the same
band that are automatically selected in order of signal strength.
The radio automatically selects 6 stations in the FM band (FM3
stations only) and 6 stations each in the MW and LW band.
Follow the steps described below.
1. With radio mode selected, hold down the AM/FM button
(2) for 2 seconds or longer. The 6 stations with the best
signal strength will automatically be assigned to the mem-
ory select buttons (3), with the lowest-frequency station
being assigned to the lowest-number button.
2. When you subsequently press a memory select button to
select a channel number, the radio will begin receiving the
station assigned to that number.
NOTE
● If you press the AM/FM button (2) for 2 seconds or longer
5 while tuning to the FM1 or FM2 band, the radio will auto-
matically switch to the FM3 band, where the automatic
seeking/storing function will be activated.

5-22
 For pleasant driving

Radio data system (RDS)

E00709200276

1- PWR (On-Off) switch 8- SEEK (Down-seek) button

2- AM/FM (FM/MW/LW selection) button 9- CT (Clock time) indicator 5
3- Memory select buttons 10- RDS (Radio data system) indicator
4- TP (Traffic programme) button 11- TP (Traffic programme identification) indicator
5- PTY (Programme type) button 12- PTY (Programme type) indicator
6- TUNE switch 13- REG (Regional programme) indicator
7- SEEK (Up-seek) button 14- Display

5-23
 For pleasant driving
RDS uses PI (programme identification) signals and AF (alter- REG (Regional) function
native frequency) lists transmitted in addition to the normal E00721100060

FM broadcasting programmes. It picks up the FM stations that REG function limits to receive the stations broadcasting
are transmitting the same programme from the AF list and regional programmes.
automatically tunes to the station with the strongest signal Regional programming and regional networks are organised
intensity. differently depending on the country or area (they may be
You can therefore continue listening to a programme on, for changed according to the hour, state, or broadcast area), so if
example, a long-distance drive without retuning to another sta- you don’t want to receive the regional programmes automati-
tion transmitting the same programme when leaving the service cally, you can set up REG ON not to receive regional pro-
area of the station you are currently receiving. grammes.
The RDS radio also features reception limited to programme
types, interrupts for traffic announcements received via EON The REG function can be turned ON and OFF.
(enhanced other network) and emergency broadcasts, as well Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-29.
as limited/unlimited reception of regional stations. PI (Programme Identification) search function
E00721200074
AF (Alternative Frequencies) function When the reception of a preset station becomes weak during
E00720900074

The AF function finds a station broadcasting the same pro- long-distance travel, the radio searches for another frequency
gramme and selects the station with the strongest signal of AF broadcasting the same programming with the same PI code in
lists. AF list.
5 The AF function is turned on at all times unless you manually If no frequencies with the same programming are found, the
switch it off. radio searches the frequencies for regional broadcasting. If the
search in the regional broadcasts succeeds, the display will
The AF function can be turned ON and OFF. show the REG indicator (13).
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-29. If the radio does not succeed when searching the regional pro-
grammes, the radio will return to the original preset station.
CT (Clock Time) function
E00721000069 On some vehicles the PI function can be turned ON and OFF.
The clock can be set automatically by using the signal from the Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-29.
local RDS stations. Refer to “Digital clock” on page 5-76.
NOTE
● While searching, the audio system is muted. The display
shows “WAIT” or “SEARCH”.

5-24
 For pleasant driving

PTY (Programme type) To search for a broadcast of the desired programme type:
E00721300206 1. Press the PTY button (5).
RDS broadcasts are classified according to programme type 2. Turn the TUNE switch (6) or press a memory select but-
(PTY) as follows. Use the TUNE switch (6) to select your ton (3) to select your desired PTY.
desired PTY. 3. Two seconds after a desired PTY has been selected, the
1. NEWS radio will begin to search for a broadcast of your selected
2. AFFAIRS (Current affairs) PTY. During search, the selected PTY on the display
3. INFO (Information) blinks.
4. SPORT 4. When the radio picks up a station with your desired PTY,
5. EDUCATE (Education) the display will show the name of the station.
6. DRAMA
7. CULTURE
8. SCIENCE
9. VARIED
10. POP M (Pop music)
11. ROCK M (Rock music)
12. EASY M (Easy music)
13. LIGHT M (Light classics)
14. CLASSICS
15. OTHER M (Other music) 5
16. WEATHER (Weather information)
17. FINANCE
18. CHILDREN
19. SOCIAL
20. RELIGION
21. PHONE IN
22. TRAVEL
23. LEISURE
24. JAZZ
25. COUNTRY
26. NATION M (National music)
27. OLDIES
28. FOLK M (Folk music)
29. DOCUMENT 5-25
 For pleasant driving

NOTE To change the language of PTY display

● If you press the SEEK button (7 or 8), the radio will try to E00721500123

find another broadcast of the same programme type that is You can select your favourite language among English, French,
currently selected. German, Swedish, Spanish and Italian.
● If no station is found with your desired PTY, the display 1. Press the TUNE switch (6) for 2 seconds or longer to
will show “EMPTY” for about 5 seconds and the radio select the language of PTY display mode.
will return to the previous station. Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-29.
2. Turn the TUNE switch (6) to select a language.
How to enter PTYs in the memory
E00721400063 NOTE
As many as 6 PTYs can be entered in the memory. ● After selecting a mode, you can leave the function setup
Follow the steps described below. mode by taking either of the following steps:
1. Press either the TUNE switch (6) to tune the PTY to be • Press the TUNE switch (6) for at least 2 seconds.
entered in the memory. • Make no entry for 10 seconds.
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (3) for 2 seconds
or longer. The sound will be momentarily interrupted
while the PTY is being entered into the memory. The
number of the button corresponding to the entry into the
memory and the PTY are displayed.
5 3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the
button and then releasing it within about 2 seconds.

5-26
 For pleasant driving

Traffic information
E00721600182

The radio will automatically tune into traffic information

broadcasts while receiving FM broadcasts or playing compact
discs.
To select this function, follow the instructions below.
1. Press the TP button (4). The display will show “TP” (11).
If RDS data can be read, the display will show “RDS”
(10). If not, the display will show “NO RDS” for about 5
seconds.
2. If the radio detects traffic information on either the current
station or another station, the display will show “TRAF
INF” for 5 seconds followed by a 2-second indication of
the frequency. It will then display the name of the station
broadcasting the traffic information. The volume level is
set separately for listening to normal audio programmes
and for listening to traffic information. The volume level
will therefore change automatically to that set level when
traffic information was last received. After the traffic
information broadcast has ended, the radio will return to 5
the previously received programme and to the correspond-
ing volume level.
3. Press the TP button (4) to return to the previous condition.
NOTE
● While “TP” is illuminated, the radio only stops at TP sta-
tions when the TUNE button (6 or 4) is pressed.

5-27
 For pleasant driving

TP (Traffic information Programme) search function

E00721800083

The traffic information programme standby function is turned

on (with the TP indicator (11) shown on the display) and after
about 45 seconds since the RDS indicator (10) turns off due to
weak signal or the tuning station is changed over from a TP
station to a station which does not broadcast traffic informa-
tion, the sound will beep 5 times and seeks out a TP station in
all frequencies automatically.
The TP search function can be turned ON and OFF.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-29.

5-28
 For pleasant driving

Emergency broadcasts Function setup mode

E00721700112 E00722500117

It is possible to change the following functions:

● AF
● CT
● REG
● TP-S
● PI-S*
● Language of PTY display
● SCV

If an emergency broadcast is caught while receiving a FM

broadcast or playing back a compact disc with the ignition
switch in “ACC” or “ON” position, the display will show 5
“ALARM” and the emergency broadcast will interrupt the cur-
rent programme. The volume level is set separately for listen-
ing to normal audio programmes and for listening to
emergency broadcasts. The volume level will therefore change
automatically to that set when an emergency broadcast or traf-
fic information broadcast was last received. When the emer-
gency broadcast is over, the radio will return to the previously
received programme and to the corresponding volume level.

5-29
 For pleasant driving
1. Enter the function setup mode by pressing the TUNE
switch (6) for 2 seconds or longer.

2. Press the TUNE switch (6) repeatedly to select the mode

5 you wish to change.
The order is: AF → CT → REG → TP-S → PI-S* → Lan-
guage of PTY display → SCV → PHONE → Function
setup mode OFF.
NOTE
● Although “PHONE” appears on the display, the PHONE
function is inoperative.

5-30
 For pleasant driving
3. Select the desired setting for each mode by turning them
ON or OFF as shown below.
The setting will be shown on the display.

NOTE
● After selecting a mode, you can leave the function setup 5
mode by taking either of the following steps:
• Press the TUNE switch (6) for at least 2 seconds.
• Make no entry for 10 seconds.
● For instructions on setting the language of the PTY dis-
play, refer to “To change the language of PTY display” on
page 5-26.

5-31
 For pleasant driving

CD control panel and display

E00709500774

1- AM/FM button 13- FOLDER switch

2- CD (CD mode changeover) button 14- (Track up) button
5 3- PWR (On-Off) switch 15- (Track down) button
4- PAGE (Title scroll) button 16- CD indicator
5- DISP (Display) button 17- FOLDER indicator
6- RPT (Repeat) button 18- TRACK (Track number) indicator
7- RDM (Random) button 19- TAG (Tag) indicator
8- (Fast-reverse) button 20- RPT (Repeat) indicator
9- (Fast-forward) button 21- RDM (Random) indicator
10- SCAN button 22- Display
11- Eject button 23- D-RPT indicator
12- CD insertion slot 24- D-RDM indicator

5-32
 For pleasant driving

To listen to a CD To listen to a music CD

E00709601147

1. Insert the disc with the label facing up.

When a disc is inserted, the CD indicator (16) will come
on and the CD player will begin playing even if the radio
is being used. The CD player will also start playback
when the CD button (2) is pressed with a disc in the player
or with a disc set in the CD insertion slot (12) - regardless
whether radio is operating or not.
2. To stop the CD, either turn off the power by pressing the
PWR switch (3), or change over to radio mode by press-
ing the AM/FM button (1), or eject the disc by pressing
the eject button (11).
NOTE
● To adjust the volume and tone, please refer to the section
“To adjust the volume” on page 5-17 and “To adjust the
tone” on page 5-17. Push the CD button (2) if a disc is already in the CD player.
● No adapter is needed for playback when an 8-cm compact The audio system will enter CD mode and start playback. The
track number and the playing-time will appear on the display.
disc is used. Insert the disc in the centre of the disc-load-
The tracks on the disc will be played consecutively and contin- 5
ing slot.
● For information concerning the handling of compact uously.
discs, refer to “Handling of compact discs” on page 5-72.

5-33
 For pleasant driving

To listen to an MP3 CD NOTE

This CD player allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer- ● While listening to a disc featuring both CD-DA (CD-Dig-
3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and ital Audio) and MP3 files, you can switch between read-
CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, ing of CD-DA files, MP3 files, and external input by
and Romeo formats. Each disc can hold up to 255 files in up to pressing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer (until you
100 folders, arranged in a maximum of 16 levels. The ID3 tag hear a beep).
information can be displayed during MP3 playback. For infor- For information on the external audio input, refer to “To
mation concerning ID3 tags, refer to “CD text and MP3 title use the external audio input function” on page 5-66.
display” on page 5-64. ● With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the
CD-DA files are automatically played first.
● The playback sound quality differs depending on the
encoding software and the bit rate. For more information,
refer to the owner’s manual for the encoding software.
● Depending on the structure of files and folders on the disc,
it may take some time until playback starts.
● MP3 encoding software and writing software are not sup-
plied with this unit.
● You may encounter difficulties when playing MP3 files or
displaying the information of such files recorded with cer-
5 tain writing software or CD recorders (CD-R/RW driv-
ers).
● If you record too many folders or files other than MP3 on
a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.
● This unit does not record MP3 files.
Push the CD button (2) if a disc is already in the CD player. ● For information on CD-Rs/RWs, refer to “Notes on CD-
The display shows “READING”, and playback will then begin. Rs/RWs” on page 5-74.
The folder number, the track number, the playing-time, and
MP3 indicator will appear on the display.

5-34
 For pleasant driving
Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order (Example)
! CAUTION
● Attempting to play a file which is not in the MP3
format, but which has an “.mp3” file extension nev- Root folder (root directory)
ertheless may produce noise from the speakers and
damage the speakers. This can also damage your
hearing.

Tree 1 Tree 2 Tree 3 Tree 4

Folder selection
In the order

File selection
In the order

5-35
 For pleasant driving

To fast-forward/reverse the disc To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only)

You can select your desired folder by turning the FOLDER
Fast-forward switch (13).
The disc is fast-forwarded when the button (9) is held
down.
Playback will begin once the button is released.
Fast-reverse
The disc is fast-reversed when the button (8) is held down.
Playback will begin once the button is released.

Folder up
5 Turn the FOLDER switch (13) clockwise until the desired
folder number appears on the display.
Folder down
Turn the FOLDER switch (13) anticlockwise until the desired
folder number appears on the display.

5-36
 For pleasant driving

To select a desired track To repeat tracks

You can cue tracks on a disc by using the or button (15 To repeat a track
or 14). Press the RPT button (6) to repeat the same track.
Track up If the RPT button is pressed, the RPT indicator (20) will come
The disc will skip as many songs as the number of times the on.
button (14) is pressed. To exit this mode, press the button again.
The display window will display the track number of the To repeat songs in the same folder (MP3 CDs only)
selected track. While a song is playing, press the RPT button (6) for 2 seconds
Track down or longer (until you hear a beep). The D-RPT indicator (23)
The disc will skip as many songs as the number of times the will come on and the system will repeat all the songs in the
folder that contains the song currently playing.
button (15) is pressed.
To exit this mode, press the button again.
The display window will display the track number of the
selected track. NOTE
● With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the
repeat mode will only repeat files of the same format
(only CD-DA or MP3 files).

5-37
 For pleasant driving

To change track playback order To find the start of each track on a disc for playback
Press the SCAN button (10). “SCAN” will appear on the dis-
Random playback for a disc (music CDs only) play (22) and the CD player will play back the first 10 seconds
If the RDM button (7) is pressed, the RDM indicator (21) will of each track on the disc. The track number will blink while the
come on and the tracks for playback will be selected at random.
scan mode is selected.
To exit this mode, press the button again. To exit this mode, press the button again.
Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs only)
If the RDM button (7) is pressed, the RDM indicator (21) will NOTE
● Once all tracks on the disc have been scanned, playback
come on and the tracks for playback will be selected at random
of the disc will restart from the beginning of the track that
from the folder that is currently played. To exit this mode, press
was playing when scanning started.
the button again.
● The scan mode will be cancelled when you switch to radio
Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3 CDs only) or CD operation.
Press the RDM button (7) for 2 seconds or longer (until you ● With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the
hear a beep). The D-RDM indicator (24) will come on and the scan mode will only play files of the same format (only
tracks to play will be selected at random from all folders on the CD-DA or MP3 files).
disc. To exit this mode, press the button again.
To eject discs
NOTE When the eject button (11) is pressed, the disc automatically
● With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the stops and is ejected. The system automatically switches to
5 random mode will only play files of the same format (only radio mode.
CD-DA or MP3 files) in a random sequence.
NOTE
● If you do not remove an ejected disc within 15 seconds,
the disc will be reloaded.

5-38
 For pleasant driving

CD text and MP3 title display MP3 titles

E00725000328 The CD player can display folder and track titles for discs with
This CD player can display CD text and MP3 titles including encoded folder and track information. Press the DISP button
ID3 tag information. (5) repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence:
CD text folder name → track name → normal display mode.
The CD player can display disc and track titles for discs
encoded with disc and track title information. Press the DISP Example
button (5) repeatedly to make selections in the following
sequence: disc name → track name → normal display mode. Folder
name
Example

Disc
name
Track
name

Track 5
name

NOTE
● The display can show up to 12 characters. If a disc name
or track name has more than 12 characters, press the
PAGE button (4) to view the next 12 characters.
● When there is no title information available for display,
the display shows “NO TITLE”.
● Characters that the CD player cannot display are shown as
“•”.
5-39
 For pleasant driving
ID3 tag information LW/MW/FM digital tuning radio with CD
The CD player can display ID3 tag information for files that
have been recorded with ID3 tag information. changer*
E00708501107
1. Press the DISP button (5) for 2 seconds or longer to
The audio system can only be used when the ignition switch is
switch to the ID3 tag information. The TAG indicator (19)
in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
will appear on the display.
2. Press the DISP button repeatedly to make selections in the NOTE
following sequence: album name → track name → artist ● To listen to the audio system while the engine is stopped,
name → normal display mode. turn the ignition key to the “ACC” position.
● If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, the audio
NOTE equipment may emit noise. This does not mean that any-
● To return from ID3 tag information to the folder name, thing is wrong with your audio equipment. In such a case,
press the DISP button again for 2 seconds or longer. use the cellular phone as far away from the audio equip-
● When there is no title information available for display,
ment as possible.
the display shows “NO TITLE”. ● Turn off the audio system immediately if foreign objects
● The display can show up to 12 characters. If a folder or water get into the audio equipment, or if smoke or a
name, track name, or item of ID3 tag information has
strange odour starts coming out of it. We recommend that
more than 12 characters, press the PAGE button (4) to you have it checked. Never try to repair it yourself. Avoid
view the next 12 characters. continuous usage without inspection by a qualified per-
5 ● Folder names and track names can each be displayed up to
son.
a length of 32 characters. Items of ID3 tag information ● The audio amplifier (if so equipped) is located under the
can each be displayed up to a length of 30 characters. front right seat. Do not subject the amplifier to strong
● Characters that the CD player cannot display are shown as
impacts, as this could lead to damage or malfunctioning of
“•”. the amplifier.

5-40
 For pleasant driving

Volume and tone control panel To adjust the volume

E00708600707 E00708700261

VOL (Volume control)

Turn the VOL knob (2) clockwise to increase the volume; anti-
clockwise to decrease the volume.
To adjust the tone
E00708800741

Press the SOUND switch (4) to select: SUB PUNCH → TYPE

→ FIELD → BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADER → BAL-
ANCE → audio control mode OFF.
NOTE
● The SUB LEVEL (subwoofer level) can only be adjusted
on vehicles with a premium sound system.
On vehicles without a premium sound system, when you
press the SOUND switch (4), the display starts from
TYPE.
1- PWR (On-Off) switch
2- VOL (Volume control) knob QUICK ACCESS MODE
3- Display To access the sound customisation features directly, push and 5
4- SOUND (Sound control) switch hold the SOUND switch (4), then turn the switch clockwise or
anticlockwise to access your desired sound customisation set-
ting. Release the switch to adjust the setting.
HOLD MODE
If the SOUND switch (4) is pushed and held for more than 2
seconds during the audio adjustment mode, it will change to
“Hold” mode. The selected audio mode will be held until the
SOUND switch (4) is pushed for more than 2 seconds again.
SUB PUNCH (Subwoofer volume control)
To select the desired subwoofer volume level.

5-41
 For pleasant driving

TYPE (Acoustic characteristics selection) FIELD (Sound field selection)

1. Turn the SOUND switch (4) to select the desired music 1. Turn the SOUND switch (4) to select the desired music
type. type.
2. Press the SOUND switch (4) to set the audio system to the 2. Press the SOUND switch (4) to set the audio system to the
selected music type. selected music type.

Acoustic Sound field type Details

Details
characteristics
This sound field produces a sound field
The optimum acoustic characteristics for NORMAL with the vocals in the front and the instru-
CLASSIC classical music, which requires an overall ments surrounding the listener.
sound balance that is flat. This sound field produces a sound effect
The optimum acoustic characteristics for STAGE where the vocals are right in front of the
jazz music, which requires an atmospheric driver, as on a stage.
JAZZ
sound that applies different modulations to This sound field produces a sound effect
the bass, mid-range, and treble. LIVE similar to a live venue, where the listener is
The optimum acoustic characteristics for wrapped in sound from all directions.
POP pop music, which requires a crisp vocal This sound field produces a sound effect
sound with a modulated bass and treble.
5 HALL similar to a concert hall with reverberating
acoustics.
The optimum acoustic characteristics for
ROCK rock music, which requires a dynamic
sound that emphasises the mid range. BASS (Bass tone control)
Turn the SOUND switch (4) to select the desired bass tone.
The optimum acoustic characteristics for
HIP-HOP hip hop music, which requires a powerful MID (Midrange tone control)
sound that emphasises the bass. Turn the SOUND switch (4) to select the desired middle tone.
TREBLE (Treble tone control)
Turn the SOUND switch (4) to select the desired treble tone.
FADER (Front/Rear balance control)
Turn the SOUND switch (4) to balance the volume of the front
and rear speakers.

5-42
 For pleasant driving

BALANCE (Left /Right balance control)

Turn the SOUND switch (4) to balance the volume of the front
and rear speakers.
NOTE
● When set to 0, a beep sounds.
● When SUB PUNCH, TYPE or FIELD is changed, the
sound will cut out briefly, but this does not indicate a mal-
function.
● The audio control mode will turn off if either the radio or
CD is operated, or if no adjustment is made within about
10 seconds.
SCV (Speed Compensated Volume) function
E00726800091

SCV function is a feature that automatically adjusts the VOL-

UME, BASS, MID, and TREBLE settings in accordance with
the vehicle speed.
The SCV function can be turned ON and OFF.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-53.
5

5-43
 For pleasant driving

Radio control panel and display

E00708900784

1- PWR (On-Off) switch

5 2- AM/FM (FM/MW/LW selection) button
3- Memory select buttons
4- TUNE switch
5- SEEK (Up-seek) button
6- SEEK (Down-seek) button
7- FM (FM1/FM2/FM3) indicator
8- ST (Stereo) indicator

5-44
 For pleasant driving

To listen to the radio

E00709000548

1. Press the PWR switch (1) or the AM/FM button (2) to turn
ON the radio.
Press the PWR switch again to turn OFF the radio.
2. Press the AM/FM button (2) to select the desired band.
3. Turn the TUNE switch (4), or press the SEEK button (5 or
6) or memory select buttons (3) to tune into a radio broad-
casting station.
To tune the radio
E00709100422

Automatic tuning
After pressing the SEEK button (5 or 6), a receivable station
will be automatically selected and reception of the station will
begin. Follow the steps described below.
1. Press the SEEK button (5 or 6), or turn the TUNE switch
Manual tuning
(4) to tune to the frequency you want to register to in the
The frequency changes every time the TUNE switch (4) is
memory.
turned. Turn the switch to select the desired radio broadcasting
station.
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (3) for 2 seconds 5
or longer.
To enter frequencies into the memory The sound will be momentarily interrupted while the fre-
E00716100844 quency is entered into the memory. The number of the
Manual setting button matching the entry in the memory as well as the
For the memory select buttons (3), you can assign a maximum frequency is displayed.
of 18 stations in the FM band (6 FM1, 6 FM2 and 6 FM3 sta- 3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the
tions) and 6 stations each in the MW and LW band. (Stations button and releasing it within 1 seconds.
already assigned to the memory select buttons are replaced by NOTE
any newly assigned stations.) ● Disconnecting the battery terminal erases all the radio fre-
quencies stored in the memory.

5-45
 For pleasant driving
Automatic setting
Via this method, all manually set stations in the band currently
selected for reception are replaced with stations in the same
band that are automatically selected in order of signal strength.
The radio automatically selects 6 stations in the FM band (FM3
stations only) and 6 stations each in the MW and LW band.
Follow the steps described below.
1. With radio mode selected, hold down the AM/FM button
(2) for 2 seconds or longer. The 6 stations with the best
signal strength will automatically be assigned to the mem-
ory select buttons (3), with the lowest-frequency station
being assigned to the lowest-number button.
2. When you subsequently press a memory select button to
select a channel number, the radio will begin receiving the
station assigned to that number.
NOTE
● If you press the AM/FM button (2) for 2 seconds or longer
5 while tuning to the FM1 or FM2 band, the radio will auto-
matically switch to the FM3 band, where the automatic
seeking/storing function will be activated.

5-46
 For pleasant driving

Radio data system (RDS)

E00709200289

1- PWR (On-Off) switch 8- SEEK (Down-seek) button

2- AM/FM (FM/MW/LW selection) button 9- CT (Clock time) indicator
3- Memory select buttons 10- RDS (Radio data system) indicator 5
4- TP (Traffic programme) button 11- TP (Traffic programme identification) indicator
5- PTY (Programme type) button 12- PTY (Programme type) indicator
6- TUNE switch 13- REG (Regional programme) indicator
7- SEEK (Up-seek) button 14- Display

5-47
 For pleasant driving
RDS uses PI (programme identification) signals and AF (alter- REG (Regional) function
native frequency) lists transmitted in addition to the normal E00721100073

FM broadcasting programmes. It picks up the FM stations that REG function limits to receive the stations broadcasting
are transmitting the same programme from the AF list and regional programmes.
automatically tunes to the station with the strongest signal Regional programming and regional networks are organsied
intensity. differently depending on the country or area (they may be
You can therefore continue listening to a programme on, for changed according to the hour, state, or broadcast area), so if
example, a long-distance drive without retuning to another sta- you don’t want to receive the regional programmes automati-
tion transmitting the same programme when leaving the service cally, you can set up REG ON not to receive regional pro-
area of the station you are currently receiving. grammes.
The RDS radio also features reception limited to programme
types, interrupts for traffic announcements received via EON The REG function can be turned ON and OFF.
(enhanced other network) and emergency broadcasts, as well Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-53.
as limited/unlimited reception of regional stations. PI (Programme Identification) search function
E00721200087
AF (Alternative Frequencies) function When the reception of a preset station becomes weak during
E00720900087

The AF function finds a station broadcasting the same pro- long-distance travel, the radio searches for another frequency
gramme and selects the station with the strongest signal of AF broadcasting the same programming with the same PI code in
lists. AF list.
5 The AF function is turned on at all times unless you manually If no frequencies with the same programming are found, the
switch it off. radio searches the frequencies for regional broadcasting. If the
search in the regional broadcasts succeeds, the display will
The AF function can be turned ON and OFF. show the REG indicator (13).
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-53. If the radio does not succeed when searching the regional pro-
grammes, the radio will return to the original preset station.
CT (Clock Time) function
E00721000072 On some vehicles the PI function can be turned ON and OFF.
The clock can be set automatically by using the signal from the Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-53.
local RDS stations. Refer to “Digital clock” on page 5-76.
NOTE
● While searching, the audio system is muted. The display
shows “WAIT” or “SEARCH”.

5-48
 For pleasant driving

PTY (Programme type) To search for a broadcast of the desired programme type:
E00721300219 1. Press the PTY button (5).
RDS broadcasts are classified according to programme type 2. Turn the TUNE switch (6) or press a memory select but-
(PTY) as follows. Use the TUNE switch (6) to select your ton (3) to select your desired PTY.
desired PTY. 3. Two seconds after a desired PTY has been selected, the
1. NEWS radio will begin to search for a broadcast of your selected
2. AFFAIRS (Current affairs) PTY. During search, the selected PTY on the display
3. INFO (Information) blinks.
4. SPORT 4. When the radio picks up a station with your desired PTY,
5. EDUCATE (Education) the display will show the name of the station.
6. DRAMA
7. CULTURE
8. SCIENCE
9. VARIED
10. POP M (Pop music)
11. ROCK M (Rock music)
12. EASY M (Easy music)
13. LIGHT M (Light classics)
14. CLASSICS
15. OTHER M (Other music) 5
16. WEATHER (Weather information)
17. FINANCE
18. CHILDREN
19. SOCIAL
20. RELIGION
21. PHONE IN
22. TRAVEL
23. LEISURE
24. JAZZ
25. COUNTRY
26. NATION M (National music)
27. OLDIES
28. FOLK M (Folk music)
29. DOCUMENT 5-49
 For pleasant driving

NOTE To change the language of PTY display

● If you press the SEEK button (7 or 8), the radio will try to E00721500136

find another broadcast of the same programme type that is You can select your favourite language among English, French,
currently selected. German, Swedish, Spanish and Italian.
● If no station is found with your desired PTY, the display 1. Press the TUNE switch (6) for 2 seconds or longer to
will show “EMPTY” for about 5 seconds and the radio select the language of PTY display mode.
will return to the previous station. Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-53.
2. Turn the TUNE switch (6) to select a language.
How to enter PTYs in the memory
E00721400076 NOTE
As many as 6 PTYs can be entered in the memory. ● After selecting a mode, you can leave the function setup
Follow the steps described below. mode by taking either of the following steps:
1. Press either the TUNE switch (6) to tune the PTY to be • Press the TUNE switch (6) for at least 2 seconds.
entered in the memory. • Make no entry for 10 seconds.
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (3) for 2 seconds
or longer. The sound will be momentarily interrupted
while the PTY is being entered into the memory. The
number of the button corresponding to the entry into the
memory and the PTY are displayed.
5 3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the
button and then releasing it within about 2 seconds.

5-50
 For pleasant driving

Traffic information
E00721600124

The radio will automatically tune in to traffic information

broadcasts while receiving FM broadcasts or playing compact
discs.
To select this function, follow the instructions below.
1. Press the TP button (4). The display will show “TP” (11).
If the RDS data can be read, the display will show “RDS”
(10). If not, the display will show “NO RDS” for about 5
seconds.
2. If the radio detects traffic information on either the station
currently selected or another station, the display will show
“TRAF INF” for 5 seconds followed by a 2-second indi-
cation of the frequency. Then, it will show the name of the
station broadcasting the traffic information to which you
will listen. The volume level is set separately for listening
to normal audio programmes and for listening to traffic
information. The volume level will therefore change auto-
matically to that set when traffic information was last
received. When the traffic information broadcast is over, 5
the radio will return to the previously received programme
and to the corresponding volume level.
3. Press the TP button (4) to return to the previous condition.
NOTE
● While “TP” is illuminated, the radio stops only at TP sta-
tions, even if the TUNE switch (6) is turned.

5-51
 For pleasant driving

TP (Traffic information Programme) search function

E00721800096

The traffic information programme standby function is turned

on (with the TP indicator (11) shown on the display) and after
about 45 seconds since the RDS indicator (10) turns off due to
weak signal or the tuning station is changed over from a TP
station to a station which does not broadcast traffic informa-
tion, the sound will beep 5 times and seeks out a TP station in
all frequencies automatically.
The TP search function can be turned ON and OFF.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-53.

5-52
 For pleasant driving

Emergency broadcasts Function setup mode

E00721700125 E00722500120

It is possible to change the following functions:

● AF
● CT
● REG
● TP-S
● PI-S*
● Language of PTY display
● SCV

If an emergency broadcast is caught while receiving a FM

broadcast or playing back a compact disc with the ignition
switch in “ACC” or “ON” position, the display will show 5
“ALARM” and the emergency broadcast will interrupt the cur-
rent programme. The volume level is set separately for listen-
ing to normal audio programmes and for listening to
emergency broadcasts. The volume level will therefore change
automatically to that set when an emergency broadcast or traf-
fic information broadcast was last received. When the emer-
gency broadcast is over, the radio will return to the previously
received programme and to the corresponding volume level.

5-53
 For pleasant driving
1. Enter the function setup mode by pressing the TUNE
switch (6) for 2 seconds or longer.

2. Press the TUNE switch (6) repeatedly to select the mode

5 you wish to change.
The order is: AF → CT → REG → TP-S → PI-S* → Lan-
guage of PTY display → SCV → PHONE → Function
setup mode OFF.
NOTE
● Although “PHONE” appears on the display, the PHONE
function is inoperative.

5-54
 For pleasant driving
3. Select the desired setting for each mode by turning them
ON or OFF as shown below.
The setting will be shown on the display.

NOTE
● After selecting a mode, you can leave the function setup 5
mode by taking either of the following steps:
• Press the TUNE switch (6) for at least 2 seconds.
• Make no entry for 10 seconds.
● For instructions on setting the language of the PTY dis-
play, refer to “To change the language of PTY display” on
page 5-50.

5-55
 For pleasant driving

CD control panel and display

E00709500787

1- AM/FM button 16- CD insertion slot

2- CD (CD mode changeover) button 17- FOLDER switch
5 3- PWR (On-Off) switch 18- (Track up) button
4- LOAD indicator 19- (Track down) button
5- LOAD button 20- CD indicator
6- PAGE (Title scroll) button 21- FOLDER indicator
7- DISP (Display) button 22- DISC (Disc) indicator
8- RTP (Repeat) button 23- TRACK (Track number) indicator
9- RDM (Random) button 24- TAG (Tag) indicator
10- (Fast-reverse) button 25- RPT (Repeat) indicator
11- (Fast-forward) button 26- RDM (Random mode) indicator
12- DISC (Disc down) button 27- Display
13- DISC (Disc up) button 28- D-RPT indicator
14- SCAN button 29- D-RDM indicator
15- Eject button
5-56
 For pleasant driving

To listen to a CD To load discs

E00709601150

The CD can be loaded or ejected by pressing the LOAD button

(5) or the eject button (15) even while the audio system is
switched off.
1. Press the PWR switch (3) to turn the audio system ON and
OFF. The audio system turns on in the last mode used.
2. Press the CD button (2) to enter CD mode.
The autochanger will start playback if a CD is already in
the autochanger.
3. To stop the CD, either turn off the power by pressing the
PWR switch (3), or change over to radio mode by press-
ing the AM/FM button (1), or eject the disc by pressing
the eject button (15).
NOTE
● For information on adjusting the volume and tone, refer to
“To adjust the volume” on page 5-17 and “To adjust the To load a single disc
tone” on page 5-17. 1. Press the LOAD button (5) briefly.
● As many as 6 CDs can be inserted into the CD auto- 2. The autochanger will show “WAIT” on the display and 5
changer. prepare for disc loading.
● 8 cm CDs cannot be played on this autochanger. 3. When the autochanger is ready for disc loading, the
● For information concerning the handling of compact LOAD indicator (4) will illuminate and the display will
discs, refer to “Handling of compact discs” on page 5-72. show “LOAD DISC No. (1-6)”.
4. When a disc is inserted into the CD slot, the disc will
begin to play.
NOTE
● If there are multiple empty slots, you can select your
desired slot by pressing the DISC buttons (12 or 13).
● If you do not insert a disc within approx. 15 seconds after
the autochanger is ready for loading, the loading standby
mode will be cancelled.
5-57
 For pleasant driving
To load all discs To eject discs
1. Press the LOAD button (5) for 2 seconds or longer (until
you hear a beep).
2. The autochanger will select the lowest-numbered empty
slot and switch to loading standby mode.
3. When the display shows “LOAD DISC No. (1-6)” insert a
disc. The autochanger will then automatically select the
next empty slot, before entering loading standby mode.
4. Repeat the above-described steps until every slot contains
a disc. After you have loaded the last disc, playback will
begin.
NOTE
● If you press the LOAD button (5) again while the auto-
changer is in loading standby mode, it will quit the load-
ing standby mode.
To eject a single disc
Press the eject button (15) briefly to eject the currently selected
disc.
5
NOTE
● If you press the eject button (15) while the display is
showing “LOAD DISC No. (1-6)”, the loading standby
mode will be cancelled and the next disc will be ejected.
● If you do not remove an ejected disc within 15 seconds,
the disc will be reloaded and the eject mode will be can-
celled. However, the reloaded disc will not be played.

5-58
 For pleasant driving
To eject all discs To listen to a music CD
1. Press the eject button (15) for 2 seconds or longer (until
you hear a beep).
2. The currently selected disc will be ejected. When you
remove the ejected disc, the next disc will automatically
be ejected.
3. Repeat the above-described steps until all of the discs
have been unloaded. The autochanger will then enter
loading standby mode.
NOTE
● If you do not remove an ejected disc within 15 seconds,
the disc will be reloaded and the eject mode will be can-
celled. However, the reloaded disc will not be played.
To select a desired disc
You can select your desired disc by using the DISC button (12 Push the CD button (2) if the discs are already in the auto-
or 13). The active disc will be indicated on the display. changer. The autochanger will enter CD mode and start play-
back. The disc number, the track number, and the playing-time
Disc up
will appear on the display. The discs in the unit will be played 5
Press the DISC button (13) repeatedly until the desired disc
number appears on the display. consecutively and continuously.

Disc down
Press the DISC button (12) repeatedly until the desired disc
number appears on the display.

5-59
 For pleasant driving

To listen to an MP3 CD NOTE

This autochanger allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Audio ● While listening to a disc featuring both CD-DA (CD-Dig-
Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable ital Audio) and MP3 files, you can switch between read-
CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level ing of CD-DA files, MP3 files, and external input by
1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each disc can hold up to pressing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer (until you
255 files in up to 100 folders, arranged in a maximum of 16 hear a beep).
levels. The ID3 tag information can be displayed during MP3 For information on the external audio input mode, refer to
playback. For information concerning ID3 tags, refer to “CD “To use the external audio input function” on page 5-66.
text and MP3 title display” on page 5-64. ● With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the
CD-DA files are automatically played first.
● The playback sound quality differs depending on the
encoding software and the bit rate. For more information,
refer to the owner’s manual for the encoding software.
● Depending on the structure of files and folders on the disc,
it may take some time until playback starts.
● MP3 encoding software and writing software are not sup-
plied with this unit.
● You may encounter difficulties when playing MP3 files or
displaying the information of such files recorded with cer-
5 tain writing software or CD recorders (CD-R/RW driv-
ers).
● If you record too many folders or files other than MP3 on
a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.
● This unit does not record MP3 files.
Push the CD button (2) if the discs are already in the CD auto- ● For information on CD-Rs/RWs, refer to “Notes on CD-
changer. Rs/RWs” on page 5-74.
The display shows “READING”, and playback will then begin.
The folder number, the track number, the playing-time, and
MP3 indicator will appear on the display.
! CAUTION
● Attempting to play a file which is not in the MP3
format, but which has an “.mp3” file extension nev-
ertheless may produce noise from the speakers and
damage the speakers. This can also damage your
5-60 hearing.
 For pleasant driving

To fast-forward/reverse the disc

Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order (Example)
Fast-forward
The disc is fast-forwarded when the button (11) is held
Root folder (root directory)
down.
Playback will begin once the button is released.
Fast-reverse
The disc is fast-reversed when the button (10) is held down.
Playback will begin once the button is released.

Tree 1 Tree 2 Tree 3 Tree 4

Folder selection
In the order

File selection
In the order

5-61
 For pleasant driving

To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only) To select a desired track

You can select your desired folder by turning the FOLDER You can cue tracks on a disc by using the or button (19
switch (17). or 18).
Track up
The disc will skip as many songs as the number of times the
button (18) is pressed.
The display window will display the track number of the
selected track.
Track down
The disc will skip as many songs as the number of times the
button (19) is pressed.
The display window will display the track number of the
selected track.

Folder up
5 Turn the FOLDER switch (17) clockwise until the desired
folder number appears on the display.
Folder down
Turn the FOLDER switch (17) anticlockwise until the desired
folder number appears on the display.

5-62
 For pleasant driving

To repeat tracks To change track playback order

To repeat a track Random playback for a disc (music CDs only)
Press the RPT button (8) to repeat the same track. If the RDM button (9) is pressed, the RDM indicator (26) will
If the RPT button is pressed, the RPT indicator (25) will come come on and the tracks for playback will be selected at random.
on. To exit this mode, press the button again.
To exit this mode, press the button again.
Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs only)
To repeat a disc (music CDs only) If the RDM button (9) is pressed, the RDM indicator (26) will
While a song is playing, press the RPT button (8) for 2 seconds come on and the tracks for playback will be selected at random
or longer (until you hear a beep). The D-RPT indicator (28) from the folder that is currently played. To exit this mode, press
will come on and the disc will repeat all the songs on the disc. the button again.
To exit this mode, press the button again.
Random playback for all discs in the autochanger (music
To repeat songs in the same folder (MP3 CDs only) CDs only)
While a song is playing, press the RPT button (8) for 2 seconds Press the RDM button (9) for 2 seconds or longer (until you
or longer (until you hear a beep). The D-RPT indicator (28) hear a beep). The D-RDM indicator (29) will come on and the
will come on and the system will repeat all the songs in the tracks will be selected for playback at random from all discs
folder that contains the song currently playing. loaded in the CD autochanger. To exit this mode, press the but-
To exit this mode, press the button again. ton again.
5
NOTE
● With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the
repeat mode will only repeat files of the same format
(only CD-DA or MP3 files).

5-63
 For pleasant driving
Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3 CDs only) CD text and MP3 title display
Press the RDM button (9) for 2 seconds or longer (until you E00725000331

hear a beep). The D-RDM indicator (29) will come on and the This autochanger can display CD text and MP3 titles, including
tracks will be selected for playback at random from all folders ID3 tag information.
on the currently selected disc. To exit this mode, press the but- CD text
ton again. The autochanger can display disc and track titles for discs with
NOTE converted disc and track title information. Press the DISP but-
● If an MP3 CD has been loaded in the autochanger and all ton (7) repeatedly to make selections in the following
discs random mode is selected, the autochanger will skip sequence: disc name → track name → normal display mode.
over the MP3 disc to the next music CD.
● With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the Example
random mode will only play files of the same format (only
CD-DA or MP3 files) in a random sequence. Disc
To find the start of each track on a disc for playback name
Press the SCAN button (14). “SCAN” will appear on the dis-
play and the autochanger will play back the first 10 seconds of
each track on the selected disc. The track number will blink
while the scan mode is selected.
5 To exit this mode, press the button again. Track
name
NOTE
● Once all tracks on the disc have been scanned, playback
of the disc will restart from the beginning of the track that
was playing when scanning started.
● The scan mode will be cancelled when you switch to radio NOTE
or CD operation. ● The display can show up to 12 characters. If a disc name
● With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the or track name has more than 12 characters, press the
scan mode will only play files of the same format (only PAGE button (6) to view the next 12 characters.
CD-DA or MP3 files). ● When there is no title information available for display,
the display shows “NO TITLE”.
● Characters that the autochanger cannot display are shown
as “•”.
5-64
 For pleasant driving
MP3 titles ID3 tag information
The autochanger can display folder and track titles for discs The autochanger can display ID3 tag information for files that
with recorded folder and track information. Press the DISP but- have been recorded with ID3 tag information.
ton (7) repeatedly to make selections in the following 1. Press the DISP button (7) for 2 seconds or longer to
sequence: folder name → track name → normal display mode. switch to the ID3 tag information. The “TAG” indicator
(24) will appear on the display.
Example 2. Press the DISP button repeatedly to make selections in the
following sequence: album name → track name → artist
Folder name → normal display mode.
name NOTE
● To return from ID3 tag information to the folder name,
press the DISP button (7) again for 2 seconds or longer.
● When there is no title information available for display,
the display shows “NO TITLE”.
Track ● The display can show up to 12 characters. If a folder
name name, track name, or item of ID3 tag information has
more than 12 characters, press the PAGE button (6) to
view the next 12 characters.
● Folder names and track names can each be displayed up to 5
a length of 32 characters. Items of ID3 tag information
can each be displayed up to a length of 30 characters.
● Characters that the autochanger cannot display are shown
as “•”.

5-65
 For pleasant driving

To use the external audio input function To activate the external audio input mode
(vehicles with a rear-seat display)*
E00732200133

Auxiliary Video connector

(RCA)

1. Use a commercially available audio cable to connect the

audio equipment to the internal audio input connector (A
or B).
5 Auxiliary Video connector (RCA)
2. Press the CD button (D) for more than 2 seconds.
A - Left audio input connector (white)
The display (E) will show “AUX REAR” and the external
B - Right audio input connector (red)
audio input mode will be activated.
C - Video input connector (yellow)
With the power of the rear-seat display switched on, press
You can listen to commercially available audio equipment, the SOURCE button of the rear-seat display to activate the
such as a portable audio system via your vehicle’s speakers. To VIDEO mode. (For details, refer to the separate rear-seat
this end, you need to connect the audio equipment to the audio display owner’s manual.)
input connectors (A or B) - pin jacks - for external sources. 3. To deactivate the external audio input mode, press the
NOTE AM/FM button (F) or the CD button (D) to switch to
● For information on using the video input connector (C), another mode.
please refer to the separate owner’s manual for the rear-
seat display.

5-66
 For pleasant driving

! CAUTION To listen to a disc in the rear-seat display

● Do not operate the connected audio equipment while (vehicle with rear-seat display)
E00755100025
driving. It is possible to listen to the audio from the rear-seat display
This could distract you and cause an accident. using the vehicle’s speakers.

NOTE Press the CD button to select the rear-seat display mode.

● Connected audio equipment cannot be controlled via the Each push of the CD button changes the mode to the next one
vehicle’s audio system. in the following sequence: CD mode → rear-seat display mode
● For information on how to connect and operate the audio → CD mode.
equipment, refer to the owner’s manual for the equipment.
The following operation of the rear-seat display is possible
from the audio system.

Source Operation
CD Track selection
MP3/WMA Folder/Track selection
Video CD Track/Scene selection
5
DVD video Title/Chapter selection
DVD audio Group/Track selection
To make your desired selection, use the TRACK button or the
FOLDER button on the audio system.
NOTE
● For more details about the rear-seat display, refer to the
separate owner’s manual.

5-67
 For pleasant driving

Steering wheel audio remote control Turning on the power

switches* Press the power switch (3) to turn on the power. When you turn
E00710000056
the power on, the mode that was selected when the power was
The remote control switch is located on the left side of the last turned off appears. To turn off the power, press and hold
steering wheel. down the power switch (3) for about 2 seconds until you hear a
It can be used when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or beep.
“ACC” positions. Volume adjustment
Volume up button - 1
While the button is pressed, the volume continues to increase.
Volume down button - 2
While the button is pressed, the volume continues to decrease.
Mode selection
Press the mode selector button (3) to select the desired mode.
The mode changes in the following order.
FM1 → FM2 → FM3 → MW → LW → CD → FM1

5 To listen to the radio

Press the mode selector button (3) to select the desired band
(LW/MW/FM).

1- Volume up button
Automatic tuning
2- Volume down button Seek up button - 4/ Seek down button - 5
3- Power switch / mode selector button After pressing these buttons, reception of the selected station
4- Seek up / track up / fast-forward button will begin.
5- Seek down / track down / fast-reverse button
NOTE
● When operating the steering wheel audio remote control
switches, do not operate more than one at the same time.

5-68
 For pleasant driving

To listen to a CD
Press the mode selector button (3) and select CD mode.
To fast-forward/reverse the disc
To fast-forward/reverse the disc, press the fast-forward button
(4) or the fast-reverse button (5).
Fast-forward
You can fast-forward the disc by holding down the fast-for-
ward button (4). While the button is kept pressed, the disc will
be fast-forwarded.
Fast-reverse
You can fast-reverse the disc by holding down the fast-reverse
button (5). While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be
fast-reversed.
NOTE
● In the case of an MP3 CD, you can fast-forward and fast-
reverse tracks in the same folder.
To select a desired track 5
You can select your desired track by using the track up button
(4) or the track down button (5).
NOTE
● Pressing the track down button (5) once during the song
will cause the system to restart playing from the beginning
of the song.

5-69
 For pleasant driving

Error codes
E00710100800

If an error code (1) appears on the display, take action in accordance with the table below.
5 Error display Problem Item Remedy
NO DISC No disc inserted There are no discs in the CD player. Insert disc.
Disc is not loaded correctly, or conden- Insert the disc with the label facing up.
ERROR 01 Focus error
sation on disc. Remove moisture from disc.
Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrations
ERROR 02 Disc error
excessive vehicle vibration. stop.
Loading or eject mechanism error. Pick- Eject disc and reload. If the disc will not eject,
ERROR 03 Mechanism error
up is out of position. have the equipment inspected.
The inside of the audio The internal protection circuit against Allow the audio system to cool by waiting about
ERROR HOT
system is too hot. high temperatures has responded. 30 minutes.

5-70
 For pleasant driving

Error display Problem Item Remedy

Communication error between external
Communication or Please consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
ERROR device and audio equipment.
power supply error Authorised Service Point.
Power supply of external device faulty.

5-71
 For pleasant driving

Handling of compact discs

E00723000151

● Use only the type of compact discs that have the mark
shown in the illustration below. (Playback of CD-R or
CD-RW discs may cause problems.)

5
● The use of special shaped, damaged compact discs (like
cracked discs) or low-quality compact discs (like warped
discs or burrs on the discs) such as those shown will dam-
age the CD player.

5-72
 For pleasant driving
● Under the following circumstances, moisture can form on ● To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth. Wipe directly
discs and inside the audio system, preventing normal from the centre hole toward the outer edge. Do not wipe in
operation. a circle. Never use any chemicals such as benzine, paint
• When there is high humidity (for example, when it is thinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-static agent on the
raining). disc.
• When the temperature suddenly rises, such as right after
the heater is turned on in cold weather.
In this case, wait until the moisture has had time to dry
out.
● When the CD player is subjected to violent vibrations,
such as during off-road driving, the tracking may not
work.
● When storing compact discs, always store them in their
separate cases. Never place compact discs in direct sun-
light, or in any place where the temperature or humidity is
high.
● Never touch the flat surface of the disc where there is not
a label. This will damage the disc surface and could affect
the sound quality. When handling a compact disc, always 5
hold it by the outer edge and the centre hole. ● Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil, etc. to write
on the label surface of the disc.

5-73
 For pleasant driving
● Do not put additional labels (A) or stickers (B) on com- Notes on CD-Rs/RWs
pact discs. Also, do not use any compact disc on which a E00725100055

label or sticker has started to peel off or any compact disc ● You may have trouble playing back some CD-R/RW discs
that has stickiness or other contamination left by a peeled- recorded on CD recorders (CD-R/RW drives), either due
off label or sticker. If you use such a compact disc, the CD to their recording characteristics or dirt, fingerprints,
player may stop working properly and you may not be scratches, etc. on the disc surface.
able to eject the compact disc. ● CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high temperatures and
high humidity than ordinary music CDs and can therefore
be damaged and rendered unplayable if left inside your
vehicle for a long time.
● Depending on the combination of the writing software,
the CD recorder (CD-R/RW drive), and the disc used to
create a CD-R/RW, the disc might not play successfully.
● This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discs if the session
is not closed.
● This player cannot play back CD-R/RW discs which con-
tain other than CD-DA or MP3 data (Video CD, etc.).
● Be sure to observe the handling instructions for the CD-
R/RW disc.
5
! WARNING
● Operating the CD player in a manner other than
specifically instructed herein may result in hazard-
ous radiation exposure. Do not remove the cover
and attempt to repair the CD player by yourself.
There are no user serviceable components inside. If
the CD player is not working correctly, it is recom-
mended that you have it inspected.

5-74
 For pleasant driving

Antenna To remove
E00710500237 Turn the pole (A) anticlockwise.
Roof antenna
Before listening to the radio, raise the antenna until you feel a
click.

To install
Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base (B) until it is
securely retained. 5
NOTE
● Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the following cases:
• When driving into an automatic car wash.
• When placing a car cover over the vehicle.
● Before driving into a structure that has a low ceiling, fold
down the antenna to prevent it from hitting the ceiling.

5-75
 For pleasant driving

Digital clock* Select the automatic mode or the manual mode by performing
E00711800178 the following operations:
1. Press the PWR switch (A) to turn ON the audio system.
2. Enter the function setup mode by pressing the TUNE
switch (B) for 2 seconds or longer.

For adjustment of the digital clock, you can choose between

automatic mode and manual mode:
5

5-76
 For pleasant driving

3. Press the TUNE switch (B) repeatedly to select the CT NOTE

(Clock Time) mode. ● Although “PHONE” appears on the display, the PHONE
The order is: AF → CT → REG →TP-S → Language of function is inoperative.
PTY display → SCV → PHONE → Function setup mode 5
OFF
(Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-29, 5-53.)

5-77
 For pleasant driving
4. Turn the TUNE switch (B) left and right and select either Automatic mode
ON or OFF. The automatic mode can set the local time automatically by
using the signal from local RDS stations. In this mode, CT (A)
is shown on the display. Refer to “Radio data system (RDS)”
on page 5-23, 5-47.

CT ON- Automatic mode

CT OFF- Manual mode
5
NOTE
● After selecting a mode, you can leave the function setup
mode by taking either of the following steps:
• Press the TUNE switch (B) for at least 2 seconds.
• Make no entry for 10 seconds.

5-78
 For pleasant driving

Manual mode 3. Once the time is set, press the “DISP” button, and the time
The manual mode is also available in case the “Automatic display will stop flashing.
mode” displays the incorrect time when adjacent local RDS After the time adjustment has been made, the flashing
stations are located in a different time zone. Refer to “Radio stops automatically.
data system (RDS)” on page 5-23, 5-47.
NOTE
● If the battery cables are disconnected for repairs or other
reasons, you need to reset the clock to the correct time
after reconnection.
● The digital clock does not have a second display. When
the “minute” display is adjusted and reset to zero, the
clock begins at zero seconds for the selected minute.
CLOCK DISP H M :00

5
Set the time by pressing the various buttons as described
below.
1. Keep the CLOCK button pressed until the time display
flashes.
2. Press the appropriate buttons to adjust the time.
“H” button - To adjust the hour
“M” button - To adjust the minutes
“:00” button - To reset the minutes to zero
10:01 - 10:29...... Changes to 10:00
10:30 - 10:59...... Changes to 11:00

5-79
 For pleasant driving

Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone ! WARNING

interface system with voice recognition* ● Although the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone
E00726000077
interface system with voice recognition allows you to
The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system make hands-free calls, if you choose to use the cell
with voice recognition uses a wireless communication technol- phone while driving, you must not allow that usage
ogy known as Bluetooth®. This system allows you to make to distract you from traffic.
hands-free calls in your vehicle, provided your are using a Anything, including cellular phone usage, that dis-
Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone with hands-free profile. tracts you from the safe operation of your vehicle
The system is equipped with a voice recognition function, increases your risk of an accident. Refer to and fol-
which lets you make hands-free calls by simple switch opera- low all state and local laws in your area regarding
tions and voice commands using a defined voice tree. cellular phone usage while driving.

The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system NOTE

with voice recognition is operational with the ignition switch in ● You cannot use the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone
the “ON” or “ACC” position. interface system with voice recognition if your cellular
To use the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface with phone has a dead battery or is turned off.
voice recognition, you should first connect your Bluetooth® ● Hands-free calls will not be possible in areas outside your
5 compatible mobile phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® cellular cellular phone service area or at locations where no signal
phone interface. Refer to “Pairing a cellular phone” on page is available.
5-89.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of BLUETOOTH SIG,
INC.

5-80
 For pleasant driving

Steering control switch Volume up button

E00727200018 Press this button to increase the volume.
Volume down button
Press this button to decrease the volume.
SPEECH button
● Press this button to change to voice recognition mode.
While the system is in voice recognition mode, “Listen-
ing” will appear on the audio display.
● If you press the button briefly while in voice recognition
mode, it will interrupt prompting and allow voice com-
mand input.
Pressing the button longer will deactivate the voice recog-
nition mode.
● Pressing this button briefly during a call will enable voice
recognition and allow voice command input.
1- Volume up button PICK-UP button
2- Volume down button ● Press this button when an incoming call is received to
3- SPEECH button answer the telephone. 5
4- PICK-UP button ● When another call is received during a call, press this but-
5- HANG-UP button ton to put the first caller on hold and talk to the new caller.
• In such circumstances, you can press the button briefly
to switch between callers. You will switch to the first
caller and the other caller will be put on hold.
• To establish a three-way call in such situations, press the
SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode and
then say “Join call”.

5-81
 For pleasant driving

HANG-UP button Voice recognition function

● Press this button when an incoming call is received to E00727300048

refuse the call. The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system
● Press this button during a call to end the current call. features a voice recognition function. Your voice will be recog-
When another call is on hold or there is an incoming call, nised via a microphone in the room lamp (front), allowing you
you will switch to that call. to make hands-free calls by using spoken commands.
Voice recognition is possible for English, Spanish, French,
NOTE German and Italian. The factory setting is English.
● When you press the SPEECH button to enter voice recog-
Some of the voice commands indicated below have a number
nition mode with a cellular phone paired to the system,
of alternative commands. For a table showing the voice com-
current information on the cellular phone, such as
mands in each language and the corresponding alternative
“remaining battery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,”
commands, refer to “Commands and Alternatives” on page
will be displayed on the audio display.* (Refer to “Pair-
5-103.
ing a cellular phone” on page 5-89.)
*: Some cellular phones will not send this information to NOTE
the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface sys- ● If your voice command differs from the predefined com-
tem with voice recognition. mand or cannot be recognised due to ambient noise or
● Call waiting and three-way calls can be used by the some other reason, the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular
Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system phone interface will prompt you to repeat the voice com-
5 with voice recognition, only when those services can be mand for up to 3 times.
used with your cellular phone.

5-82
 For pleasant driving

Selecting the Language The system recognises your spoken command and changes
There are two ways to change the language. the language
From the main menu, say 'English' (Spanish, French, German
NOTE or Italian) and the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone inter-
● The more entries that are registered in the phone book, the
longer it will take to change the language. face system will recognise the pronounced word in the native
language, and ask you if you want to change to that language.
Change the language using the “Language” command 1. The voice guide will say “Would you like to change the
1. Press the SPEECH button. language to English (Spanish, French, German or Ital-
2. Say “Setup.” ian)?”
3. Say “Language.” 2. If you say “Yes,” the voice guide will say “Please Wait,
4. The voice guide will say “Select a language: English, Switching to English (Spanish, French, German or Italian)
Spanish, French, German or Italian.” Say the desired lan- Phone Book” and it will start the language change proc-
guage. (Example: Say “English.”) ess.
5. The voice guide will say “English (Spanish, French, Ger- If you do not want to change the language, say “No.”
man or Italian.) selected. Is this correct?” Say “Yes” to 3. When the voice guide says “English (Spanish, French,
start the language change process. Say “No” to return to German or Italian) selected,” the language change process
Step 4. is completed and the system will return to the main menu.
6. When the voice guide says “English (Spanish, French,
German or Italian) selected,” the language change process
is completed and the system will return to the main menu. 5

5-83
 For pleasant driving

Speaker enrolment function Speaker enrolment

E00727400094 It takes about 10 to 15 minutes to complete the speaker enrol-
The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system ment process.
with voice recognition offers a speaker enrolment function to To ensure optimum results, run through the process while in
create a voice model for one person per language. the driver’s seat, in an environment that is as quiet as possible
Your voice characteristics and pronunciations are registered in (without rain or strong winds and with the vehicle windows
this voice model. This makes it easier for the Hands-free Blue- closed).
tooth® cellular phone interface to recognise your spoken com- Use the following procedure for speaker enrolment.
mands. 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the gearshift lever in
You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrol- the “N” position (M/T) or the selector lever in the “P”
ment function on and off according to your needs. position (A/T or CVT) and pull the parking brake lever.
NOTE
● Speaker enrolment is not possible unless the vehicle is
parked. Make sure you park the vehicle in a safe area
before attempting speaker enrolment.
● Please turn off your phone while in speaker enrolment to
prevent interruption of the process.
2. Press the SPEECH button.
5 3. Say “Voice training”.
4. The voice guide will say “This operation must be per-
formed in a quiet environment while the vehicle is
stopped. See the owner’s manual for the list of required
training phrases. Press and release the SPEECH button
when you are ready to start. Press and hold the HANG-UP
button to cancel at any time”. Press the SPEECH button to
start the speaker enrolment process.

5-84
 For pleasant driving

NOTE 6. When all enrolment commands have been read out, the
● If you do not start the speaker enrolment process within 3 voice guide will say “Speaker Enrolment is complete”.
minutes after pressing the SPEECH button, the speaker The system will then end the speaker enrolment process
enrolment function will time out. and return to the main menu.
The voice guide will say “Speaker Enrolment has timed
out”. The system will then beep and the voice recognition NOTE
mode will be deactivated. ● Completing the speaker enrolment process will turn on the
voice model automatically.
● Phone calls received during the speaker enrolment process
cannot be answered. ● The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not work in this
5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1. Repeat the cor- mode.
responding phrase listed in table “Enrolment Commands”
on page 5-115.
The system will register your voice and then move on to
the registration of the next command. Continue the proc-
ess until all phrases have been registered.
NOTE
● To repeat the most recent voice training command, press
and release the SPEECH button.
● If you press and hold down the HANG-UP button within 5 5
seconds after reading of an enrolment phase number by
the voice guide, the system will beep and stop the speaker
enrolment process.

5-85
 For pleasant driving

Enabling and disabling the voice model and retraining Help function
You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrol- E00727700013

ment function on and off according to your needs. The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system
You can also retrain the system. with voice recognition is equipped with a Help function.
Use the following procedure to perform these actions. If you say “Help” when the system is waiting for a voice com-
1. Press the SPEECH button. mand input, the system will tell you a list of the commands that
2. Say “Voice training”. can be used under the circumstances.
3. If you have completed a speaker enrolment process once
already, the voice guide will say either “Enrolment is ena- Cancelling
E00727800043
bled. Would you like to disable or retrain?” or “Enrolment
There are two cancel functions. If you are in the main menu,
is disabled. Would you like to enable or retrain?”
4. When enrolment is “enabled”, the voice model is on; say “Cancel” to exit from the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular
when enrolment is “disabled”, the voice model is off. Say phone interface system. If you are anywhere else within the
the command that fits your needs. system, say “Cancel” to return to the main menu.
Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enrolment process and MUTE function
recreate a new voice model. (Refer to “Speaker enrol- E00727900015
ment” on page 5-84.) At any time during a call, you can mute the vehicle micro-
phone.
NOTE Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying “Mute” during a
5 ● If you say “Retrain” you will proceed to Step 4 under
call will turn ON the MUTE function and mute the micro-
“Speaker enrolment”. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put
the gearshift lever in the “N” position (M/T) or the selec- phone.
tor lever in the “P” position (A/T or CVT) and pull the Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn off the MUTE
parking brake lever. If you have not stopped the vehicle function and cancel the mute on the microphone.
and shifted the transmission into 'N' or 'P' respectively,
speaker enrolment will not be possible. The voice guide
will say “This operation must be performed in a quiet
environment while the vehicle is stopped” and the system
will return to the main menu.

5-86
 For pleasant driving

Confirmation function setting Security function

E00728000013 E00728100014

The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system It is possible to use a password as a security function by setting
with voice recognition is equipped with a confirmation func- a password of your choice for the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellu-
tion. lar phone interface system with voice recognition.
With the confirmation function activated, you are given more When the security function is turned on, it is necessary to make
opportunities than normal to confirm a command when making a voice input of a 4 digit password in order to use all functions
various settings to the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone of the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system
interface system with voice recognition. This allows you to with voice recognition, except for reception.
decrease the possibility that a setting is accidentally changed.
The confirmation function can be turned on or off by following Setting the password
E00728200015
the steps below. Use the following procedure to turn on the security function by
1. Press the SPEECH button. setting a password.
2. Say “Setup”. 1. Press the SPEECH button.
3. Say “Confirmation prompts”. 2. Say “Setup”.
4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation prompts are 3. Say “Password”.
<on/off>. Would you like to turn confirmation prompts 4. The voice guide will say “Password is disabled. Would
<off/on>”. you like to enable it?” Answer “Yes”.
Answer “Yes” to change the setting or answer “No” to Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the password and 5
keep the current setting. return to the main menu.
5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation prompts are 5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-digit password.
<off/on>” and then the system will return to the main Remember this password. It will be required to use this
menu. system”. Say 4 numbers of your choice from 0 to 9 in
order to input the 4-digit password.
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say “Pass-
word <4-digit password>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes”.
Answer “No” to return to the password input in Step 5.
7. When the registration of the password is completed, the
voice guide will say “Password is enabled” and the system
will return to the main menu.

5-87
 For pleasant driving

Entering the password Disabling the password

E00728300016 E00728400017

If a password has been set and the security function is enabled, Use the following procedure to turn off the security function by
the voice guide will say “Hands-free System is locked. State disabling the password.
the password to continue” when the SPEECH button is pressed 1. Press the SPEECH button.
to enter voice recognition mode. Say the 4-digit password 2. Say “Setup”.
number to enter the password. 3. Say “Password”.
If the entered password is wrong, the voice guide will say 4. The voice guide will say “Password is enabled. Would
“Incorrect Password. Please try again”. Enter the correct pass- you like to disable it?” Answer “Yes”.
word. Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of the password and
return to the main menu.
NOTE 5. When the disabling of the password is completed, the
● You can still make emergency calls without entering the voice guide will say “Password is disabled” and the sys-
password, even when the security function is enabled. tem will return to the main menu.
After the voice guide says “Hands-free System is locked.
State the password to continue”, say “Emergency”. The
emergency calls function will be available. (Refer to
“Emergency calls” on page 5-95.)
● You can reenter the password as many times as you want.
5 ● If you have forgotten your password, say “Cancel” to quit
the voice input mode and then check with a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorised Service Point.

5-88
 For pleasant driving

Pairing a cellular phone Use the following procedure to pair a Bluetooth® compatible
cell phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® cellular phone interface.
E00728500063

To use the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface sys- 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the gearshift lever in
tem with voice recognition, you first have to pair a Bluetooth® the “N” position (M/T) or the selector lever in the “P”
compatible cellular phone to the interface system. position (A/T or CVT) and pull the parking brake lever.
The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system
NOTE
with voice recognition can register up to seven Bluetooth® ● You cannot pair a Bluetooth® cellular phone to the Hands-
compatible cellular phones. However, of the cellular phones
registered, the cellular phone with the highest priority level free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system, unless
the vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the vehicle in a
will be automatically connected to the Hands-free Bluetooth® safe area before pairing a cellular phone to the system.
cellular phone interface system with voice recognition. 2. Press the SPEECH button.
NOTE 3. Say “Setup.”
● Certain Bluetooth® compatible cellular phones may not 4. Say “Pairing options”
5. The voice guide will say “Do you want to Pair a phone,
be compatible with the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular delete a phone or list paired phones?” Say “Pair a phone.”
phone interface system with voice recognition.
NOTE
● A maximum of 7 Bluetooth® compatible cellular phones 5
can be registered.
If 7 cellular phones are already registered, delete a phone
and then pair the new phone. (Refer to “Deleting a phone”
on page 5-92.)

5-89
 For pleasant driving
6. After the voice guide says “Please say a 4-digit pairing 8. When the system finds a Bluetooth® compatible cell
code,” say a 4 digit number. The 4 digit number will be phone, the voice guide will say “Please say the name of
registered as the pairing code for the phone. the phone after the beep.” After you hear the beep, name
When the confirmation function is on, the system will the phone by saying a name of your preference.
confirm whether the number is valid. Answer “Yes.”
Say “No” to return to pairing code selection. NOTE
● When the system cannot recognise the Bluetooth® com-
NOTE patible cell phone, the pairing process will end and the
● The pairing code entered here is only used for the Blue-
system will beep and then return to normal status.
tooth connection certification. It can be any 4-digit
Try the pairing process again after reconfirming whether
number you choose.
Remember the pairing code as it needs to be keyed into or not the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface
the phone later in the pairing process. system supports your Bluetooth® compatible cellular
Depending on the selected Bluetooth® connection set- phone.
tings, entry of this number may be required each time the 9. The voice guide will say “Assign a priority level between
1 and 7. One is the highest priority.” Say a number
phone attempts to “connect” to the Hands-free Bluetooth®
between 1 and 7 to set a priority level for the cellular
cellular phone interface system with voice recognition.
phone.
Refer to your cellular phone owner's manual for connec-
tion defaults and settings. NOTE
5 7. The voice guide will say “Start pairing procedure on ● If you selected a priority level that has already been set for
phone. See phone’s manual for instructions”. Refer to the a different phone, the system will ask you whether you
owner’s manual of your cellular phone and enter the wish to overwrite that priority level.
phone’s pairing code registered in Step 6. To overwrite the priority level, answer “Yes.”
Answer “No” to return to the priority level selection in
Step 9.

5-90
 For pleasant driving
10. After the voice guide says “<phone tag> set to priority 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” it will read out
<priority>,” the system will start the pairing process. Wait each priority number and phone name pair in order, start-
a moment for the pairing process to complete. ing with the phone that has the highest priority level (from
When the confirmation function is on, the system will 1 to 7).
confirm whether the number said is acceptable. Answer Say the priority number of the phone that you want to con-
“Yes.” nect to.
Answer “No” to return to the priority level selection in
Step 9. NOTE
11. When the pairing process is completed, the voice guide ● You can connect to a phone at any time by pressing the
will say “Pairing Complete.” The system will then beep SPEECH button and saying the priority number, even
and the voice recognition mode will be deactivated. before all of the priority number and phone name pairs are
read out by the system.
Selecting the phone 5. After the voice guide says “<phone tag> selected,” the
E00732300017 system will reconnect to the cellular phone. Wait a
When multiple paired phones are present in range of the moment for the process to complete.
Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system with When the confirmaion prompts are on, the system will ask
voice recognition, the phone with the highest priority (set dur- you again whether the phone that you want to reconnect to
ing the paring process) will be connected to the system. is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and reconnect to the
Use the following procedure to connect to another pair phone cellular phone. If you answer “No,” the system will ask
with lower priority. “Which phone please?” Select the priority of the phone 5
1. Press the SPEECH button. that you want to connect to.
2. Say “Setup.” 6. When the reconnection of the cellular phone is completed,
3. Say “Select phone.” the voice guide will say “<phone tag> will temporarily
override phone priorities” and then the system will return
to the main menu.
NOTE
● To change the priority level of a specific phone, redo the
pairing process for that phone. (Refer to “Pairing a cellu-
lar phone” on page 5-89.)

5-91
 For pleasant driving

Calling out a list of the registered cellular phones Deleting a phone

E00728700052 E00728800037

You can use the following procedure to hear a list of the cellu- Use the following procedure to delete a paired Bluetooth® cell
lar phones that are currently registered.
phone from the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface
1. Press the SPEECH button.
system.
2. Say “Setup.”
1. Press the SPEECH button.
3. Say “Pairing options.”
2. Say “Setup.”
4. The voice guide will say “Do you want to pair a phone,
3. Say “Pairing options.”
delete a phone or list paired phones?” Say “list paired
4. The voice guide will say “Do you want to pair a phone,
phones.”
delete a phone or list paired phones?” Say “Delete a
5. The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface sys- phone.”
tem with voice recognition will read out the paired phones 5. After the voice guide says “Please say,” it will read out
in order of their priority, starting with the highest priority each priority number and phone name pair in order, start-
level. ing with the phone that has the highest priority level (from
6. When the voice guide has read out all phone names, it will 1 to 7). After it completes reading all pairs, the voice
say “End of List, would you like to start from the begin- guide will say “or all.”
ning?” Say the priority number of the phone that you want to
To hear the list again from the beginning , answer “Yes.” delete from the system.
When you are finished, answer “No” to return to the main If you want to delete all paired phones from the system,
5 menu. say “All.”
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say
NOTE
● If you press and release the SPEECH button and say “Removing <phone tag> (all) is this correct?”
“Continue” or “Previous” while the list is being read, the Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s). If you answer “No,”
system will advance or rewind the list. Say “Continue” to the voice guide will ask “Which phone please?” Repeat
proceed to the phone with the next highest priority level or the priority number of the phone that you want to delete
“Previous” to return to the phone with the previous prior- from the system.
ity level.

5-92
 For pleasant driving
7. When the phone deletion process is completed, the voice NOTE
guide will say “Deleted.” The system will then beep and ● For English, the system will recognise both “zero” and
the voice recognition mode will be deactivated. “oh (Letter “o”) for the number “0.” Refer to “Commands
If the phone deletion process fails for some reason, the and Alternatives” on page 5-103 for details.
voice guide will say “Delete failed.” The system will then ● The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface sys-
beep and the voice recognition mode will be deactivated. tem with voice recognition supports local phone numbers
Repeat the procedure from Step 1. with a minimum of 3 digits to a maximum of 10 digits. A
To make a call maximum of 11 digits is possible when the first digit is 0.
E00728900012
International numbers starting with 00 can have a maxi-
To use the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface sys- mum of 19 digits. Service call numbers that start with * or
# are supported with up to 5 digits after the * or #. 0 is an
tem with voice recognition to make a call, a Bluetooth® cellu- acceptable number for operator assistance.
lar phones with Hands-free Profile must be paired to the All other numbers will not be sent through the Hands-free
system. If a cellular phone has not been paired to the system, System but may be dialed directly from the phone.
do so in accordance with the instructions provided in “Pairing a
cellular phone” on page 5-89. Making a call by saying a name in the system
phonebook
Making a call by using the telephone number E00729100011
E00729000036
You can make a call by saying a name that has been registered
You can make a call by saying the telephone number.
1. Press the SPEECH button. in the phonebook for the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone 5
2. Say “Dial.” interface system with voice recognition.
3. After the voice guide says “Number Please,” say the tele- For more information on the phonebook, refer to “Phonebook
phone number. function” on page 5-96.
1. Press the SPEECH button.
The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface sys- 2. Say “Call.”
tem with voice recognition will then make the call. 3. After the voice guide says “Name Please,” say the name
When the confirmation function is on, the system will of the person that you want to call that is registered in the
confirm the telephone number again. To continue with phonebook.
that number, answer “Yes.”
To change the telephone number, answer “No” and then
say the telephone number again.

5-93
 For pleasant driving
4. If multiple telephone numbers are registered for the per- Redialling
son, the voice guide will ask “Would you like to call E00729200012

<voice tag> at {home}, {work}, {mobile} or {pager}?” You can redial the last number called, based on the history of
Say the location of the number that you want to call. dialed calls in the paired cellular phone.
Use the following procedure to redial.
NOTE 1. Press the SPEECH button.
● If a telephone number is not registered for the selected 2. Say “Redial.”
location, the voice guide will say
“{home/work/mobile/pager} not found for <voice tag>.
Would you like to add location or try again, or say “can-
cel” to return to main menu.”
Say “Try again” to redo the phone call, “Add location” to
add a new location to the telephone book, or “Cancel” to
hang up the phone.
5. After the voice guide says “Calling <voice tag> at <loca-
tion>,” the Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone inter-
face system with voice recognition will make the call.
When the confirmation function is on, the system will
confirm whether or not the name of the recipient of the
5 call is correct. Answer “Yes.” to use that name.
If you want to change the name or location to call, answer
“No.” The system will return to Step 3.

5-94
 For pleasant driving

Emergency calls Switching between hands-free mode and private

E00729300039

You can make quick calls to “112” in the event of an emer-

mode
E00730900019
gency. The simple process to call “112” is described below.
The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system
1. Press the SPEECH button.
with voice recognition can switch between Hands-free mode
2. Say “Emergency.”
(Hands-free calls) and private mode (calls using cellular
The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface sys- phone).
tem with voice recognition will automatically dial “112”. If you press the SPEECH button and say “Transfer call” during
At this time, the system will confirm whether it should a Hands-free call, you can stop the Hands-free mode and talk in
call “112”. Answer “Yes” if it is ok to call “112.” private mode.
If you answer “No”, the voice recognition mode will be To return to Hands-free mode, press the SPEECH button again
deactivated without making the call. and say “Transfer call”.
NOTE Receiving calls
● Depending on the region (country) in which the call is E00729600016
made, emergency calls may not go through. If an incoming phone call is received while the ignition switch
is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the audio system will be
SEND function automatically turned on and Incoming Call, even when the
E00729400043

During a call, press the SPEECH button to enter voice recogni- audio system was originally off.
tion mode, then say “<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF The phone ring sound will be output from the front passenger’s 5
tones. seat speaker.
For example, if you need to simulate the press of a phone but- If the CD player or radio was playing when the incoming call
ton as a response to an automated system’s prompting, press was received, the audio system will mute the sound from the
the SPEECH button and say “1 2 3 4 pound SEND”. The sys- CD player or radio and output only the Incoming Call.
tem will send the signals for 1234# via your cellular phone. To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button on the steering
wheel control switch.
When the call is over, the audio system will return to it’s previ-
ous state.

5-95
 For pleasant driving

Phonebook function New entry

E00729700017 E00729800021

The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface system You can add a new entry to the phone book by saying “New
with voice recognition has its own phonebook separate from entry” while in the Phone Book Main menu. You can register
the phonebook on the cellular phone. up to 32 entries. Use the following procedure to register a new
This phonebook is used when making calls with the voice rec- entry.
ognition function. 1. If you have not reached the limit yet, the voice guide will
You can register up to 32 names for each language in the say “Name Please.” Say your preferred name to register it.
phonebook. NOTE
Also, each entry has 4 locations associated with: HOME, ● If you have reached the limit, the voice guide will say
WORK, MOBILE and PAGER. You can register one telephone “Phone Book full. Do you want to delete a name or say
number for each location. cancel to return to Main Menu.” Say “Delete” to delete an
The Phonebook Main menu is used to register or edit informa- entry or “Cancel” to return to the main menu.
tion in the phonebook.
Use the following procedure to call up the Phonebook Main 2. After the name has been registered, the voice guide will
menu. ask “HOME, WORK, MOBILE, OR PAGER?” Tell the
1. Press the SPEECH button. location under which you want to register a number.
2. Say “Phonebook.”
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: NOTE
5 new entry, edit, list names, delete or erase all, or say can- ● In case the confirmation function is activated, the system
cel to return to main menu” and will wait for your com- will confirm the location again. To continue with the cur-
mand. rent location, answer “Yes.”
Answer “No” to return to location selection in Step 2.
NOTE If a telephone number has been registered under the
● Disconnecting the battery cable will not delete informa- selected location, the voice guide will say “The current
tion registered in the phonebook. number is <number>, number please.”
If you do not want to change the telephone number, say
the original number to keep it registered.

5-96
 For pleasant driving
3. Say the telephone number to register it. Edit
E00729900019
NOTE You can edit information in the phonebook by saying “Edit” on
● In the case of English, the system will recognise both the Phonebook Main menu.
“zero” and “oh (Letter “o”) for the number “0.” Refer to 1. The voice guide will say “Please say the name of the entry
“Commands and Alternatives” on page 5-103 for details. you would like to edit, or say “list names,” or say “cancel”
● In case the confirmation function is activated, the system to return to the main menu.” Say the name of the entry
will confirm the telephone number again. To continue that you want to edit.
with the current telephone number, answer “Yes.”
Say “No” to return to telephone number registration in NOTE
Step 3. ● If you say “List Names,” the system will read out each
4. When the telephone number has been registered, the voice name registered in the phone book every 5 seconds in
guide will say “Number stored. Would you like to add order. Refer to “Having the system tell you a list of the
another number for this entry?” phonebook entries” on page 5-97.
To add another telephone number for the current entry, but 2. The voice guide will say “Home, Work, Mobile or
under another location, answer “Yes.” The system will Pager?” Select the location for which you want to change
return to the location selection in Step 2. the telephone number.
Answer “No” to end the registration process and return to
the main menu.
NOTE
● When the confirmation function is on, the system will
confirm again the name and location to edit. To continue 5
with that information, answer “Yes.”
Answer “No” to return to Step 1.

5-97
 For pleasant driving
3. After the voice guide says “Number Please,” say the tele- Having the system tell you a list of the phonebook
phone number to register it. entries
If a telephone number has been registered for the selected E00730000023

location, the voice guide will say “The current number is You can hear a list of the names registered in the phonebook by
<current number>. New number, please.” Say a new tele- saying “List names” in the Phonebook Main menu.
phone number to change the number. 1. The Hands-free Bluetooth® cellular phone interface sys-
tem with voice recognition will read out the entries in the
NOTE phone book in order.
● When the confirmation function is on, the system will
confirm again the telephone number. To continue with that 2. When the voice guide is done reading the list, it will say
number, answer “Yes.” “End of list, would you like to start from the beginning?”
To change the telephone number, answer “No” and then If you want to check the list again from the beginning,
say the telephone number again. answer “Yes.”
4. When the telephone number change process is done, the When you are done, answer “No” to return to the main
voice guide will say “Number changed. Would you like to menu.
call this number, edit another entry, or say cancel to return NOTE
to main menu?” ● You can call, edit or delete a name that is being read out.
Say “Call” to immediately call the number, “Edit” to edit Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to call the name,
another number, or “Cancel” to end the edit process and “Edit” to edit it, or “Delete” to delete it.
5 return to the main menu. The system will beep and then execute your command.
● If you press the SPEECH button and say “Continue” or
“Previous” while the list is being read, the system will for-
ward or rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to the
next entry or “Previous” to return to the previous entry.

5-98
 For pleasant driving

Deleting a registered number 4. When the deletion of the telephone number is completed,
E00730100011 the voice guide will say “<voice tag> <location> deleted”
You can delete a telephone number in the phonebook by saying and then the system will return to the main menu.
“Delete” on the Phonebook Main menu.
1. The voice guide will say “Please say the name of the entry NOTE
you would like to delete, or say “list names,” or say “can- ● If you delete all telephone numbers registered for the 4
cel” to return to the main menu.” Say the name of the locations of an entry, the entry itself will be deleted from
entry that you want to delete. the phonebook.

NOTE Erasing the Phonebook

● If the name that you said is not in the phonebook, the E00730200012

voice guide will say “Name not found. Would you like to You can delete all registered information in the phonebook by
saying “Erase all” on the Phonebook Main menu.
try again or say “Cancel” to return to main menu?”
Say “Try again” to try again or “Cancel” to end the dele- 1. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will ask “Are
tion process and return to the main menu. you sure you want to erase everything from your phone-
book?” Answer “Yes.”
● If you say “List Names,” the system will read out each
entry registered in the phone book in order. Refer to “Hav- Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all registered infor-
ing the system tell you a list of the phonebook entries” on mation in the phonebook and return to the main menu.
2. The system will confirm one more time. Answer “Yes” to
page 5-98.
2. If there are telephone numbers registered for multiple continue.
locations for the selected name, the voice guide will say Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all registered infor- 5
mation in the phonebook and return to the main menu.
“Would you like to delete [Home,] [Work,] [Mobile,]
[Pager,] or all.” Select the location that has the telephone 3. When the deletion of all information in the phonebook is
number that you want to delete. completed, the voice guide will say “Phonebook Erased”
and then return to the main menu.
Say “All” if you want to delete the telephone numbers for
all locations.
3. The system will confirm whether it is ok to delete the tele-
phone number of the selected location. Answer “Yes” to
delete the number.
Answer “No” to cancel the deletion process and return to
Step 1.

5-99
 For pleasant driving

Voice Command Tree

E00730400027

5-100
 For pleasant driving

Voice Command Tree - Phonebook

E00730500028

5-101
 For pleasant driving

Voice Command Tree - Setup

E00730600029

5-102
 For pleasant driving

Commands and Alternatives Alternative

Command Language Primary Command
E00730700059
Commands
Alternative English Call -
Command Language Primary Command
Commands French Appeler -
English Setup - CALL Spanish Llamar -
French Configurer - Italian Chiama -
SETUP Spanish Configuración - German Anrufen -
Italian Configura - English Redial -
German Einrichtung - French Recomposer -
English Phone book - REDIAL Spanish Volver A Marcar -
French Répertoire - Italian Ricomponi -
PHONE
Spanish Agenda - German Wahlwiederholung -
BOOK
Italian Rubrica - English Emergency -
German Telefonbuch - French Numéro D’urgence -
English Dial - EMER-
Spanish Emergencia -
5
GENCY
French Composer - Italian Emergenze -
DIAL Spanish Marcar - German Notfall -
Italian Componi -
German Wählen -

5-103
 For pleasant driving

Alternative Alternative
Command Language Primary Command Command Language Primary Command
Commands Commands
English Pairing Options - English Delete A Phone -
Options De Supprimer Un
French - French -
Jumelage Téléphone
Opciones De Eliminar Un
PHONE Spanish - DELETE Spanish -
Emparejamiento Teléfono
OPTIONS A PHONE
Opzioni Di Elimina Un Eliminare Un
Italian - Italian
Assegnazione Telefono Telefono
Ankopplungsop- Ein Telefon
German Kopplungsoptionen German -
tionen Löschen
English Pair A Phone - English List Paired Phones -
Jumeler un Liste Des Télé-
French - French -
Téléphone phones Jumelés
Emparejar Un Listar Teléfonos
PAIR A Spanish - LIST Spanish -
Teléfono Emparejados
5 PHONE PAIRED
Assegna Un Assegnare un PHONES Elenca Telefoni
Italian Italian -
Telefono telefono Assegnati
Ein Telefon Auflistung der
German - Auflistung ange-
ankoppeln German angekoppelten
koppelten telefone
Telefone

5-104
 For pleasant driving

Alternative Alternative
Command Language Primary Command Command Language Primary Command
Commands Commands
English Select Phone - English Add Location -
Sélectionner Un Ajouter {Un}
French - French -
Téléphone Emplacement
SELECT ADD
Seleccionar Telé- Agregar {Una}
PHONE Spanish - LOCA- Spanish -
fono Ubicación
TION
Italian Seleziona telefono - Aggiungere {Una}
Italian -
German Telefon Auswählen - Destinazione

English Previous - German Standort hinzufügen -

French Précédent - Confirmation

English -
Prompts
PREVI- Spanish Anterior -
OUS Invites De
Italian Precedente - French -
Confirmation
Vorhergehender Mensajes De
German - CONFIR- Spanish -
Name Confirmación
MATIONS 5
English Transfer Call - Richieste Di
Italian -
French Transférer L’appel - Conferma
TRANS- Eingabeauf-
Spanish Transferir Llamada -
FER German forderungen zur -
CALL Trasferisci Chia- Bestätigung
Italian -
mata
English Language -
German Anruf weiterleiten -
French Langue -
LAN-
Spanish Idioma -
GUAGE
Italian Lingua -
German Sprache -

5-105
 For pleasant driving

Alternative Alternative
Command Language Primary Command Command Language Primary Command
Commands Commands
English New Entry - English Call This Number -
Nouvelle Inscrip- French Appeler Ce Numéro -
French -
NEW tion Llamar A Este
CALL Spanish -
ENTRY Spanish Nueva Entrada - Número
THIS
Italian Nuova Voce - NUMBER Italian Chiama Questo
-
German Neuer Eintrag - Numero

English Delete - Diese Nummer

German -
anrufen
French Supprimer -
English Edit Another Entry -
DELETE Spanish Eliminar -
Modifier Une Autre
Italian Elimina - French -
Inscription
German Löschen - EDIT
Spanish Editar Otra Entrada -
ANOTHE
English Edit - R ENTRY Italian Modifica Un’altra Modificare
5 French Modifier - Voce Un’altra Voce
EDIT Spanish Editar - Weiteren Eintrag
German -
bearbeiten
Italian Modifica -
English Try Again -
German Bearbeiten -
French Réessayer -
TRY
Spanish Intentarlo De Nuevo -
AGAIN
Italian Riprovare -
German Erneut versuchen -

5-106
 For pleasant driving

Alternative Alternative
Command Language Primary Command Command Language Primary Command
Commands Commands
English Erase All - English Work -
French Effacer Tout - French Travail, au Travail -
ERASE
Spanish Borrar Todo - Trabajo, en Su Tra-
ALL Spanish -
Italian Cancella Tutte - WORK bajo

German Alles löschen - Italian Lavoro, al Lavoro -

English List Names - Arbeit, auf der

German -
Arbeit
French Liste Des Noms -
LIST English Mobile -
Spanish Listar Nombres -
NAMES Mobile, sur Le
Italian Elenca Nomi - French -
Mobile
German Auflistung Namen - Móvil, en Su Móvil,
Spanish -
English Home - MOBILE Al Móvil
Masion, à La Cellulare, sul
Italian -
French
Maison
- Cellulare 5
HOME Handy, auf dem
Spanish Casa, en Su Casa - German -
Handy
Italian Casa, a Casa -
English Pager -
German Zuhause -
Pageur, sur Le
French -
Pageur
Spanish Busca, al Busca -
PAGER
Cercapersone, sul
Italian -
Cercapersone
Pager, auf dem
German -
Pager

5-107
 For pleasant driving

Alternative Alternative
Command Language Primary Command Command Language Primary Command
Commands Commands
English Help - English Mute -
French Aide - French Sourdine -
HELP Spanish Ayuda - Spanish Silencio -
MUTE
Italian Aiuto - Italian Disattiva Audio -
German Hilfe - Stummschaltung
German -
English Continue - Ein

French Continuer - English Mute Off -

CON- Désactiver La
Spanish Continuar - French -
TINUE Sourdine
Italian Continua -
MUTE Silencio Desacti-
German Weiter - Spanish -
OFF vado
English All - Italian Attiva Audio -
French Tous - Stummschaltung
5 ALL Spanish Todos -
German
Aus
-

Italian Tutte - English Yes -

German Alle - French Oui -
English Cancel - Yes Spanish Sí -
French Annuler - Italian Sì -
CANCEL Spanish Cancelar - German Ja -
Italian Annulla -
German Abbrechen -

5-108
 For pleasant driving

Alternative Alternative
Command Language Primary Command Command Language Primary Command
Commands Commands
English No - English Three -
French Non - French Trois -
NO Spanish No - Three Spanish Tres -
Italian No - Italian Tre -
German Nein - German Drei -
English Zero - English Four -
French Zéro - French Quatre -
Zero Spanish Cero - Four Spanish Cuatro -
Italian Zero - Italian Quattro -
German Null - German Vier -
English One - English Five -
French Un Une French Cinq -
One Spanish Uno Una Five Spanish Cinco -
5
Italian Uno Una Italian Cinque -
German Eins - German Fünf -
English Two - English Six -
French Deux - French Six -
Two Spanish Dos - Six Spanish Seis -
Italian Due - Italian Sei -
German Zwei Zwo German Sechs -

5-109
 For pleasant driving

Alternative Alternative
Command Language Primary Command Command Language Primary Command
Commands Commands
English Seven - English Hash ( # ) -
French Sept - French Dièse (#) -
Seven Spanish Siete - Pound Spanish Almohadilla ( # ) -
Italian Sette - Italian Cancelletto (#) -
German Sieben - German Raute ( # ) -
English Eight - English English -
French Huit - Spoken French Anglais -
Eight Spanish Ocho - Language Spanish Inglés -
Italian Otto - (English) Italian Inglese -
German Acht - German Englisch -
English Nine - English French -
French Neuf - Spoken French Français -
5 Nine Spanish Nueve - Language Spanish Francés -
Italian Nove - (French) Italian Francese -
German Neun - German Französisch -
English Star Asterisk ( * ) English Spanish -
French Étoile (*) - Spoken French Espagnol -
Star Spanish Asterisco ( * ) - Language Spanish Español -
Italian Asterisco (*) - (Spanish) Italian Spagnolo -
German Stern ( * ) - German Spanisch -

5-110
 For pleasant driving

Alternative Alternative
Command Language Primary Command Command Language Primary Command
Commands Commands
English Italian - English Phone book Edit -

Spoken French Italien - French Répertoire Modifier -

Language Spanish Italiano - PHONE Spanish Agenda - Editar -
(Italian) Italian Italiano - BOOK Modifica Nella
EDIT Italian -
German Italienisch - Rubrica

English German - Telefonbuch bear-

German -
beiten
Spoken French Allemand -
English Phone book Delete -
Language Spanish Alemán -
(German) Répertoire
Italian Tedesco - French -
PHONE Supprimer
German Deutsch - BOOK Spanish Agenda - Eliminar -
Phone book New DELETE Elimina Dalla
English - Italian -
Entry Rubrica
Répertoire Nouv- German Löschen - 5
French -
PHONE elle Inscription
BOOK Agenda - Nueva
Spanish -
NEW Entrada
ENTRY Nuova Voce Della
Italian -
Rubrica
Neuer Eintrag ins
German -
Telefonbuch

5-111
 For pleasant driving

Alternative Alternative
Command Language Primary Command Command Language Primary Command
Commands Commands
Phone book Erase Setup Confirmation
English - English -
All Prompts
Répertoire Effacer Configurer Les
French -
Tout French Invites De -
PHONE Confirmation
Agenda - Borrar
BOOK Spanish -
Todo Configurar
ERASE SETUP
Cancella Tutte Spanish Mensajes De -
ALL Italian - CONFIR-
Dalla Rubrica Confirmación
MATIONS
Alle Telefon- Configura Richi-
Italian -
German bucheinträge - este Di Conferma
Löschen Einrichtung Der
Phone book List Eingabeauf-
English - German -
Names forderungen Zur
Bestätigung
French Liste Des Noms -
English Setup Select Phone -
5 PHONE
Agenda-listar Nom-
BOOK Spanish - Configurer
bres
LIST French Sélectionner Un -
NAMES Elenca Nomi Della Téléphone
Italian -
Rubrica SETUP
Configurar Selec-
Auflistung Tele- SELECT Spanish -
German - ción De Teléfono
fonebuchnamen PHONE
Configura Selezione
Italian -
Telefono
Einrichtung Der
German -
Telefonauswahl

5-112
 For pleasant driving

Alternative Alternative
Command Language Primary Command Command Language Primary Command
Commands Commands
Setup Pairing English Setup Language -
English -
Options Configurer La
SETUP French -
Configurer Les Langue
French Options De - LAN-
Spanish Configurar Idioma -
Jumelage GUAGE
SETUP Italian Configura Lingua -
Configurar
PHONE German Einrichtung Sprache -
Spanish Opciones De -
PAIRING
Emparejamiento English Setup Password -
Configura Opzioni French Configurer Le PIN -
Italian -
Di Assegnazione
Configurar Con-
Einrichtung Ankop- SETUP Spanish -
German - traseña
plungsoptionen PASS-
WORD Configura Codice
English Delete A Name - Italian -
Di Accesso
French Supprimer Un Nom - Einrichtung
Eliminar Un
German
Passwort
- 5
DELETE Spanish -
Nombre English Voice Training -
A NAME
Italian Eliminare Un Nome - Entraînement À La
French -
Einen Namen VOICE Parole
German -
Löschen TRAIN- Spanish Aprendizaje De Voz -
ING Addestramento
Italian -
Vocale
German Stimmtraining -

5-113
 For pleasant driving

Alternative Alternative
Command Language Primary Command Command Language Primary Command
Commands Commands
English Password - English Join Calls -
French PIN - French Intégrer L’appel -
PASS-
Spanish Contraseña - JOIN Spanish Unir Llamadas -
WORD
Italian Codice Di Accesso - CALLS Italian Unisci Chiamate -
German Passwort - Konferenzgespräch
German -
English Retrain - Herstellen

Refaire L’entraîne- English <digits> Send -

French -
ment French <digits> Envoyer -
RETRAIN Spanish Volver A Educar - SEND Spanish <digits> Enviar -
Ripetere Italian <digits> Invia -
Italian -
{L’}addestramento German <digits> Senden -
German Erneut Trainieren -
5 English Enable -
French Activer L’activer
ENABLE Spanish Activar -
Italian Attivare -
German Aktivieren -
English Disable -
French Désactiver -
DISABLE Spanish Desactivar -
Italian Disattivare -
German Deaktivieren -

5-114
 For pleasant driving

Enrolment Commands
E00732400050

# = “Hash” # = “Diése” # = “Cancelletto” # = “Raute” # = “Almohadilla”

* = “Star” * = “Étoile” * = “Asterisco” * = “Stern” * = “Asterisco”

Phrase # English French Italian German Spanish

1 # 790 # 790 # 790 # 790 # 790
2 * 671 * 671 * 671 * 671 * 671
3 212 - 4903 212 - 4903 212 - 4903 212 - 4903 212 - 4903
4 235 - 3494 235 - 3494 235 - 3494 235 - 3494 235 - 3494
5 315- 5657 315- 5657 315- 5657 315- 5657 315- 5657
6 456 - 7930 456 - 7930 456 - 7930 456 - 7930 456 - 7930
7 793 - 5462 793 - 5462 793 - 5462 793 - 5462 793 - 5462
8 794 - 1826 794 - 1826 794 - 1826 794 - 1826 794 - 1826
9 826 - 3145 826 - 3145 826 - 3145 826 - 3145 826 - 3145
10 962 - 7305 962 - 7305 962 - 7305 962 - 7305 962 - 7305
5
11 (531) 742 - 9860 (531) 742 - 9860 (531) 742 - 9860 (531) 742 - 9860 (531) 742 - 9860
12 (632) 807 - 4591 (632) 807 - 4591 (632) 807 - 4591 (632) 807 - 4591 (632) 807 - 4591
13 (800) 222 - 5015 (800) 222 - 5015 (800) 222 - 5015 (800) 222 - 5015 (800) 222 - 5015
14 (888) 555 - 1212 (888) 555 - 1212 (888) 555 - 1212 (888) 555 - 1212 (888) 555 - 1212
15 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789
16 55 66 77 88 99 55 66 77 88 99 55 66 77 88 99 55 66 77 88 99 55 66 77 88 99
17 44 33 22 11 00 44 33 22 11 00 44 33 22 11 00 44 33 22 11 00 44 33 22 11 00
18 Call 293 - 5804 Appeler 293 - 5804 Chiama 293 - 5804 Anrufen 293 - 5804 Llamar 293 - 5804

5-115
 For pleasant driving

Phrase # English French Italian German Spanish

19 Call * 350 Appeler * 350 Chiama * 350 Anrufen * 350 Llamar * 350
Call 1 Appeler 1 Chiama 1 Anrufen 1 Llamar 1
20
(234) 567 - 8901 (234) 567 - 8901 (234) 567 - 8901 (234) 567 - 8901 (234) 567 - 8901
21 Dial 639 - 1542 Composer 639 - 1542 Componi 639 - 1542 Wählen 639 - 1542 Marcar 639 -1542
22 Dial # 780 Composer # 780 Componi # 780 Wählen # 780 Marcar # 780
Dial Composer Componi Wählen Marcar
23
(987) 654 - 3210 (987) 654 - 3210 (987) 654 - 3210 (987) 654 - 3210 (987) 654 - 3210
24 1058# 3794# Send 1058# 3794# Envoyer 1058# 3794# Invia 1058# 3794# Senden 1058# 3794# Enviar
25 27643# 4321# Send 27643# 4321# Envoyer 27643# 4321# Invia 27643# 4321# Senden 27643# 4321# Enviar
26 Cancel Annuler Annulla Abbrechen Cancelar
27 Continue Continuer Continua Weiter Continuar
28 Emergency Numéro d’urgence Emergenze Notfall Emergencia
29 Erase All Effacer tout Cancella tutte Alles löschen Borrar Todo
5 30 Help Aide Aiuto Hilfe Ayuda
Home, Work, Mobile, Maison, Travail, Casa, Lavoro, Cellu- Zuhause, Arbeit, Casa, Trabajo, Móvil,
31
Pager Mobile, Pageur lare, Cercapersone Handy, Pager Busca
32 List Names Liste des noms Elenca nomi Auflistung Namen Listar nobres
33 No Non No Nein No
34 Phone book: Delete Répertoire: Supprimer Elimina dalla rubrica Telefonbuch: löschen Agenda - eliminar
Répertoire: Nouvelle Nuova voce della Neuer Eintrag ins Tele-
35 Phone book: New Entry Agenda - nueva entrada
inscription rubrica fonbuch
36 Previous Précédent Precedente Vorhergehender Name Anterior

5-116
 For pleasant driving

Phrase # English French Italian German Spanish

Répertoire: Cancella tutte dalla Alle Telefon-
37 Phone book: Erase All Agenda - borrar todo
Effacer tout rubrica bucheinträge löschen
38 Redial Recomposer Ricomponi Wahlwiederholung Volver a marcar
Ripetere l’addestra-
39 Retrain Refaire I’entraînement Erneut trainieren Volver a educar
mento
Einrichtung der
Setup Confirmation Configurer les invites Configura richieste di Configurar mensajes de
40 Eingabeaufforderun-
Prompts de confirmation conferma confirmación
gen zur Bestätigung
41 Setup Language Configurer la langue Configura lingua Einrichtung: Sprache Configurar idioma
Configurer les options Configura opzioni di Einrichtung: Ankop- Configurar opciones de
42 Setup Pairing Options
de jumelage assegnzione plungsoptionen emparejamiento
43 Pair A Phone Jumeler un téléphone Assegna un telefono Ein Telefon ankoppeln Emparejar un teléfono
44 Transfer Call Transférer l’appel Trasferisci chiamata Anruf weiterleiten Transferir llamada
45 Yes Oui Sí Ja Sí
5

5-117
 For pleasant driving

Sun visors Card holder

E00711200765 Cards can be slipped into the front (A) of the vanity mirror lid.

1- To eliminate front glare

2- To eliminate side glare
5

5-118
 For pleasant driving

Vanity mirror Accessory socket

E00711300548 E00711600730

The vanity mirrors are located on the back of the sun visor.
! CAUTION
● Ensure you use a “plug-in” type accessory that oper-
ates at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
When using more than one socket at the same time,
make sure that the electrical accessories are 12 V
accessories and that their total power consumption
does not exceed 120 W.
● Prolonged use of the electrical appliance without
running the engine may run down the battery.
● When the accessory socket is not in use, make sure
you close the cap as the socket may become clogged
by foreign material and short-circuit.

To use a plug-in type accessory, open the lid or remove the cap,
and insert the plug in the accessory socket.
5
NOTE
● Accessory sockets in 3 locations can be used at the same
time.

5-119
 For pleasant driving
The accessory socket are operational with the ignition switch
in either the “ON” or “ACC” position. Floor console box

Floor console

Luggage area

5-120
 For pleasant driving

Interior lamps NOTE

E00712000526 ● If you leave the lamps on without running the engine, you
will run down the battery.
Before you leave the vehicle, ensure that all lamps are
switched off.
1 2 3 Room lamps
E00712100875

Front

5
4

1- (DOOR)
1- Luggage room lamp The lamp illuminates when a door or the tailgate is opened. After
2- Room lamp (rear) the door or tailgate is closed the lamp will dim for about 15 sec-
onds before going out.
3- Map & room lamps (front)
However, the lamp immediately goes out in the following cases:
4- Foot lamps*→ P. 8-62
· When the doors and the tailgate are closed and the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
· When the doors and the tailgate are closed and the central door
lock function is used to lock the vehicle.

5-121
 For pleasant driving

· When the remote control switch (on vehicles with keyless

entry system) of the key is used to lock the vehicle. Rear
· When the remote control switch (on vehicles with keyless
operation system) of the KOS key is used to lock the vehicle.
NOTE
● If the key is removed from the ignition switch with doors
and tailgate closed, the lamp illuminates and after about
15 seconds it goes out.
● If the keyless operation function was used to start the
engine and the ignition switch is turned to “LOCK” with
the doors and tailgate closed, the lamp illuminates and
then goes out after about 15 seconds.
● The time until the lamp goes out can be customised. For
details, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ised Service Point. For vehicles equipped with the HDD 1- (ON)
navigation Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System
The lamp turns on regardless of whether the doors and tailgate
(MMCS), adjustments can be made via the centre display are open or closed.
menus. For details, refer to the separate owner’s manual.
2- (●)
5 2- (OFF)
The lamp illuminates when a door or the tailgate is opened. After
The lamp stays off regardless of whether the doors and tailgate
the door or tailgate is closed the lamp will dim for about 15 sec-
are open or closed. onds before going out.
However, the lamp immediately goes out in the following cases:
· When the doors and the tailgate are closed and the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
· When the doors and the tailgate are closed and the central door
lock function is used to lock the vehicle.
· When the remote control switch (on vehicles with keyless
entry system) of the key is used to lock the vehicle.
· When the remote control switch (on vehicles with keyless
operation system) of the KOS key is used to lock the vehicle.

5-122
 For pleasant driving

NOTE Map lamps

● If the key is removed from the ignition switch with doors E00712400041

and tailgate closed, the lamp illuminates and after about Push the lens (A) to turn on the lamp. Push it again to turn it
15 seconds it goes out. off.
● If the keyless operation function was used to start the
engine and the ignition switch is turned to “LOCK” with
the doors and tailgate closed, the lamp illuminates and
then goes out after about 15 seconds.
● When the room lamp switch is in the “ON” position, the
lamp will not go out after all doors and tailgate are closed.
● The time until the lamp goes out can be customised. For
details, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ised Service Point. For vehicles equipped with the HDD
navigation Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System
(MMCS), adjustments can be made via the centre display
menus. For details, refer to the separate owner’s manual.
3- (OFF)
The lamp stays off regardless of whether the doors and tailgate
are open or closed.
5

5-123
 For pleasant driving

Luggage room lamp Lamps (room lamps, etc.) auto-cutout function

E00712700275 E00712900424

If any of the interior lamps are left switched on with the igni-
tion switch in any position other than “ON” or “ACC”, it goes
off automatically after approximately 30 minutes to prevent
complete discharge of the battery.
The interior lamps will illuminate again if the ignition switch is
set to the “ON” or “ACC” position, if one of the doors or the
tailgate is opened and closed, or if the keyless entry system or
keyless operation system is operated.
NOTE
● The interior lamp auto-cut function can be deactivated.
For details and support, consult your nearest
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
For vehicles equipped with the HDD navigation Mitsubi-
shi Multi-Communication System (MMCS), adjustments
can be made using screen operations. For details, refer to
1- (ON) the separate owner’s manual.
The lamp turns on regardless of whether the tailgate is open or
5 closed.
2- (●)
The lamp turns on when the tailgate is opened and goes out when
the tailgate is closed.
3- (OFF)
The lamp stays off regardless of whether the tailgate is open or
closed.

5-124
 For pleasant driving

Storage spaces
E00713100973

! CAUTION
● Never leave lighters, cans of carbonated drink and
glasses in the cabin when parking the vehicle in
direct sunlight. The cabin will become extremely
hot, lighters or other flammable items may ignite
and unopened drink cans (including beer cans) may
rupture. Also, glasses with plastic lenses or materials
could deform or crack.
● Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while driving
the vehicle. The lid or the contents of a storage space
could otherwise cause injuries.
1- Quarter trim box*
NOTE 2- Personal box
● When leaving your vehicle, do not leave valuables in the 3- Sunglasses holder*
storage spaces. 4- Upper instrument panel box
5- Upper glove box 5
6- Luggage floor box*
7- Floor console box
8- Lower glove box

5-125
 For pleasant driving

Upper glove box To use the warming and cooling function*

E00726100065 The upper glove box can be used to keep its contents (e.g.
Press the button (A) and lift the lid to open. drink bottles) warm or cool with hot or cold air from the air
To close, pull down the lid. conditioning system.
1. Turn the dial in the upper glove box to the “ ” position.
Turn the dial to the “ ” position when not using the
warming and cooling function.

5-126
 For pleasant driving
2. Turn the air conditioning temperature control dial (A) to
the desired temperature. ! CAUTION
3. Turn the air conditioning blower speed selection dial (B) ● When the vehicle is subjected to strong direct sun-
to the desired air flow. light, the temperature inside the vehicle becomes
very high. Therefore, do not leave carbonated bever-
ages in cans or bottles in the vehicle.
The cans or bottles holding the carbonated drinks
could burst. When placing drinks in the glove box,
read the precautions on the container first.

NOTE
● The upper glove box will have the same temperature as
the air that comes out of the air conditioning ventilators. It
is therefore impossible to heat or cool the contents signifi-
cantly.
For efficient warming or cooling, select the “ ” mode.
Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page5-4.
● Do not place chocolate, sweets, or other items susceptible
For detailed information on how to use the air condition- to temperature changes or to rot in the upper glove box. 5
ing, refer to “Automatic air conditioning” on page 5-7.

5-127
 For pleasant driving

Lower glove box Pen holder

E00726200066 There is a pen holder inside the lower glove box.
If the vehicle is equipped with key cylinders, the lower glove
box can be locked and unlocked using the key.

NOTE
● There is a limit to the size of pens that can be stored in the
5 1. To lock holder. Forcibly inserting large pens could damage the
2. To unlock holder.
3. To open, pull the lid (A).
NOTE
● If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless operation sys-
tem, the lower glove box can be locked or unlocked with
the emergency key.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 1-28
● When the vehicle’s lights are illuminated with the lamp
switch in the “AUTO” position, in the “ ” or “ ”
position, the glove box lamp will illuminate.

5-128
 For pleasant driving

Card holder Floor console box

There is a card holder inside the lower glove box. E00723300330

Upper and lower boxes are located inside the floor console
box.
The floor console box can also be used as an arm rest.

1 2

NOTE
● Up to two cards can be inserted here.
5
1- Upper box
2- Lower box

5-129
 For pleasant driving

Upper box Lower box

To open the upper box, lift the right release lever (A) and raise To open the lower box, lift the left release lever (B) and raise
the lid. the lid.

5-130
 For pleasant driving

Upper instrument panel box Personal box

E00726300012 E00718000313

Press the centre front of the lid until it clicks, and then open. Pull the lid to open.
To close, push until the lid clicks into place.

5-131
 For pleasant driving

Sunglasses holder* Quarter trim box*

E00718600159 E00730800018

Push the lid to open. The box for storing articles is located inside the luggage com-
To close, push until it locks. partment.

5 1- To close
! CAUTION 2- To open
● Sunglasses should not be put into or taken out of the
holder while the vehicle is in motion.
Your eyes could be drawn away from the road and
collisions could easily happen.
● The holder should not be used to store anything
heavier than sunglasses. These objects could drop
out.

NOTE
● Some sunglasses may not fit in the holder, so check before
using it.
5-132
 For pleasant driving

Luggage floor box* Cup holder

E00718700293 E00714500381
The box for storing articles is located inside the luggage com-
partment.
To use the box, raise the luggage floor board.
! CAUTION
● Do not drink beverages while driving. This is dis-
tracting and could cause an accident.

For the driver’s seat

There is a built-in cup holder in the instrument panel on the
driver’s side.
Pressing the centre of the lid causes the tray to pop out a little.
Pull it out completely for use.

NOTE
● When not using the holder, push the holder to stow it
away.

5-133
 For pleasant driving

For the front seat For the second seat

The cup holder is located in front of the floor console box. E00716900305

1. Allow the armrest to drop down.

5-134
 For pleasant driving
2. Open the lid (A) while holding the side face of the lid with Bottle holder
your hand. E00718200083

! CAUTION
● Do not drink beverages while driving. This is dis-
tracting and could cause an accident.
● Drinks could be spilled by the vibration and jolts
while driving. If the spilt drink is very hot, you could
be burnt.

NOTE
● Tightly close the cap on drink bottles before storing them.
● Some bottles may be too big or the wrong shape to fit in
the holder.

5-135
 For pleasant driving

For the front seat For the second seat

There are bottle holders located on both sides. There are bottle holders located on both sides.

5-136
 For pleasant driving

Cargo area cover* To change

E00715500333 There are 2 installation holes (B) for the cargo area cover.
To use
1. Draw out the spring-loaded cover and insert it in the
mounting grooves (A).

2. Remove the cover from the mounting grooves. The cover

will automatically wind up.
NOTE
● Do not put luggage on the cargo area cover.

5-137
 For pleasant driving
1. Move one of the sliders (C) toward the inside of the vehi- To remove
cle, and fit the tab (D) into the installation hole that is to 1. Wind up the cargo area cover.
be used. Move the opposite slider in the same fashion. 2. Move one of the sliders (C) toward the inside of the vehi-
cle and lift it to remove the cargo area cover.

2. After changing the position, gently shake the cargo area

5 cover to make sure it is securely retained. To fit the cargo area cover, follow the removal steps in reverse.
Gently shake the cargo cover after fitting to make sure it is
NOTE securely retained.
● If the rear seat seatbacks contact the cargo area cover,
move back the cargo area cover.
If the cover touches the seatback of the rear seat, it could
break.

5-138
 For pleasant driving

Assist grips Coat hook

E00732800038 E00725600119

The assist grips (located above the doors on the headliner) are There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist grip of the driver’s
not designed to support full body weight. They are intended for side.
use only while seated in the vehicle.

5
! WARNING
! CAUTION ● Do not put a hanger or any heavy or pointed object
● Do not use the assist grips for getting into or out of on the coat hook. If the curtain air bag were to be
the vehicle. The assist grips could detach causing activated, any such item could be propelled away
you to fall. with great force and could prevent the curtain air
bag from inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
on the coat hook (without using a hanger). Make
sure there are no heavy or sharp objects in the pock-
ets of clothes that you hang on the coat hook.

5-139
 For pleasant driving

Luggage hooks
E00715700292

There are 4 hooks located on the floor and side walls of the
luggage area.
Use the hooks on the floor for securing the luggage.

5
! CAUTION
● Do not pile up the luggage beyond the seatback
height. Also, firmly secure the luggage.
Otherwise, serious accidents could result due to hin-
dered rearward view or flying objects during sud-
den braking.

5-140
For emergencies

If the vehicle breaks down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 2

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 2
Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 7
Bleeding the fuel system (2200 models) . . . . . . . .6- 10
Draining water from the fuel filter
(2200 models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 11
Tools and jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 14
How to change a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 17
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 37
Operation under adverse driving conditions . . . . .6- 43

6
 For emergencies

If the vehicle breaks down Emergency starting

E00800100563 E00800501304

If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move it to the shoulder If the engine cannot be started because the battery is weak or
and use the hazard warning flashers. dead, the battery from another vehicle can be used with jumper
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on page 3-69. cables to start the engine.
If the engine stops/fails
Vehicle operation and control are affected if the engine stops. ! WARNING
Before moving the vehicle to a safe area be aware of the fol- ● To start the engine using jumper cables connected to
lowing: another vehicle, perform the correct procedures
● The brake booster becomes inoperative and the pedal according to the instructions below. Incorrect proce-
effort will increase. Press down the brake pedal harder dures could result in a fire, explosion and damage to
than usual. the vehicles.
● Since the power steering pump is no longer operative, the
steering wheel feels heavy when turning it. Turn the wheel
with more effort than usual. ! CAUTION
● Do not attempt to start the engine by pulling or
pushing the vehicle.
It could damage your vehicle.
● Always wear protective eye goggles when working
near the battery.
● Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
6

6-2
 For emergencies
1. Position the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but make sure the vehicles do not touch. 4. Ensure the battery electrolyte is at the proper level.
Refer to “Battery” on page 8-14.
! CAUTION
● Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12 V battery.
! WARNING
If the other system is not 12 V, shorting could dam- ● If the electrolyte fluid is not visible or appears to be
age both vehicles. frozen, Do Not Attempt Jump Starting!
A battery might rupture or explode if the tempera-
ture is below freezing point or if it is not filled to the
2. Apply the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. In case of proper level.
vehicles with manual transmission shift into the “N”
(Neutral) position, for vehicles with A/T or CVT put the
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position. Turn off the
ignition switch.

! WARNING
● Turn off the ignition on both vehicles beforehand.
Ensure that neither cables nor your clothes can be
caught in the fan or drive belt. Otherwise, personal
injury could result.

3. Turn off all lamps, the heater and other electrical loads. 6

6-3
 For emergencies
5. On diesel-powered vehicles, remove the engine cover. [2200 models]
[2000 models] Lift up the front of the engine cover to release the 4 grom-
Lift up the front of the engine cover to release the 3 grom- mets (A) and remove the cover.
mets (A). Then, pull the engine cover towards you to
release the grommet (B) and remove the cover.

6. Connect one end of one jumper cable to the positive (+)

terminal of the discharged battery (C), and the other end to
the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery (D).
6

6-4
 For emergencies
Diesel-powered vehicles
Petrol-powered vehicles
2000 models
2400 models

2200 models
3000 models

6-5
 For emergencies
7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery, let
(-) terminal of the booster battery, and the other end to the the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine of
engine block of the vehicle with the discharged battery at the vehicle with the discharged battery.
the point farthest from the battery.
! CAUTION
! WARNING ● Keep the engine of the assisting vehicle running.
● Make sure you observe the following order when
connecting the cables: → → → 9. After the engine of the other vehicle has started, discon-
● Ensure the connection is made to the designated nect the cables in the reverse order. Keep the engine run-
position (shown in the illustration). If the connection ning for several minutes.
is made directly to the negative (-) terminal of the
battery, the inflammable gases generated in the bat-
tery might catch fire and explode.
! WARNING
● When connecting the jumper cable, do not connect ● If the battery has to be charged while fitted in the
the positive (+) cable to the negative (-) terminal. vehicle, disconnect the vehicle side negative (-) ter-
Otherwise sparks might cause the battery to minal of the battery.
explode. ● Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from the
battery as it could explode.
● Ensure there is adequate ventilation when charging
or using the battery in an enclosed space.
! CAUTION ● Remove all caps before charging the battery.
6 ● Ensure the jumper cable does not get caught in the ● Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric acid.
cooling fan or other rotating parts in the engine If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into contact with
compartment. your hands, eyes, clothes or the painted surface of
● Use the proper cables suitable for the battery size to your vehicle, flush thoroughly with water at once. If
prevent overheating of the cables. electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush them with water
● Check the jumper cables for damage and corrosion immediately and thoroughly, and seek prompt medi-
before use. cal attention.

6-6
 For emergencies

NOTE Engine overheating

● If the vehicle is driven off without fully charging the bat- E00800601392
tery, the engine might not run smoothly and the anti-lock When the engine is overheating, the multi-information display
brake warning lamp might illuminate. will interrupt the information screen and switch to the engine
Refer to “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” on page 4-58. coolant temperature warning display. The screen will then
change to the engine coolant temperature display screen and
“ ” will flash.
If this occurs, take the following corrective measures:
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Check whether steam is coming from the engine compart-
ment.
[If steam is not coming from the engine compartment]
With the engine still running, raise the bonnet to ventilate
the engine compartment.
[If steam is coming from the engine compartment]
Stop the engine, and when the steam stops, raise the bon-
net to ventilate the engine compartment. Restart the
engine.

6-7
 For emergencies
3. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not
! WARNING turning, stop the engine immediately and have it checked.
● Do not open the bonnet while steam is coming from
the engine compartment. Doing so could cause Petrol-powered vehicles
steam or hot water to spurt out, resulting in burns.
Hot water could spurt out even when no steam is
coming out, and some parts will be very hot. Be very
careful when opening the bonnet.
● Be careful of hot steam, which could cause the cap of
the coolant reservoir to blow off.
● Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap (petrol-
powered vehicles) or coolant reserve tank cap (die-
sel-powered vehicles) while the engine is hot.

Diesel-powered vehicles

6-8
 For emergencies
5. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank (A).
A- Radiator fan
B- Radiator cap Petrol-powered vehicles
C- Reserve tank cap
* : Front of the vehicle

! WARNING
● Be careful not to get your hands or clothes caught in FULL
the cooling fan.
LOW
4. When the bar graph in the engine coolant temperature
warning display in the multi-information drops, stop the
engine.

Diesel-powered vehicles

FULL 6
LOW

6-9
 For emergencies

! WARNING Bleeding the fuel system (2200 models)

E00800700208
● If there is none, ensure the engine has cooled down If the vehicle has run out of fuel while driving, the fuel system
before removing the radiator cap (B) (petrol-pow- requires bleeding to remove air as described below
ered vehicles) or reserve tank cap (C) (diesel-pow-
ered vehicles), otherwise hot steam or boiling water 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and keep it
will gush out of the filler port and may scald you. in the position for 1 minute, then return it to the “LOCK”
position. Repeat this operation once or twice.
2. Turn the ignition switch to “START” and keep it in this
6. Fill the reserve tank with coolant as needed. (Refer to the position for 10 to 20 seconds to start the engine.
“Maintenance” section.)
NOTE
! CAUTION ● If the engine does not start, repeat from procedure 1.
● After refuelling, it may take more time to start the engine,
● Do not add coolant while the engine is hot. Suddenly
but after driving a while starting will be normal.
adding cold coolant could damage the engine. Wait
for the engine to cool down, then add coolant a little
at a time.

7. Examine the radiator hoses for coolant leakage and the

drive belt for looseness or damage.
If there is anything wrong with the cooling system or
6 drive belt, we recommend you have it checked and
repaired.

6-10
 For emergencies

Draining water from the fuel filter 3. Shift the duct (C) to the front of the vehicle.
(2200 models)
E00800800225

If the fuel filter indicator symbol in the instrument panel illu-

minates during driving, a large amount of water has accumu-
lated in the fuel filter. If this occurs, drain the water as
described below.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Remove the two clips (A) and the two clamps (B).

6-11
 For emergencies
4. Take out the duct (C) after removing the air cleaner filter 5. Locate the fuel filter (E).
(D).

6-12
 For emergencies
6. Loosen the plug (G) at the fuel filter (E) with a hexagonal 8. Install the air cleaner filter and put the cover back on in its
wrench (5 mm). original position.
Loosening the plug forces the water out through the drain
pipe (F). Put a tray under the drain pipe (F) to prevent any NOTE
of the drained water from getting on the vehicle. ● After installing the air cleaner filter, make sure that the
hinges at the bottom of the cover are firmly set.

! CAUTION 9. Put the duct back in its original position.

● Be sure to carefully clean away any water drained
10. Bleed the fuel system to remove air. (Refer to “Bleeding 6
the fuel system” on page 6-10)
out because fuel traces mixed with the water could
ignite and cause a fire.

NOTE
● Up to XX cc will drain.
7. Tighten the plug (G) when water comes out no longer.

6-13
 For emergencies
11. Check to be sure that the fuel filter indicator display lights Tools and jack
when the ignition switch is turned to “ON”, and that it E00800900633
goes off as soon as the engine has started. If in doubt, we
recommend you to consult a specialist for necessary infor- Storage
mation. The tools and jack are stowed on the right side of the luggage
area.
The storage location of the tools and jack should be remem-
bered in case of an emergency.

! CAUTION
6 ● Do not smoke or allow any other open flame near
the vehicle while bleeding the fuel system. 1- Jack
2- Tools

6-14
 For emergencies

Tools Jack
To remove
1. Turn the knob (A) anticlockwise and remove the lid (B).

1- Tool case
2- Wheel nut wrench
3- Jack bar
4- Towing hook

6-15
 For emergencies
2. Remove the fastening band (C) and remove the tools. 3. Retract the jack and remove it from its installation fitting
(D).

To retract

6-16
 For emergencies

To store How to change a tyre

1. Retract the jack, then return it to its original position. E00801201630

2. Extend the jack and firmly secure it. Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehicle in a safe, flat
location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable, firm ground without
loose pebbles etc.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. On vehicles with M/T, turn the ignition switch to the
To retract “LOCK” position and move the gearshift lever to the “R”
(Reverse) position.
On vehicles with A/T or CVT, move the selector lever to
the “P” (PARK) position and turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position.
To extend 4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a warning triangle,
flashing signal lamp, etc., at an adequate distance from the
vehicle, and have all your passengers leave the vehicle.
NOTE
3. Return the tools to the tool bag, return it to its original ● The warning triangle and flashing signal lamp does not
position, and firmly fasten with the fastening band. come with your vehicle. It is recommended that you keep
one in the vehicle for use if needed.
4. Install the lid and turn the knob clockwise.
6

6-17
 For emergencies
5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is raised on the 6. Get the jack bar and wheel nut wrench ready.
jack, place chocks or blocks (A) in front and behind the Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 6-14.
tyre diagonally opposite the tyre (B) you are changing.

! WARNING
● Ensure you place a chock against the correct tyre
before jacking up the vehicle. If the vehicle moves
6 while jacked up, the jack could slip out of position
and cause an accident.

NOTE
● The chocks shown in the illustration does not come with
your vehicle. It is recommended that you keep one in the
vehicle for use if needed.
● If chocks are not available, use a stone or any other object
that is large enough to hold the wheel in position.

6-18
 For emergencies

Spare wheel information Compact spare wheel*

E00803600136 The compact spare wheel is stored beneath the floor of the lug-
Check the air pressure of the spare tyre frequently and ensure it gage area. It is designed to save space in the luggage area and
is ready for emergency use at any time. its light weight makes it easy to handle in the event of a flat
tyre.
Maintaining the spare wheel at the highest specified air pres-
sure will ensure it can always be used under any conditions
(city/high-speed driving, varying load, weight, etc.). ! CAUTION
The spare wheel is stored beneath the floor of the luggage area. ● The compact spare wheel is for temporary use only
and should be removed as soon as the original wheel
! CAUTION can be repaired or replaced.
● The vehicle must not be driven at speeds in excess of
● The pressure should be periodically checked and 80 km/h (50 mph) while using the compact spare
maintained at the specified pressure while the tyre is wheel.
stowed. ● The compact spare tyre is not as good as a standard
Driving with an insufficient tyre pressure can lead to spare tyre in terms of controllability and stability.
an accident. If you have no choice but to drive with When the compact spare wheel is mounted, avoid
an insufficient tyre pressure, keep your speed down quick starts, sudden braking and sharp steering.
and inflate the tyre to the correct pressure as soon as ● The compact spare wheel is specifically designed for
possible. (Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on your vehicle and should not be used on any other
page 8-18.) vehicle.
● When the tread wear indicator becomes visible, the
tyre must be replaced. 6
Refer to “Wheel condition” on page 8-19.

6-19
 For emergencies

! CAUTION ! CAUTION
● Do not use a tyre chain on your compact spare ● Installation of the compact spare wheel slightly low-
wheel. Due to the smaller tyre size, a tyre chain will ers the overall vehicle height since the tyre is smaller
not fit properly. This could damage the wheel and in diameter than the standard tyre.
result in the loss of the chain. Therefore, be careful when passing over bumps in
If a front tyre becomes flat when using tyre chains, the road, to avoid damage to the vehicle’s undercar-
first replace a rear wheel with the compact spare riage.
wheel and then use the removed rear wheel to ● Do not install more than one compact spare wheel at
replace the flat front wheel so that you can continue the same time.
using the chains.

6-20
 For emergencies

To remove the spare wheel 2. Loosen the tyre hanger installation bolt by turning it anti-
E00803500047 clockwise with the wheel nut wrench.
On vehicles with a compact spare wheel
1. Open the tailgate and remove the tyre hanger installation
bolt covers (A) with the jack bar.
Refer to “Tailgate: To open” on page 1-49.

! CAUTION
● Be careful when loosening the tyre hanger installa-
tion bolt. If you loosen it too far, the hook may come
off, causing the compact spare wheel to fall.
6
3. Raise the lower gate until it locks properly in position
with a click.
Refer to “Tailgate: To open” on page 1-49.

6-21
 For emergencies
4. Lift up the tyre hanger (B) at the section indicated by the NOTE
arrow in the diagram, remove it from the hook (C), lower ● Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body near the jack.
it, and then take the tyre off the tyre hanger. This makes it safer if the jack slips out of position.

! CAUTION
● When separating the tyre hanger from the hook or
hanging it back on the hook, hold the tyre hanger
6 carefully so that it does not drop on your feet.

6-22
 For emergencies

On vehicles with a standard spare wheel 2. Insert the wheel nut wrench in the hole and lower the
1. Open the tailgate and remove the cover (A) with the jack standard spare wheel by turning anticlockwise.
bar.
Refer to “Tailgate: To open” on page 1-49.

3. Raise the lower gate until it locks properly in position

with a click.
Refer to “Tailgate: To open” on page 1-49.

6-23
 For emergencies
4. Remove the chain from the spare tyre hanger. 5. Separate the standard spare wheel from the spare tyre
hanger.

6-24
 For emergencies

To change a tyre 2. Place the jack under one of the jacking points (A) shown
E00803200145 in the illustration. Use the jacking point closest to the tyre
1. If a wheel cover is installed, first remove the cover. (Refer you wish to change.
to “Wheel covers”.)
Then loosen the wheel nuts a quarter turn with the wheel
nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.

! WARNING
● Set the jack only at the positions shown here. If the
jack is set at a wrong position, it could dent your
vehicle or fall over and cause personal injury. 6
● Do not use the jack on a sloping or soft surface.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause personal
injury. Always use the jack on a flat, hard surface.
Before setting the jack, ensure there are no sand or
pebbles under the jack base.

6-25
 For emergencies
3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange portion (B) fits in 4. Insert the jack bar (D) into the wheel nut wrench (E).
the groove (C) at the top of the jack. Then set the end of the bar to the shaft’s jack end, as
shown in the illustration.
Slowly turn the wheel nut wrench connected to the jack
until the tyre is raised slightly off the ground.

! WARNING
6 ● Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the tyre is
raised off the ground. It is dangerous to raise the
vehicle any higher.
● Do not get under your vehicle while using the jack.
● Do not jolt the raised vehicle or leave it sitting on the
jack for a long time. This is very dangerous.
● Do not use other jacks except the one that came with
your vehicle.
● The jack should not be used for any purpose other
than to change a tyre.

6-26
 For emergencies
6. Wipe off any mud, etc. on the hub surface (F), hub bolts
! WARNING (G) or in the installation holes (G) in the wheel, and then
● No one should be in your vehicle when the jack is in mount the spare tyre.
use.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
on the jack.
● Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyres still on the
ground could turn and make your vehicle fall off the
jack.

5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench and
then take the wheel off.

! CAUTION
● Handle the wheel carefully when changing the tyre
to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

6-27
 For emergencies
7. Turn the wheel nuts clockwise by hand to initially tighten
! WARNING them.
● Be sure align the tyres correctly mounting them on
[On vehicles with steel wheels]
the vehicle. The valves should be on the outer side of
• Normal wheel and compact spare wheels
the vehicle. If the valve (I) cannot be seen, the tyre
Initially tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered part (A)
has been mounted the wrong way around.
of the nuts lightly touches the wheel hole seats (B)
If tyres are mounted the wrong way around, the
enough to keep the tyre from wobbling.
vehicle’s driving characteristics will be impaired,
Tighten the wheel nuts in the same way with a compact
increasing the accident risk.
spare wheel.

6-28
 For emergencies
[On vehicles with aluminium wheels] • Steel wheel and compact spare wheel
• Normal wheel For compact spare wheels, initially tighten the wheel
For normal tyres, initially tighten the wheel nuts until nuts until the tapered area (A) of the nuts lightly touches
the wheel nut flange area (C) touches the wheel enough the wheel hole seat area (B) enough to keep the tyre
to keep the tyre from wobbling. from wobbling.

! CAUTION
● Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or the nuts 6
or they will tighten too much.

NOTE
● Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the steel wheel,
but return to the original wheel and tyre as soon as possi-
ble.
● If all four aluminium wheels are changed to steel wheels,
e. g. when fitting winter tyres, use tapered nuts.

6-29
 For emergencies
8. Lower the vehicle slowly by rotating the wheel nut 9. Then tighten the nuts in the order shown in the illustration
wrench anticlockwise until the tyre touches the ground. until each nut has been tightened to the torque listed here.
Tightening torque 88 ˜ 108 N·m
(Achieved by applying force of 350 to 520 N at end of
wheel nut wrench supplied with vehicle)

6 ! CAUTION
● Never use your foot or a pipe extension to exert
extra force on the wheel nut wrench. If you do so,
you will overtighten the nut.

6-30
 For emergencies
10. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, install it.
Refer to “Wheel covers” on page 6-35. ! CAUTION
11. Retract and remove the jack, and then store the jack, flat ● After changing the tyre and driving the vehicle
tyre and chock. Have your damaged tyre repaired as soon about 1000 km (600 miles), retighten the wheel nuts
as possible. to ensure they have not come loose.
12. Check your tyre inflation pressure at the next gas station. ● If the steering wheel vibrates when driving after
The correct tyre pressures are shown on the door label. changing the tyre, we recommend you have the tyres
See the illustration. checked to determine whether they are properly bal-
If the vehicle is not equipped with the door label, refer to anced.
“Tyre inflation pressures” on page 8-18 for the correct ● Do not mix one type of tyre with another or use a
tyre pressure. different size from the one listed. This will cause pre-
mature wear and poor handling.

! CAUTION
● The compact spare wheel is for temporary use only
when the standard tyre is damaged. Repair the dam-
aged tyre as soon as possible and use it to replace the
compact spare tyre.

6-31
 For emergencies

To store the spare wheel 2. Lift up the tyre hanger (A) and hang it on the hook (B).
E00803700078

On vehicles with a compact spare wheel

1. Place the tyre on the centre of the tyre hanger, with the
wheel surface facing upwards.

! CAUTION
● Storing the tyre with the wheel surface facing down
may damage the wheel or tyre hanger. If you find
any damage on a spare tyre, do not use the tyre and
contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Serv-
ice Point.

! CAUTION
● Do not attach the hook to any part of the tyre hanger
other than the correct position. Otherwise the hook
could damage the vehicle body, or the tyre could fall
off while driving and cause an accident.
6

6-32
 For emergencies
3. Open the lower gate. On vehicles with a standard spare wheel
Refer to “Tailgate: To open” on page 1-49. 1. Put the tyre on the spare tyre hanger with the wheel sur-
4. Tighten the tyre hanger installation bolt securely by turn- face facing downwards.
ing it clockwise with the wheel nut wrench.

! CAUTION
● After storing the spare wheel, check that the tyre
hanger is securely locked in place. If the tyre hanger 6
is not securely locked in place, it could come loose
and fall while you are driving and cause an accident.
● When separating the tyre hanger from the hook or
hanging it back on the hook, hold the tyre hanger
carefully so that it does not drop on your feet.

5. Install the tyre hanger installation bolt cover.

6-33
 For emergencies
2. Install the chain on the spare tyre hanger. 4. Turn the wheel nut wrench until the tyre is secure and the
chain is tight. Do not over tighten.

3. Open the lower gate.

Refer to “Tailgate: To open” on page 1-49.
! CAUTION
● After storing the spare wheel, check that the spare
tyre hanger is securely locked in place.
If the spare tyre hanger is not securely locked in
6 place, it could become loose and fall off while you
are driving and cause an accident.

NOTE
● Overtightening the nut can damage the gear, resulting in
the gear not winding up the chain.

6-34
 For emergencies
5. Install the cover (A). Wheel covers*
E00801300315

To remove
Wrap the tip of the jack bar with a cloth, insert it deeply into
the notch provided in the wheel cover, and pry the cover away
from the wheel. Using the same procedure at the other wheel
cover notches, work the wheel cover away from the wheel to
remove it completely.

To store the tools and jack

E00803800037

Reverse the removing procedure for storing the jack, jack bar
and wheel nut wrench.
Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 6-14.
6
! CAUTION
● Removing the cover with your hands may cause
injury to the fingers.

NOTE
● The wheel cover is made of plastic. Pry it loose carefully.

6-35
 For emergencies

To install 2. Align the tyre valve stem (C) with the cut out area (D) in
1. Make sure the tabs (A) of the back of the wheel cover are the wheel cover.
not broken and correctly fitted on the rings (B). If in
doubt, do not install the wheel cover and consult your
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Servise Point.

NOTE
● There is a symbol (E) on the back of the wheel cover indi-
cating the cut out area.

6-36
 For emergencies

3. Push the underside (F) of the wheel cover into the wheel.
Towing
E00801501835
4. Gently push both sides (G) of the wheel cover and hold it
in place with both knees. If your vehicle needs to be towed
5. Gently push around the top (H) of the wheel cover. If you need to tow your vehicle, we recommend that you con-
tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point or
tow truck company.
In the following cases, transport the vehicle using a tow truck.
● The engine runs but the vehicle does not move or emits an
abnormal noise.
● Inspection of the vehicle’s underside reveals that oil or
some other fluid is leaking.
If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to pull out the vehicle
with other means than a professional towing service.
Please contact your authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.
Only when towing by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
Service Point or commercial tow truck service is not available,
resort to towing your vehicle with great care and in accordance
with the instructions given in “Emergency towing” in this sec-
tion.
Towing regulations may differ from country to country. It is
6
recommended that you obey the regulations of the area where
you are driving your vehicle.

6-37
 For emergencies

Towing the vehicle with a tow truck

! CAUTION
● This vehicle must not be towed by a tow truck using
sling-lift equipment (Type A) as illustrated. Using a
sling lift will damage the bumper and front end.
● Do not tow 4WD vehicles with the front or rear
wheels on the ground (Type B or Type C) as illus-
trated. This could result in damage to the drive train
Do not tow 4WD vehicles in this manner. or the vehicle may jump off the lifting frame.
If you tow 4WD vehicles, use Type D or E equip-
ment.
● The 4WD vehicle must not be towed with only the
front or rear tyres on the ground even if it is set to
Do not tow 4WD vehicles in this manner. “2WD” drive mode.
● [For 2WD vehicles equipped with the Active Stabil-
ity Control (ASC)]
If the vehicle is towed with the ignition switch in the
“ON” position and only the front or only the rear
wheels raised off the ground, the traction control
system (TCL) might operate, resulting in an acci-
6 dent. When towing the vehicle with the front wheels
raised, keep the ignition switch in the “LOCK” or
“ACC” position. When towing the vehicle with the
rear wheels raised, keep the ignition switch in the
“ACC” position.

6-38
 For emergencies

Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type B) If your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle
Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position. 1. The front towing hook (A) is located as shown in the illus-
Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position and secure the tration. Secure the tow rope to the front towing hook.
steering wheel in the straight-ahead position with a rope or tie-
down strap. Never place the ignition switch in the “LOCK”
position when towing.
Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type C)
Release the parking brake.
Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position.
Emergency towing
If a towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehi-
cle may be temporarily towed using a rope secured to the tow-
ing hook.
Pay careful attention to the following points if your vehicle is
towed by another vehicle or if your vehicle tows another vehi-
cle.

NOTE
● Do not use the tie-down hook (B) for towing. This hook is
provided only for the purpose of transporting the vehicle
itself.
Using any part other than the designated towing hook (A) 6
could damage the vehicle body.

6-39
 For emergencies
● Using a wire rope or metal chain can result in damage to 2. Keep the engine running.
the vehicle body. It is best to use a non-metallic rope. If If the engine is not running, turn the ignition switch to the
you use a wire rope or metal chain, wrap it with cloth at “ACC” or “ON” position to unlock the steering wheel.
any point where it touches the vehicle body.
● Ensure that the tow rope is kept as horizontal as possible.
An angled tow rope can damage the vehicle body.
! WARNING
● When the engine is not running, the brake booster
and power steering pump do not operate. This
means that a greater brake pedal depression force
and greater steering effort are required. Vehicle
operation is therefore more difficult than usual.

! CAUTION
● Do not turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion or remove the ignition key from the ignition
switch while driving. The steering wheel will lock,
causing loss of control.

3. Place the gearshift lever into the “N” (Neutral) position

(M/T) or the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
6 tion (A/T or CVT).
4. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if required by law.
(Follow the local driving laws and regulations)
5. During towing, ensure the drivers of both vehicles main-
tain close contact and the vehicles travel at low speeds.

6-40
 For emergencies

If your vehicle tows another vehicle

! WARNING 1. Take out the towing hook, wheel nut wrench and jack bar.
● Avoid sudden braking, acceleration and steering Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 6-14.
wheel movements; since such actions could cause 2. Cover the end of the jack bar (C) with cloth and use it to
damage to the towing hook or towing rope. remove the lid from the rear bumper.
People in the vicinity could be injured as a result.
● When being towed down a long slope, the brakes
may overheat, thereby reducing their effectiveness.
Have your vehicle transported by a tow truck.

! CAUTION
● When a vehicle with A/T or CVT is towed by
another vehicle with the all wheels on the ground,
make sure that the towing speed and distance given
below are never exceeded, in order to avoid damage
to the transmission.
Towing speed: 40 km/h (25 mph)
Towing distance: 40 km
For the towing speed and the towing distance, follow
the local driving laws and regulations. 6

6-41
 For emergencies
3. Use the wheel nut wrench (D) to securely attach the tow- NOTE
ing hook. ● Do not tow a vehicle heavier than your own vehicle.

4. Always attach the towing rope to the towing hook. Other-

wise, the instructions are the same as for “When being
towed by another vehicle”.
5. After towing remove the towing hook and store it in the
specified location.
6 Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 6-14.
When installing the bumper lid, align the hook with the
cut out area in the vehicle, and firmly insert.

6-42
 For emergencies

Operation under adverse driving conditions On a snow-covered or frozen road

E00801701420 ● The use of snow tyres or tyre chains is recommended for
driving on snow and ice.
On a flooded road Refer to the “Snow tyres” and “Tyre chains” sections.
● Avoid flooded roads. Water could enter the brake discs, ● Avoid high-speed driving, sudden acceleration, sudden
resulting in temporary loss of brake performance. In such
braking, and sharp turns.
cases, depress the brake pedal lightly to check whether the ● Depressing the brake pedal while travelling on snowy or
brakes are operating properly. If they are not, depress the icy roads may cause tyre slippage and skidding. Tyre slip
pedal lightly several times while driving in order to dry
results when tyres loose their to grip of the road surface.
the brake pads. This may make it more difficult to stop the vehicle with
● When driving in rain or on a road with many puddles, a normal braking operations. For vehicles with an anti-lock
layer of water may form between the tyres and the road
brake system (ABS), firmly depress and hold down the
surface. brake pedal.
This will reduce a tyre’s frictional resistance on the road, ● Keep a larger distance than normal between your vehicle
resulting in a loss of steering stability and braking capabil-
and the vehicle in front of you and avoid sudden braking.
ity.
On a bumpy or rutted road
To cope with this, observe the following items: Drive as slowly as possible when driving on bumpy or rutted
(a) Drive your vehicle at a slow speed. roads.
(b) Do not drive on worn tyres.
(b) Always maintain the specified tyre inflation pres- ! CAUTION
sures. ● The impact on tyres and/or wheels when driving on 6
a bumpy or rutted road can damage the tyre and/or
wheel.

6-43
Vehicle care

Vehicle care precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 2

Cleaning the interior of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .7- 2
Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . .7- 4

7
 Vehicle care

Vehicle care precautions Cleaning the interior of your vehicle

E00900100362 E00900200116

In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, it is necessary to After cleaning the interior of your vehicle with water, cleaner
perform regular maintenance using the proper procedures. or similar, wipe and dry in a shady, well-ventilated area.
Always maintain your vehicle in compliance with any environ-
mental pollution control regulations.
Carefully select the materials used for washing, etc., to be sure
! CAUTION
that they do not contain corrosives. ● Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosine,
If in doubt, we recommend you to consult a specialist for the alcohol, petrol, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
selection of these materials. These chemicals can cause discolouring, staining or
cracking of the surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure
! CAUTION their ingredients do not include the substances men-
● Cleaning products can be dangerous. Always follow tioned above.
the instructions of the cleaning product supplier.
● To avoid damage, never use the following to clean
your vehicle.
Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and flocked parts
E00900300159
• Petrol 1. Gently wipe off with a sponge, gauze or other soft cloth
• Paint Thinner soaked with a 3% aqueous solution of neutral detergent.
• Benzine 2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out well. Using this
• Turpentine cloth, wipe off the detergent thoroughly.
• Naphtha
• Lacquer Thinner NOTE
• Carbon Tetrachloride ● Do not use the cleaners, conditioners, and protectants con-
• Nail Polish Remover taining silicons or waxed.
7 • Acetone Such products may cause annoying reflections and
obscure vision.

7-2
 Vehicle care

Upholstery ● Dirty genuine leather seat may mildew. Be very careful

E00900500076 about oil stains and remove them quickly.
1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle, handle the ● The genuine leather surface may harden and shrink if it is
upholstery carefully and keep the interior clean. exposed to direct rays of the sun for long hours. When
Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the seats. If your vehicle is parked, place it in the shade as much as
stained, vinyl and synthetic leather should be cleaned with possible.
an appropriate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be cleaned with ● When the temperature of the vehicle interior rises in sum-
either upholstery cleaner or a 3% aqueous solution of neu- mer, vinyl products left on the genuine leather seat may
tral detergent in lukewarm water. deteriorate and stick to the seat.
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner and remove
any stains with carpet cleaner. Oil and grease can be
removed by lightly dabbing with a clean colourfast cloth
and stain remover.
Genuine leather*
E00900600211

1. Gently wipe off with gauze or other soft cloth soaked with
a 5% aqueous solution of neutral detergent for wool.
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out well. Using this
cloth, wipe off the detergent thoroughly.
3. Apply leather protecting agent to the genuine leather sur-
face.
NOTE
● If genuine leather is wet with water or is washed in water,
wipe off water as quickly as possible with a dry, soft cloth.
● Slight stains on genuine leather may be removed with 7
leather cleaner as well.
● The genuine leather surface may be damaged if a nylon
brush or synthetic fibre is rubbed hard against it.
● Organic solvents such as benzine, alcohol and petrol, acid
or alkaline solvents may discolour the genuine leather sur-
face. Be sure to use neutral detergents.

7-3
 Vehicle care

Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle ! CAUTION

E00900700108

If the following is left on your vehicle, it may cause corrosion, ● If your vehicle has a an automatic wiper system with
discolouration and stains, wash the vehicle as soon as possible. rain sensor, place the wiper switch lever in the “”
● Seawater, road deicing products. (OFF) position to deactivate the rain sensor before
● Soot and dust, iron powder from factories, chemical sub- washing the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will oper-
stance (acids, alkalis, coal-tar, etc.). ate if water sprays onto the windscreen and may get
● Droppings from birds, carcasses of insects, tree sap, etc. damaged as a result.
● Refrain from excessively using a car wash as its
Washing brushes may scratch the paint surface, causing it to
E00900901181
lose its gloss. Scratches will be especially visible on
Chemicals contained in dirt and dust picked up from the road darker coloured vehicles.
surface can damage the paint coat and body of your vehicle if ● Never spray or splash water on the electrical compo-
left in prolonged contact. nents in the engine compartment. Doing so could
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to protect your have an adverse effect on the engine’s startability.
vehicle from such damage. It will also help protect it from Also exercise caution when washing the underbody.
environmental conditions such as rain, snow, salt air, etc. Be careful not to spray any water into the engine
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the vehicle in compartment.
the shade and spray it with water to remove any dust. Next, use ● Some types of hot-water washing equipment apply
an ample amount of clean water and a car washing brush or high pressure and heat to the vehicle. This may
sponge to wash the vehicle from top to bottom. cause heat distortion and damage the vehicle’s plas-
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinse thoroughly tic parts, allowing flooding the vehicle’s interior.
and wipe dry with a soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, care- Therefore,
fully clean the joints and flanges of the doors, bonnet and other • Maintain a distance of approx. 40 cm or more
sections, where dirt is likely to remain. between the vehicle body and the washing nozzle.
7 • When washing around door windows, hold the
! CAUTION nozzle at a distance of more than 50 cm and at a
● Wear a pair of rubber gloves to avoid cuts and inju- right angle to the glass surface.
ries when washing the underside of your vehicle or
the wheels.

7-4
 Vehicle care

Waxing
! CAUTION E00901000469
● When using an automatic car wash, pay attention to Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the adherence of dust and
the following points and refer to the operation man- road chemicals to the paintwork. Apply a wax solution after
ual or consult the car wash operator. Your vehicle washing the vehicle, or at least once every three months to
may be damaged if the following instructions are not assist displacing of water.
followed. Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. You should wax
• Retract the outside mirrors. after the surfaces have cooled.
• Remove the antenna.
• Secure the wiper arms in place with tape.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a rear spoiler or
! CAUTION
roof rails, consult a car wash operator before using ● Waxes containing high abrasive compounds should
the car washer. not be used. Such waxes remove rust and stain effec-
• If your vehicle has an automatic wiper system with tively from the paintwork but they are harmful to
rain sensor, place the wiper switch lever in the “” the lustre of the painted surface.
(OFF) position to deactivate the rain sensor. Further, they are harmful to glossy surfaces such as
grille, garnish, mouldings, etc.
● Do not use petrol or paint thinners to remove road
During cold weather tar or other contamination to the painted surface.
Salt and other chemicals spread onto roads in some areas dur- ● Do not apply wax to sections that have a black mat
ing winter can harm the vehicle’s body. You should therefore paint coating, as doing so could cause uneven discol-
wash the vehicle as often as possible in accordance with our ouration, spots or stains.If wax gets on such areas,
care instructions. It is advisable to have a protective agent wipe it off using lukewarm water and a soft cloth.
applied and the underfloor protection checked before and after ● On vehicles with the sunroof, be careful when wax-
the cold weather season. ing the area around the sunroof opening, not to put
After washing your vehicle, wipe off all waterdrops from the any wax on the weatherstrip (black rubber). If 7
rubber parts around the doors to prevent the doors from freez- stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot maintain
ing. a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
NOTE
● The weatherstrips on the doors, bonnet, etc. should be
treated with silicone spray to prevent them from freezing.

7-5
 Vehicle care

Polishing Cleaning plastic parts

E00901100066 E00901300358

The vehicle should only be polished if the paintwork has Use a sponge or chamois leather.
become stained or lost its lustre. Do not polish parts with a mat If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough surface of the
coating and the plastic bumpers. Doing so could cause stains or bumper, moulding or lamps, the surface becomes white. In
damage the finish. such a case, wipe it off using lukewarm water and soft cloth or
chamois leather.
Damaged paint
CAUTION
E00901200054

Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat should be touched !

up as soon as possible with MITSUBISHI touch-up paint to ● Do not use a scrubbing brush or other hard tools as
prevent corrosion. they may damage the plastic part surface.
Check body areas facing the road or the tyres carefully for ● Do not use wax containing compound (polishing
damage to the paint caused by gravels, etc. The paint code powder) which may damage the plastic part surface.
number for your vehicle can be found on the vehicle informa- ● Do not bring the plastic parts into contact with gaso-
tion code plate in the engine compartment. line, light oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases, paint
thinners, and sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte)
which may crack, stain or discolour the plastic
parts.
If they touch the plastic parts, wipe them off with
soft cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous solu-
tion of neutral detergent then immediately rinse the
affected parts with water.

Chrome parts
7 E00901400098

In order to prevent spots and corrosion of chrome parts, wash

with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a special protective coat-
ing. This should be done more frequently in winter.

7-6
 Vehicle care

Aluminium wheels* Window glass

E00901500347 E00901600117

1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprinkling water on the The window glass can normally be cleaned using only a
vehicle. sponge and water.
2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that cannot be removed Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil, grease, insect car-
easily with water. casses, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it dry with a clean,
Rinse off the neutral detergent after washing the vehicle. dry, soft cloth. Never use a cloth that is used for cleaning a
3. Dry the vehicle thoroughly using a chamois leather or a painted surface to clean a window. Wax from the painted sur-
soft cloth. face could get on the glass and lower glass transparency and
visibility.
! CAUTION NOTE
● Do not use a brush or other hard implement on the ● To clean the inside of the rear window, always use a soft
wheels. cloth and wipe the window glass along the demister heater
Doing so could scratch the wheels. element so as not to cause damage.
● Do not use any cleaner that contains an abrasive
substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing so could Wiper blades
E00901700062
cause the coating on the wheels to peel or become
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease, dead
discoloured or stained.
insects, etc., from the wiper blades. Replace the wiper blades
● Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
when they no longer wipe properly. (Refer to page 8-24.)
cleaner or by any other means.
● Contact with seawater and road deicer can cause Cleaning the sunroof*
corrosion. Rinse off such substances as soon as pos- E00902200035

sible. Use a soft cloth to clean the inner side of the sunroof. Hard
deposits should be wiped away with a cloth dipped in warm,
neutral detergent solution. Wipe away the solution with a 7
sponge dipped in fresh water.
NOTE
● The surface treatment on the inside of the glass may be
removed if hard cloth or organic solvent (benzine, thinner,
etc.) is used.

7-7
 Vehicle care

Engine compartment
E00902100308

Clean the engine compartment at the beginning and end of

winter. Pay particular attention to flanges, crevices and periph-
eral parts where dust containing road chemicals and other cor-
rosive materials might collect.
If salt and other chemicals are used on the roads in your area,
clean the engine compartment at least every three months.
Never spray or splash water on the electrical components in the
engine compartment, as this may cause damage.
Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic parts and so on into
contact with sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
crack, stain or discolour them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, chamois or the
like and an aqueous solution of neutral detergent then immedi-
ately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water.

7-8
Maintenance

Service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 2

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 3
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 3
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 6
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 9
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 12
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 12
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 13
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 14
Tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 18
Parking brake break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 24
Wiper blade rubber replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 24
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 27
For cold and snowy weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 28
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 28
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 29
Replacement of lamp bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 40

8
 Maintenance

Service precautions ! WARNING

E01000100474

Adequate care of your vehicle at regular intervals serves to pre- ● Be extremely cautious when working around the
serve the value and appearance as long as possible. battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulphu-
Maintenance items as described in this owner’s manual can be ric acid.
performed by the owner. ● Do not get under your vehicle with just the body
We recommend you to have the periodic inspection and main- jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack
tenance performed by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised stands.
Service Point or another specialist. ● Improper handling of components and materials
In the event a malfunction or a problem is discovered, we rec- used in the vehicle can endanger your personal
ommend you to have it checked and repaired. This section con- safety. We recommend you to consult a specialist for
tains information on inspection maintenance procedures that necessary information.
you can do yourself. Follow the instructions and cautions for
each of the various procedures.

! WARNING
● When checking or servicing the inside of the engine
compartment, make sure the engine is switched off
and has had a chance to cool down.
● If it is necessary to do work in the engine compart-
ment with the engine running, be especially careful
that your clothing, hair, etc., does not become caught
by the fan, drive belts, or other moving parts.
● The fan can turn on automatically even if the engine
is not running. Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position to be safe while you work in the
engine compartment.
8 ● Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
around fuel or battery. The fumes are flammable.

8-2
 Maintenance

Catalytic converter Bonnet

E01000200765 E01000301226

The exhaust gas scavenging devices used with the catalytic

converter are extremely efficient for the reduction of noxious To open
gases. The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust sys- 1. Pull the release lever towards you to unlock the bonnet.
tem.
It is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure LHD (Left-hand drive)
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

! WARNING
● As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this
vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as
dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot
exhaust, since a fire could occur.
● Undercoating paint should not be applied to the cat-
alytic converter.

NOTE
● Use fuel of the type recommended in “Fuel selection” on
page 2.

8-3
 Maintenance
2. Raise the bonnet while pressing the safety catch.
RHD (Right-hand drive)

NOTE
● Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in the parked
position. In any other position, the wipers could damage
the paint or bonnet.

8-4
 Maintenance
3. Support the bonnet by inserting the support bar in its slot. To close
1. Unlatch the support bar and clip it in its holder.
2. Slowly lower the bonnet to a position 30 cm above the
closed position, then let it drop.
3. Make sure the bonnet is securely locked by slightly lifting
the centre of the bonnet.

! CAUTION
● Be aware that the support bar may disengage from
the bonnet, if the open bonnet is lifted by a strong
wind.
● After inserting the support bar into the slot, make NOTE
sure the bar supports the bonnet securely to avoid ● If this does not close the bonnet, release it from a slightly
the risk of the bonnet falling down on your head or higher position.
body. ● Do not press down firmly on the bonnet as doing so could
damage it.

! CAUTION 8
● Be careful to avoid trapping your hands or fingers
when closing the bonnet.

8-5
 Maintenance

Engine oil 3000 models

E01000401256
MIN. MAX.
To check and refill engine oil
Petrol-powered vehicles

2400 models
MIN. MAX.

Diesel-powered vehicles

2000 models
Min. Max.

8-6
 Maintenance
7. If the oil level is below the specified limit, remove the cap
2200 models located on the cylinder head cover and add enough oil to
raise the level to within the specified range. Do not over-
fill to avoid engine damage. Ensure you use the specified
engine oil and do not mix various types of oil.
8. After adding oil, close the cap securely.
9. Confirm the oil level by repeating steps 4 to 6.

NOTE
● For checking the oil level on 3000 models, pull the dip-
stick straight out and control the oil level by inspecting the
upper surface of the dipstick.
● Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced by the vehi-
cle’s laden weight, engine speed, etc. It may reach 1.0
The engine oil that is used has a significant effect on the L/1,000 km depending on the driving style.
engine’s performance, service life and startability. Ensure oil of ● The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the vehicle is
the recommended quality and appropriate viscosity is used. subjected to severe conditions, requiring earlier oil
All engines consume a certain amount of oil during normal replacement.
operation. Therefore, it is important to check the oil level at Please refer to the maintenance schedule.
regular intervals and before starting a long trip. ● For information on disposal of used engine oil, pl. refer to
page 8.
1. Park the vehicle on a flat, horizontal surface.
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Wait a few minutes.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth.
5. Reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go.
6. Remove the dipstick and read the oil level, which should
always be within the specified range. 8

8-7
 Maintenance

Recommended engine oil viscosity NOTE

● The use of additives is not recommended since they may
Petrol-powered vehicles reduce the effectiveness of additives already included in
the engine oil. Doing so may cause mechanical assembly
failure.
Diesel-powered vehicles
Use engine oil in accordance with the following classifi-
cation:
• 2000 models
· “VW 50501/50601”
• 2200 models
· “TOTAL ACTIVA INEO ECS 5W-30”
· “TOTAL QUARTZ INEO ECS 5W-30”
· “TOTAL ACTIVA 7000 10W-40”
· “TOTAL QUARTZ 7000 10W-40”
· “TOTAL ACTIVA 9000 5W-40”
· “TOTAL QUARTZ 9000 5W-40”
● Select an engine oil with the correct SAE viscosity
number according to the atmospheric temperature.
NOTE
● The use of additives is not recommended since they may
SAE 0W-30, 5W-30, and 5W-40 engine oils can only be reduce the effectiveness of additives already included in
used if they meet ACEA A3/B3, A3/B4 or A5/B5 and API the engine oil. Doing so may cause mechanical assembly
SG (or higher) specifications. failure.
● Use engine oil in accordance with the following classifi-
cation:
• API classification: “For service SG” or higher
• ILSAC certified oil
• ACEA classification:
8 “For service A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, or A5/B5”

8-8
 Maintenance

Engine coolant Diesel-powered vehicles

E01000500986

To check the coolant level

A transparent coolant reserve tank (A) is located in the engine
compartment. FULL
The coolant level in this tank should be kept between the
“LOW” and “FULL” marks when measured while the engine is
cold.
LOW
Petrol-powered vehicles

FULL

LOW

8-9
 Maintenance

To add coolant (Petrol-powered vehicles) Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosion agent, the cool-
The cooling system is a closed system and normally the loss of ant must not be replaced with plain water even in summer. The
coolant should be very slight. A noticeable drop in the coolant required concentration of anti-freeze differs depending on the
level could indicate leakage. If this occurs, we recommend you expected ambient temperature.
to have the system checked as soon as possible.
If the level should drop below the “LOW” level on the reserve Ambient tempera-
-15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -50
tank, open the lid and add coolant. ture (minimum) °C
Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty, remove the radia- Anti-freeze
30 35 40 45 50 60
tor cap (B) and add coolant until the level reaches the filler concentration %
neck.
! CAUTION
! WARNING ● Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-freeze or any
● Do not open the radiator cap (B) while the engine is engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol
hot. The coolant system is under pressure and any anti-freeze. The use of an improper anti-freeze can
hot coolant escaping could cause severe burns. cause corrosion of the aluminium components.
● For effective anti-corrosion and anti-freeze per-
formance, keep the anti-freeze concentration within
Anti-freeze the range of 30 to 60%.
The engine coolant contains an ethylene glycol anti-corrosion Concentrations exceeding 60% will result in a
agent. The cylinder head and water pump housing are cast alu- reduction of both the anti-freeze and cooling per-
minium alloy, and periodic changing of the engine coolant is formance thus adversely affecting the engine.
necessary to prevent corrosion of these parts. ● Do not top up with water only.
Use “DIA QUEEN SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT” or Water by itself reduces the rust-protective and anti-
equivalent. freeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boil-
MITSUBISHI Genuine Coolant has excellent protection ing point. It can also cause damage to the cooling
against corrosion and rust formation of all metals including system if it should freeze. Do not use tapwater, as it
aluminium and can avoid blockages in the radiator, heater, cyl- can cause corrosion and rust formation.
8
inder head, engine block, etc.

8-10
 Maintenance

During cold weather To add coolant (diesel-powered vehicles)

If the temperatures in your area drop below freezing, there is The cooling system is a closed system and normally the loss of
the danger that the coolant in the engine or radiator could coolant should be very slight. A noticeable drop in the coolant
freeze and cause severe damage to the engine and/or radiator. level could indicate leakage. If this occurs, we recommend you
Add a sufficient amount of anti-freeze to the coolant to prevent to have the system checked as soon as possible.
it from freezing. If the level should drop below the “LOW” level on the reserve
The engine coolant mixture used at the factory provides protec- tank, open the lid and add coolant.
tion against freezing for temperatures as low as approximately
-30 °C. The concentration should be checked before the start of
cold weather and anti-freeze added to the system if necessary.
! WARNING
● Do not open the reserve tank cap (C) while the
engine is hot. The coolant system is under pressure
and any hot coolant escaping could cause severe
burns.

Anti-freeze
The engine coolant contains an ethylene glycol anti-corrosion
agent. The cylinder head and water pump housing are cast alu-
minium alloy, and periodic changing of the engine coolant is
necessary to prevent corrosion of these parts.
Use “BASF Glysantin Alu Protect Premium /G30” or equiva-
lent.
This coolant has excellent protection against corrosion and rust
formation of all metals including aluminium and can avoid
clogs in the radiator, heater, cylinder head, engine block, etc.
Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosion agent, the cool-
ant must not be replaced with plain water even in summer. 8

8-11
 Maintenance

Washer fluid Brake fluid/Clutch fluid*

E01000700539 E01000800543

Open the washer fluid reservoir cap and check the level of Brake fluid and clutch fluid share a reservoir tank.
washer fluid with the dipstick.
If the level is low, replenish the container with washer fluid. To check the fluid level

EMPTY

FULL

NOTE The fluid level must be between the “MAX” and “MIN” marks
● The washer fluid container serves the windscreen, rear on the reservoir.
window and headlamp washers (if so equipped). The fluid level is monitored by a float. When the fluid level
falls below the “MIN” mark, the brake fluid warning lamp
During cold weather lights up.
To ensure proper operation of the washers at low temperatures, The fluid level will fall slightly as the brake pads wear, but this
use a fluid containing an anti-freezing agent. does not indicate any abnormality.

8 The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when carry-

ing out other work under the bonnet. The brake system should
also be checked for leaks at the same time.

8-12
 Maintenance
If the fluid level falls markedly in a short length of time, it may Power steering fluid
indicate a leak in the brake system. E01001100439
If this occurs, we recommend you have the vehicle checked.
Fluid type
Use brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT4 from a sealed
container. Brake fluid is hygroscopic. Too much moisture in
the brake fluid will adversely affect the brake system, causing a
reduction in performance.

! CAUTION
● Exercise care when handling brake fluid as it will
harm your eyes and may also damage painted sur-
faces.
● Use the specified brake fluid only.
Do not mix or add different brands of brake fluid to
prevent chemical reactions.
Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, mix To check the fluid level
with, or get into the brake fluid. Check the fluid level in the reservoir while the engine is idling.
This will damage the seals. Make sure that the power steering fluid level is always between
● Keep the reservoir tank cap closed except during the “MAX” and “MIN” level markings on the fluid reservoir
maintenance to prevent the brake fluid from deteri- and top up the fluid, if necessary.
orating.
● Clean the filler cap before removal and close the cap Recommended fluid
securely after maintenance. Use “Genuine MITSUBISHI Power Steering Fluid” or “ATF
DEXRON III / DEXRON II”.

8-13
 Maintenance

Battery Checking the battery electrolyte level

E01001201381

The condition of the battery is very important for quick starting

of the engine and proper functioning of the vehicle’s electrical
system. Regular inspection and care are especially important in
cold weather.
NOTE
● When replacing the battery, the electronic control system
data for the engine, automatic transmission, etc., will be
erased. As a result, shift shocks may occur.
Shift shocks will become smoother after several changes
in speed.
● Memory data for settings input by the user may be erased
when the battery is replaced. If this happens, input the set-
tings again using the relevant procedures.
The electrolyte level must be between the specified limit on the
outside of the battery. Replenish with distilled water as neces-
sary.
The inside of the battery is divided into several compartments;
remove the cap from each compartment and fill to the upper
mark. Do not top up beyond the upper mark because spillage
during driving could cause damage.
Check the electrolyte level at least once every four weeks,
depending on operating conditions.
If the battery is not used, it will discharge by itself over the
course of time.
Check it once every four weeks and charge with low current
8 when required.

8-14
 Maintenance

During cold weather

Type A
The capacity of the battery is reduced at low temperatures. This
is an inevitable result of its chemical and physical properties.
This is why a very cold battery, particularly one that is not fully
charged will only deliver a fraction of the starter current which
is normally available.
We recommend you have the battery checked before cold
weather starts and, if necessary, have it charged or replaced.
This does not only ensure reliable starting, but a battery which
is kept fully charged also has a longer life.
Disconnection and connection
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine, first discon-
nect the negative (-) terminal and then the positive (+) terminal.
When connecting the battery, first connect the positive (+) ter-
minal and then the negative (-) terminal.
Type B
NOTE
● Open the terminal cover (A) before disconnecting or con-
necting the positive (+) terminal of the battery.
● Loosen the nut (B), and then disconnect the battery cable
from the positive (+) terminal.

8-15
 Maintenance

! WARNING ! CAUTION
● Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from the ● Keep it out of the reach of children.
battery as it could explode. ● Never disconnect the battery when the ignition
● The battery electrolyte is extremely caustic. Do not switch is in the “ON” position. Doing so could dam-
allow it to come into contact with your eyes, skin, age electric components.
clothing, or the painted surfaces of the vehicle. ● Never short-circuit the battery. This could cause it
Spilled electrolyte should be flushed immediately to overheat and damage to it.
with ample amounts of water. ● If the battery is going to be quick-charged, discon-
Seek medical assistance immediately in the event of nect the battery cables first.
eye or skin irritation caused by contact with electro- ● In order to prevent a short circuit, ensure the nega-
lyte. tive (-) terminal is disconnected first.
● Ventilate when charging or using the battery in an ● Always wear protective eye goggles when working
enclosed space. near the battery.
● Do not allow sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) to
spill onto car parts as it may crack, stain or discol-
our them.
If plastic parts come into contact with such sub-
stances, wipe them off with a soft cloth, chamois or
an equivalent soaked in a solution of water and a
neutral detergent. Then rinse the affected parts with
water immediately.

NOTE
● Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is connected,
apply terminal protection grease. Use lukewarm water to
clean the terminals.
8 ● Check that the battery is securely installed and cannot
move during travel. Also check that each terminal is
tightly secured.

8-16
 Maintenance
● When the vehicle is left unused for a long period of time,
remove the battery and store it in a place where the battery
fluid will not freeze. The battery should be stored in a
fully charged condition only.

8-17
 Maintenance

Tyres
E01001300255

! WARNING
● Driving with tyres that are worn, damaged or
improperly inflated can lead to loss of control, tyre
blow-out etc. and cause a collision involving serious
or fatal injuries.

Tyre inflation pressures

E01001401468

Up to 5 passengers Up to Max. load At trailer towing

Item Tyre size
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
2.2 bar (32 PSI) [220 kPa]
215/70R16 100H 2.2 bar (32 PSI) [220 kPa] 2.3 bar (33 PSI) [230 kPa]
2.5 bar (36 PSI) [250 kPa]*
Normal tyre
225/55R18 98V 2.2 bar (32 PSI) [220 kPa]
2.2 bar (32 PSI) [220 kPa] 2.4 bar (35 PSI) [240 kPa]
P225/55R18 97H 2.5 bar (36 PSI) [250 kPa]*
Compact
T155/90D16 110M 4.2 bar (60 PSI) [420 kPa] —
spare tyre
*: Above 160 km/h (100 mph)
Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value.
After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put rubber caps on the
valves.
8

8-18
 Maintenance

Wheel condition When replacement of any of the tyres is necessary, replace all
E01001800465 of them.

! CAUTION
● Always use tyres of the same size, same type, and
same brand, and which have no wear differences.
Using tyres of defferent size, type, brands or degree
of wear, will increase the differential oil tempera-
ture, resulting in possible damage to the driving sys-
tem. Further, the drive train will be subjected to
excessive loading, possibly leading to oil leakage,
component seizure, or other serious faults.

Replacing tyres and wheels

E01007200243

1- Location of the tread wear indicator ! CAUTION

2- Tread wear indicator ● Avoid using different size tyres from the one listed
and the combined use of different types of tyres, as
Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other damage. Replace the
this can affect driving safety.
tyres if there are deep cuts or cracks. Also check each tyre for
Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on page 9-12.
pieces of metal or pebbles.
● Even if a wheel has the same rim size and offset as
The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous because of the
the specified type of wheel, its shape may prevent it
greater chance of skidding or hydroplaning. The tread depth of
from being fitted correctly. We recommend you to
the tyres must exceed 1.6 mm in order for the tyres to meet the
consult a specialist before using wheels that you
minimum requirement for use.
have.
Tread wear indicators will appear on the surface of the tyre as
the tyre wears, thereby indicating that the tyre no longer meets 8
the minimum requirement for use. When these wear indicators
appear, the tyres must be replaced with new ones.

8-19
 Maintenance

Tyre rotation
E01001900974
Spare tyre used
Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions, road surface condi-
tions and individual driver’s driving habits. To equalize the
wear and help extend tyre life, it is recommended that you
rotate the tyres immediately after discovery of abnormal wear, Front
or whenever the wear difference between the front and rear
tyres is recognisable.
When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear and damage.
Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tyre pressure,
improper wheel alignment, out of balance wheels, or severe
braking. We recommend you have the vehicle checked to Spare tyre not used
determine the cause of irregular tread wear.

Front

Tyres with arrows showing rotation direction

Front

8-20
 Maintenance

! CAUTION ! CAUTION
● A compact spare tyre can be fitted temporarily in ● If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating the correct
place of a tyre that has been removed during the direction of rotation, swap the front and rear wheels
tyre rotation. However, it must not be included in on the left hand side of the vehicle and the front and
the regular tyre rotation sequence. rear wheels on the right hand side of the vehicle sep-
arately. Keep each tyre on its original side of the
vehicle. When fitting the tyres, make sure the
arrows point in the direction in which the wheels
will turn when the vehicle moves forward. Any tyre
whose arrow points in the wrong direction will not
perform to its full potential.

Front

8-21
 Maintenance

Tyre chains
! CAUTION E01002101185

● Avoid the combined use of different types of tyres. If tyre chains have to be used, ensure they are only fitted to the
Using different types of tyres can affect vehicle per- drive wheels (front) and in accordance with the manufacturer’s
formance and safety. instructions.
On 4WD vehicles in which the driving power is distributed
preferentially to the front wheels, ensure that the tyre chains
Snow tyres are fitted on the front.
E01002000754

The use of snow tyres is recommended for driving on snow and Only use tyre chains that have been designed for use with the
ice. To preserve driving stability, mount snow tyres of the same tyres mounted on the vehicle: using the incorrect size or type of
size and tread pattern on all four wheels. chain could damage the vehicle body.
A snow tyre that is worn down more than 50% is no longer Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point
appropriate to use. before putting on tyre chains. The maximum chain height is as
Snow tyres which do not meet specifications must not be used. follows.

Max. chain height

! CAUTION Tyre size Wheel size
[mm]
● Observe the maximum permissible speed for your
18 x 7.0 J
snow tyres as well as the legal speed limit. 225/55R 18
18 x 7.0 JJ 9 mm
215/70R 16 16 x 6.5 JJ
NOTE
● The laws and regulations concerning snow tyres (driving When driving with tyre chains on the tyres, do not drive faster
speed, required use, type, etc.) vary. Find out about and than 50 km/h. When you reach roads that are not covered in
observe the laws and regulations applicable in the area in snow, immediately remove the tyre chains.
which you are driving.
● If flange nuts are used on your vehicle, change to tapered
nuts when steel wheels are used.
! CAUTION
● Practise fitting the chains before you actually need
8 to use them. Do not expect any help from other peo-
ple in cold weather.

8-22
 Maintenance

NOTE
! CAUTION ● Laws and regulations concerning the use of tyre chains
● Choose a clear, straight stretch of road where you vary. Always follow local laws and regulations.
can pull off and still be seen while you are fitting the The law in most countries prohibits the use of tyre chains
chains. on snow-free roads.
● Do not fit chains before you actually need them. This
will wear out your tyres as well as the road surface.
● After driving around 100 - 300 metres, stop and
retighten the chains.
● Drive carefully and do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph).
Remember, fitting chains is not going to stop acci-
dents from happening.
● When tyre chains are fitted, ensure they do not dam-
age the wheel disc or body.
● Do not fit a tyre chain on a compact spare wheel. If
one of the front wheels has punctured, replace it
with one of the rear wheels and install the compact
spare wheel in that position before fitting a tyre
chain.
● An aluminium wheel can be damaged by a tyre
chain while the vehicle is in motion. When fitting a
tyre chain on an aluminium wheel, ensure that no
part of the chain and fitting can come into contact
with the wheel disc.
● Remove the wheel covers before fitting a tyre chain,
otherwise they may be damaged by the tyre chain.
(See page 8-22.)
● When fitting or removing a tyre chain, ensure that
hands and other parts of your body are not injured 8
by the sharp edges of the vehicle body.

8-23
 Maintenance

Parking brake break-in Wiper blade rubber replacement

E01008300049 E01002600327

Break-in the parking brake linings whenever the brake per-

formance of the parking brake is insufficient or whenever the Windscreen wiper blades
parking brake linings and/or discs are replaced, in order to 1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.
assure the best brake perfomance. 2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A) disengages from
This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and the hook (B). Pull the wiper blade further to remove it.
can be carried out by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
Service Point.

NOTE
● Do not let the wiper arm drop onto the windscreen. This
could damage the glass.

8-24
 Maintenance
3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper blade. 5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) engages securely
Refer to the illustration to ensure that the retainers are cor- with the stopper (A).
rectly aligned as you attach them.

4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, starting with the oppo-
site end of the blade from the stopper. Make sure the hook
(B) is fitted correctly in the grooves in the blade.
8
NOTE
● If a retainer is not supplied with the new wiper blade, use
the retainer from the old blade.

8-25
 Maintenance

Rear window wiper blades 4. Firmly insert the retainer (C) into the groove (D) in the
1. Lift the wiper arm off the window glass. wiper blade.
2. Pull the wiper blade downward to disengage it from the Refer to the illustration to ensure that the retainers are cor-
stopper (A) at the end of the wiper arm. Pull the wiper rectly aligned as you insert them into the groove.
blade further to remove it.
3. Slide a new wiper blade through the hook (B) on the wiper
arm.

NOTE
● Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the windows glass;
it could damage the glass.
NOTE
● If a retainer is not supplied with the new wiper blade, use
8 the retainer from the old blade.

8-26
 Maintenance

General maintenance Meter, gauge and indicator/warning lamps

E01002700344 operation
Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas leakage Start the engine and check the operation of all instruments,
Look under the body of your vehicle to check for fuel, engine gauges and indicator and warning lamps.
coolant, oil and exhaust gas leaks. If there is anything wrong, we recommend you to have your
vehicle inspected.
! WARNING Hinges and latches lubrication
● If you see a suspicious fuel leak or if you smell fuel, Check all latches and hinges, and, if necessary, have them
do not operate the vehicle; call your MITSUBISHI lubricated.
MOTORS Authorised Service Point for assistance.

Exterior and interior lamp operation

Operate the combination lamp switch to check that all lamps
are functioning properly.
If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable cause is a blown
fuse or defective lamp bulb. Check the fuses first. If there is no
blown fuse, check the lamp bulbs.
For information regarding the inspection and replacement of
the fuses and the bulbs, refer to “Fuses” on page 8-29 and
“Replacement of lamp bulbs” on page 8-40.
If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, we recommend you to have
your vehicle checked and repaired.

8-27
 Maintenance

For cold and snowy weather Fusible links

E01002800361 E01002900476

The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if a large current

Ventilation slots attempts to flow through certain electrical systems.
The ventilation slots in front of the windscreen should be In case of a melted fusible link, we recommend you to have
brushed clear after a heavy snowfall to avoid impairing opera- your vehicle inspected.
tion of the heating and ventilation systems. For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse load capacity” on
Weatherstripping page 8-34.
To prevent freezing of the weatherstrips on the doors, bonnet,
etc., they should be treated with silicone spray. ! WARNING
● Fusible links must not be replaced by any other
Additional equipment device. Failing to fit the correct fusible link may
It is a advisable to carry a shovel or a short-handled spade in
result in fire in the vehicle, property destruction and
the vehicle during winter so that you can clear away snow if
serious or fatal injuries at any time.
you get stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping snow off
the vehicle and a plastic scraper for the windscreen and rear
window are also useful.

8-28
 Maintenance

Fuses 1. Open the personal box and pull to remove it.

E01003001745

Fuse block location

Each individual circuit is equipped with a fuse to prevent dam-
age to the electrical system caused by short-circuiting or over-
loading.
There are fuse blocks in the passenger compartment and in the
engine compartment.
Passenger compartment (LHD vehicles)
The fuse block in the passenger compartment is located behind
the personal box in front of the driver’s seat at the position
shown in the illustration.

8
A - Main fuse block
B - Sub fuse block

8-29
 Maintenance
2. To put back the personal box, line up the personal box Passenger compartment (RHD vehicles)
hook (C) with the clamp (D) on the instrument panel and The fuse block in the passenger compartment is located behind
push the box back in. the lower glove box at the position shown in the illustration.

A - Main fuse block

B - Sub fuse block

8-30
 Maintenance
Main fuse block 2. Move the rod (A) on the left side of the lower glove box to
1. Open the lower glove box. the left side of the box.

8-31
 Maintenance
3. While pressing the side of the lower glove box, unhook 4. Remove the lower glove box fastener, and then remove
the left and right hooks (B) and lower the lower glove the lower glove box.
box.

8-32
 Maintenance
Sub fuse block Engine compartment
1. Remove the cover from the bottom of the glove box. In the engine compartment, the fuse block is located as shown
in the illustration.

1- Push the knob.

2- Remove the cover.

8-33
 Maintenance

Fuse load capacity

E01007700091
Passenger compartment fuse location (LHD)
The fuse capacity and the names of electrical systems protected
by the fuses are indicated on the inside of the personal box
(LHD vehicles), the inside of the lower glove box (RHD vehi-
cles) and the inside of the fuse block cover (inside of the
engine compartment). Main fuse block Sub fuse block
Passenger compartment fuse location table
NOTE
● Spare fuses are provided on the lid of fuse box in the
engine compartment. Always use a fuse of the same
capacity for replacement.

8-34
 Maintenance

Passenger compartment fuse location (RHD) No. Symbol Electrical system Capacities
1 Heater 30 A*
Main fuse block Stop lamps
2 15 A
(Brake lamps)
3 Rear fog lamp 10 A
4 Windscreen wipers 30 A
5 Option 10 A
6 Door locks 20 A
7 Radio 15 A
8 Control unit relay 7.5 A
Interior lamps
9 15 A
(Room lamps)
10 Hazard warning flasher 15 A

Sub fuse block 11 Rear window wiper 15 A

12 Instruments 7.5 A
Cigarette lighter/
13 15 A
Accessory socket
14 Ignition switch 10 A
15 Sunroof 20 A
16 Outside rear-view mirrors 10 A 8
17 4-wheel drive system 10 A

8-35
 Maintenance

No. Symbol Electrical system Capacities Engine compartment fuse location table
Reversing lamps Engine compartment fuse location
18 7.5 A
(Backup lamps)
19 Accessory socket 15 A
20 Electric window control 30 A*
21 Rear window demister 30 A*
22 Heated door mirror 7.5 A
23 AC power supply 15 A
24 Power seats 25 (20) A
25 Seat heater 30 A

*: Fusible link
● Depending on the vehicle model or specifications, some
fuses may not be installed on your vehicle.
● The table above shows the main equipment corresponding Behind of the fuse block cover
to each fuse.

8-36
 Maintenance

No. Symbol Electrical system Capacities No. Symbol Electrical system Capacities
1 Front fog lamps 15 A Headlamp low
19 Halogen 10 A
beam (right)
2 Engine 7.5 A
20 ENG/POWER 10 A
3 Automatic transmission 20 A
21 Ignition coil 10 A
4 Horn 10 A
22 ENG/POWER 20 A
5 Alternator 7.5 A
23 Fuel pump 15 A
6 Headlamp washer 20 A
24 Starter 30 A*
7 Air conditioning 10 A
25 — — —
8 ETV 15 A 26 Anti-lock braking system 40 A*
9 Security horn 20 A 27 Anti-lock braking system 30 A*
10 Wiper deicer 15 A Air conditioning condenser
28 30 A*
11 — — — fan motor
12 Electric tailgate 30 A 29 Radiator fan motor 40 A*

13 Daytime running lamps 10 A 30 IOD IOD 30 A

14 Headlamp high beam (left) 10 A 31 Audio system amp 30 A

15 Headlamp high beam (right) 10 A 32 Diesel 30 A

Headlamp low 33 — Spare fuse 10 A

16 Discharge 20 A
beam (left) 34 — Spare fuse 15 A

17
Headlamp low
Discharge 20 A
35 — Spare fuse 20 A 8
beam (right)
*: Fusible link
Headlamp low
18 Halogen 10 A
beam (left)

8-37
 Maintenance
● Depending on the vehicle model or specifications, some Identification of fuse
fuses may not be installed on your vehicle.
● The table above shows the main equipment corresponding 7.5 A Brown
to each fuse. 10 A Red
The fuse box does not contain spare fuses of 7.5 A, 25 A and 15 A Blue
30 A. If one of these fuses burns out, substitute with the fol- 20 A Yellow
lowing fuse.
7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse 25 A Natural (White)
25 A: 20 A spare fuse 30 A Green (fuse type) / Pink (fusible link type)
30 A: 30 A audio system amp fuse
40 A Green (fusible link type)
When using a substitute fuse, replace with a fuse of the correct
capacity as soon as possible. Fuse replacement
E01007800063

1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the electrical cir-

cuit concerned and place the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position.

8-38
 Maintenance
2. Remove the fuse puller (A) from the inside of the fuse box 3. Referring to the fuse load capacity table, check the fuse
in the engine compartment. pertaining to the problem.

B - Fuse is OK
C - Blown fuse
NOTE
● If any system does not function but the fuse corresponding
to that system is normal, there may be a fault in the system
or elsewhere. We recommend you have your vehicle
checked.

8-39
 Maintenance
4. Use the fuse puller to insert a new fuse of the same capac- Replacement of lamp bulbs
ity. Make sure you insert the fuse into the same location in E01003100488
the fuse block. Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is off. Do not touch
the glass part of the new bulb with your bare fingers; the skin
oil left on the glass will evaporate when the bulb gets hot and
the vapour will condense on the reflector and dim the surface.

! CAUTION
● Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after being
turned off.
When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool sufficiently
before touching it. You could otherwise be burnt.

NOTE
● If you are unsure of how to carry out the work as required,
we recommend you to consult a specialist.
● Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body when removing
a lamp or lens.
! CAUTION ● When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the
● If the newly inserted fuse blows again after a short inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy. This is the
time, we recommend you have the electrical system same phenomenon as when window glass mists up on a
checked in order to find the cause and rectify it. humid day, and does not indicate a functional problem.
● Never use a fuse with a larger capacity than speci- When the lamp is switched on, the heat will remove the
fied or a substitute (such as a cable or foil). Doing so fog. However, if water gathers inside the lamp, we recom-
could cause the circuit wires to overheat and create mend you to have the lamp checked.
a fire.
8

8-40
 Maintenance

Bulb capacity
E01003200157

When replacing a bulb, use a new bulb with the same wattage
and colour.
Outside
E01003301546

7- High mounted stop lamp

8- Rear turn-signal lamps: 21 W (WY21W)
9- Rear fog lamp (driver’s side): 21 W (W21W)
10- Tail lamps / Stop lamps
11- Reversing lamps: 21 W (W21W)
12- License plate lamps: 5 W (W5W)
1- Headlamps (high beam): 60 W (HB3) Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.
2- Position lamps: 5 W (W5W)
3- Headlamps (low beam)
Halogen: 51 W (HB4) ! WARNING
High intensity discharge: 35 W ● Always consult a specialist when repairing or
4- Front fog lamps*: 55 W (H11) replacing the bulbs of high intensity discharge head-
5- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (WY21W) lamps. 8
6- Side turn-signal lamps: 5 W This is because the power circuit, bulbs and elec-
trodes generate a high voltage that could cause an
Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types. electric shock.

8-41
 Maintenance

NOTE Inside
● An LED, not a bulb, is used in the stop lamp/tail lamp and E01003401026

high mounted stop lamp. Contact a MITSUBISHI

MOTORS Authorised Service Point when there is a need
for repair or replacement.
● For the side turn-signal lamp, it is not possible to repair or
replace just the bulb.
Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service
Point when there is a need for repair or replacement.

1- Luggage room lamp: 8 W

2- Room lamp (rear): 8 W
3- Map & room lamps (front): 8 W
4- Foot lamps*: 1.4 W
5- Centre console footwell lamp
6- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W
NOTE
● An LED, not a bulb, is used in the centre console footwell
lamp. Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
Service Point when there is a need for repair or replace-
8 ment.

8-42
 Maintenance

Headlamps 2. Turn the bulb (B) anticlockwise and remove it.

E01003500945

Replacement of low beam (halogen lamp type)

1. When replacing the bulb on the left side of the vehicle in
the case of 2000 models, 2200 models and 3000 models,
remove the bolt (A) holding down the relay box and move
the relay box toward the rear of the vehicle.

3. While holding down the tab (C), pull out the socket (D).

8-43
 Maintenance
4. To install a bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. Replacement of low beam lamp
(high intensity discharge lamp type)
! CAUTION
● Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care. The gas inside ! WARNING
a halogen lamp bulb is highly pressurised, so drop- ● Always consult a specialist for repairing or replac-
ping, knocking, or scratching a halogen lamp bulb ing the bulbs of high intensity discharge headlamps.
can cause it to shatter. This is because the power circuit, bulbs and elec-
● Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with bare hands, trodes generate a high voltage that could cause an
dirty gloves, etc. electric shock.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are switched on.
If the glass surface is dirty, it must be cleaned with Replacement of high beam lamp
E01007100154
alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and refit it after drying 1. When replacing the bulb on the right side of the vehicle,
thoroughly. remove the bolt (A) fastening the washer fluid reservoir
spout and move the spout towards the rear.

8-44
 Maintenance
2. While holding down the tab (B), pull out the socket (C).
! CAUTION
● Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care. The gas inside
a halogen lamp bulb is highly pressurised, so drop-
ping, knocking, or scratching a halogen lamp bulb
can cause it to shatter.
● Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with bare hands,
dirty gloves, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are switched on.
If the glass surface is dirty, it must be cleaned with
alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and refit it after drying
thoroughly.

3. Turn the bulb (D) anticlockwise and remove it.

8-45
 Maintenance

Position lamps 2. To ensure that you have enough space to work, pull out
E01003700468 the socket (B) while pushing down on the tab (C) of the
1. When replacing the bulb on the right side of the vehicle, headlamp (high beam) (D).
remove the bolt (A) fastening the washer fluid reservoir
spout and move the spout towards the rear.

8-46
 Maintenance
3. Turn the position lamp socket (E) anticlockwise and 4. Remove the bulb from the socket.
remove it.

5. To install a bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

NOTE
● Securely install the headlamp (high beam) socket after
replacing the bulb.

8-47
 Maintenance

Front turn-signal lamps 2. Remove the bulb from the socket.

E01003800401

1. Turn the socket (A) anticlockwise and remove it.

3. To install a bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

8-48
 Maintenance

Side turn-signal lamps 2. Insert a minus screwdriver or other object into the clip
E01003900213 groove to wedge out the six clips (B) toward the vehicle
For the side turn-signal lamp, it is not possible to repair or body, then remove the front bumper under cover.
replace just the bulb.
Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point
when there is a need for repair or replacement.
Front fog lamps*
E01004000761

1. Remove the five bolts (A) from the front bumper under
cover.

8-49
 Maintenance
3. Remove the cover below the fog lamp that you intend to 4. When replacing the bulb on the left side of the vehicle,
replace. take off the duct (if so equipped) by removing the 2 bolts
Insert a minus screwdriver into the clip groove on the (D).
cover pry wedge out the clips (C) towards the vehicle
body, then remove the cover.

8-50
 Maintenance
5. While holding down the tab (F), pull out the socket (G).
! CAUTION
● On vehicles equipped with an oil cooler (E), make
sure you do not put pressure on the oil cooler when
replacing the fog lamp bulb. Otherwise you might
injure yourself or damage the oil cooler.

6. Turn the bulb (H) anticlockwise and remove it.

8-51
 Maintenance
7. To install a bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. Rear fog lamp (driver’s side)
E01004100254

! CAUTION 1. Open the lower gate and pull back the cover between the
passenger compartment and the lower gate.
● Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care. The gas inside 2. Unfasten each of the 4 clips (A) of the cover by inserting a
a halogen lamp bulb is highly pressurised, so drop- screw driver into the clip groove and prying them toward
ping, knocking, or scratching a halogen lamp bulb the vehicle body. Then, remove the cover.
can cause it to shatter.
● Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with bare hands,
dirty gloves, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the fog lamps are operated.
If the glass surface is dirty, it must be cleaned with
alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and refit it after drying
thoroughly.

8-52
 Maintenance
3. Remove the lamp mounting screws (B) and remove the 4. Remove the socket and bulb assembly (C) together by
lamp unit. turning it anticlockwise, and then remove the bulb by
pulling it out.

8-53
 Maintenance
5. To install a bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. Rear combination lamps
E01004200620
NOTE 1. Remove the screws (A) and then remove the lamp unit.
● For mounting the lamp unit align the pins (G) on the unit
with the holes in the body.

8-54
 Maintenance
2. Turn the socket anticlockwise and remove it. 3. Remove the bulb from the socket.

B - Stop lamps/tail lamps (LED) - Cannot be replaced.

C - Rear turn-signal lamps
NOTE
● An LED, not a bulb, is used in the stop lamp/tail lamp.
Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service
Point when there is a need for repair or replacement.

8-55
 Maintenance
4. To install a bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. Reversing lamps
E01004400101
NOTE 1. Open the tailgate.
● For mounting the lamp unit align the holes in the unit with 2. Use a minus screwdriver with its blade covered in a cloth
the pins (G) on the vehicle body. or another suitable tool and insert it into the cut out area of
the cover to wedge out the cover.

8-56
 Maintenance
3. Turn the socket (A) anticlockwise and remove it. 5. To install a bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
High mounted stop lamp
E01004500261

NOTE
● An LED, not a bulb, is used in the high mounted stop
lamp.
Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service
Point when there is a need for repair or replacement.
License plate lamps
E01004600464

1. Press the lamp unit (A) to the left side of the vehicle and
remove it.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket.

8-57
 Maintenance
2. Use a minus screwdriver with its blade covered in a cloth 3. Remove the bulb from the socket.
or another suitable tool to press the hook (B) aside and
remove the lens.

8-58
 Maintenance
4. To install a bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. Map & room lamps (front)
E01005000045
NOTE
● When installing the lamp unit, first insert the end of tab 1. Use a minus screwdriver with its blade covered in a cloth
(C) and then tab (D). or another suitable tool to prise out the lens.

NOTE
● When replacing the bulb, put the map & room lamp
(front) switch in the OFF position.

8-59
 Maintenance
2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out the bulb. 3. To install a bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
NOTE
● When installing the lens, align the hooks (B) with the
holes in the vehicle body.

8-60
 Maintenance

Room lamp (rear) / luggage room lamp 2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out the bulb.
E01005300208

1. Use a minus screwdriver with its blade covered in a cloth

or another suitable tool and insert it into the cut out area of
the lens and wedge it off.

NOTE
● When replacing the bulb, put the room lamp (rear) / lug-
gage area lamp switch in the “OFF” position.

8-61
 Maintenance
3. To install a bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. Foot lamps*
E01008600055
NOTE 1. Use a minus screwdriver with its blade covered in a cloth
● When installing the lens, align the hooks (B) with the or another suitable tool and insert it into the cut out area of
holes in the vehicle body. the cover to wedge off the cover.

8-62
 Maintenance
2. Remove the bulb. Glove box lamp
E01006100203

1. Turn the socket (A) anticlockwise and remove it.

3. To install a bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

8-63
 Maintenance
2. Remove the bulb. Centre console footwell lamp
E01008700072

NOTE
● An LED, not a bulb, is used in the centre console footwell
lamp. Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
Service Point when there is a need for repair or replace-
ment.

3. To install a bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

8-64
Specifications

Vehicle labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 2

Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 5
Vehicle performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 7
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 8
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 10
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 11
Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 12
Fuel consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 13
Notes regarding diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 14
Refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 15

9
 Specifications

Vehicle labeling 2-Vehicle information code plate

E01100101687 The vehicle information code plate is riveted in the location
shown in the illustration.
The plate shows the model code, engine model, transmission
model and body colour code, etc.
Please use this number when ordering replacement parts.

1-Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number is stamped on the bulkhead
as shown in the illustration.

1- Model code
2- Engine model code
3- Transmission model code
4- Body colour code
5- Interior code
6- Option code
7- Exterior code

9
9-2
 Specifications

Vehicle identification number plate Engine number

(RHD vehicles only) The engine number is stamped on the engine cylinder block as
This is stamped on the number plate riveted to the front left shown in the illustration.
corner of the instrument panel pad. It is visible from the outside
of the vehicle through the windscreen. 2000 models

2200 models

9
9-3
 Specifications

2400 models

3000 models

*: Front of the vehicle

9
9-4
 Specifications

Vehicle dimensions
E01100201343

1 Front track 1,540 mm

2 Overall width 1,800 mm
3 Front overhang 965 mm
4 Wheel base 2,670 mm
5 Rear overhang 1,005 mm
6 Overall length 4,640 mm
2000 models 205 mm, 178 mm*
Ground clearance 2200 models 176 mm*
7
(unladen) 2400 models,
215 mm
3000 models
*: Vehicles with DPF 9
9-5
 Specifications

8 Overall height With roof rails 1,680 mm

9 (unladen) With roof rails 1,720 mm
10 Rear track 1,540 mm
Body 5.65 m
Minimum turning radius
Wheel 5.3 m

9
9-6
 Specifications

Vehicle performance
E01100301142

2000 models 187 km/h (116 mph)

2200 models 200 km/h (124 mph)
Maximum speed
2400 models 190 km/h (118 mph)
3000 models 200 km/h (124 mph)

9
9-7
 Specifications

Vehicle weight
E01100402371

2000 models 2200 models

5 persons 7 persons
Item
Without Without 5 persons 7 persons
With DPF With DPF
DPF DPF
Without optional parts 1,660 kg 1,655 kg 1,700 kg 1,695 kg 1,695 kg 1,735 kg
Kerb weight
With full optional parts 1,742 kg 1,737 kg 1,767 kg 1,762 kg 1,777 kg 1,802 kg
Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,360 kg, 2,460 kg* 2,410 kg, 2,510 kg*
Front 1,150 kg
Maximum axle weight
Rear 1,300 kg, 1,440 kg*
With brake 2,000 kg
Maximum towable weight
Without brake 750 kg
Maximum trailer-nose weight 100 kg
Maximum roof load 80 kg
*: In case of trailer towing

9
9-8
 Specifications

2400 models
5MT CVT
Item 3000 models
2WD 4WD
5 persons 7 persons 5 persons 7 persons
Without optional parts 1,490 kg 1,555 kg 1,595 kg 1,585 kg 1,625 kg 1,645 kg
Kerb weight
With full optional parts 1,572 kg 1,637 kg 1,662 kg 1,667 kg 1,692 kg 1,722 kg
2,350 kg,
Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,290 kg, 2,370 kg*
2,430 kg*
Maximum axle Front 1,150 kg
weight Rear 1,300 kg, 1,440 kg*
Maximum towable With brake 1,500 kg 1,600 kg
weight Without brake 750 kg
Maximum trailer-nose weight 75 kg 80 kg
Maximum roof load 80 kg
*: In case of trailer towing
NOTE
● Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation.

9
9-9
 Specifications

Engine specifications
E01100601350

Item 2000 models 2200 models 2400 models 3000 models

Engine model BSY 4HN 4B12 6B31
No. of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line 4 in line 6-V (60°)
Total displacement 1,968 cc 2,179 cc 2,360 cc 2,998 cc
Bore 81.0 mm 85.0 mm 88.0 mm 87.6 mm
Stroke 95.5 mm 96.0 mm 97.0 mm 82.9 mm
Camshaft Double overhead Double overhead Double overhead Single overhead
Mixture preparation Unit injection Electronic injection Electronic injection Electronic injection
Maximum output (EEC net) 103 kW/4,000 rpm 115 kW/4,000 rpm 125 kW/6,000 rpm 162 kW/6,250 rpm
Maximum torque (EEC net) 310 N·m/1,750 rpm 380 N·m/2,000 rpm 232 N·m/4,100 rpm 276 N·m/4,000 rpm

9
9-10
 Specifications

Electrical system
E01100801235

Item 2000 models, 2200 models 2400 models 3000 models

Voltage 12 V
Type (JIS) 95D31L (622CCA/159RC) 75D23L (520CCA/118RC) 80D26L (582CCA/133RC)
Battery
Capacity (5HR) 64Ah 52Ah 55Ah
Alternator capacity 140A 120A
NGK FR5EI ILKR7B8
Spark plug type __
DENSO K16PSR-B8 SXU22HDR8

9
9-11
 Specifications

Tyres and wheels

E01100901382

Item 2000 models, 2200 models, 2400 models 3000 models

Tyre 215/70R16 100H 225/55R18 98V 215/70R16 100H P225/55R18 97H*
16x6 1/2 JJ (Steel) 18x7 JJ (Aluminium) 18x7 JJ (Aluminium)*
Size 16x6 1/2 JJ (Aluminium)
Wheel 16x6 1/2 JJ (Aluminium) 18x7 J (Aluminium) 18x7 J (Aluminium)*
Offset 38 mm
*: Optional equipment

9
9-12
 Specifications

Fuel consumption
E01101100342

Extra urban
Combined Urban conditions
conditions
Item Fuel consumption Fuel consumption Fuel consumption
CO2 (g/km)
(L/100 km) (L/100 km) (L/100 km)
With DPF 180 6.8 8.7 5.8
2000 models
Without DPF 177 6.7 8.5 5.6
2200 models 191 7.2 9.5 5.9
2WD 220 9.2 12.4 7.4
5MT
2400 models 4WD 225 9.4 12.6 7.6
CVT 222 9.3 12.6 7.5
3000 models 252 10.6 15.1 8.0
NOTE
● The indicated results do not express or imply any guarantee concerning the fuel consumption of the particular vehicle.
The vehicle itself has not been tested and there are inevitably differences between individual vehicles of the same model. In
addition, this vehicle may incorporate particular modifications. Furthermore, the driver’s style and road and traffic conditions,
as well as the extent to which the vehicle has been driven and the standard of maintenance, will all affect its fuel consumption.

9
9-13
 Specifications

Notes regarding diesel fuel

E01101400055

Due to the separation of paraffin, the fluidity of the fuel

decreases considerably as the temperature falls. Because of this
fact there are two kinds of fuel: “summer” and “winter”.
This must be considered in winter use.
When travelling abroad, find out in advance about the fuels
served in local service stations.

9
9-14
 Specifications

Refill capacities
E01101301790

2000 models
LHD (Left-hand drive) RHD (Right-hand drive)

2200 models
LHD (Left-hand drive) RHD (Right-hand drive)

9
9-15
 Specifications

2400 models
LHD (Left-hand drive) RHD (Right-hand drive)

3000 models
LHD (Left-hand drive) RHD (Right-hand drive)

9
9-16
 Specifications

No. Item Quantity Lubricants

2000 Oil pan 3.7 litres
models Oil filter 0.3 litres
2200 Oil pan 5.0 litres
models Oil filter 0.3 litres
1 Engine oil Refer to page 8-6
2400 Oil pan 4.3 litres
models Oil filter 0.3 litres
3000 Oil pan 4.0 litres
models Oil filter 0.3 litres
Brake fluid
2 As required Brake fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4
Clutch fluid
3 Washer fluid 4.5 litres —
Genuine MITSUBISHI Power Steering Fluid or
4 Power steering fluid As required
ATF DEXRON III /DEXRON II
8.0 litres
2000 models [includes 0.62 litres in the BASF Glysantin Alu Protect Premium /G30
reserve tank]
8.0 litres
2200 models [includes 0.62 litres in the BASF Glysantin Alu Protect Premium /G30 or G33
reserve tank]
5 Engine coolant
7.5 litres
2400 models [includes 0.65 litres in the
reserve tank] DIA QUEEN SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT
9.5 litres or equivalent
3000 models [includes 0.65 litres in the 9
reserve tank]
9-17
 Specifications

No. Item Quantity Lubricants

Automatic transmission
8.2 litres DIA QUEEN ATF-J2
6 (3000 models)
CVT fluid (2400 models) 7.8 litres DIA QUEEN CVTF-J1
5 M/T 2.5 litres
2000
Manual 2.0 litres DIA QUEEN NEW MULTI GEAR OIL API classification
7 models
transmission oil 6 M/T GL-3 SAE 75W-80
2200
2.1 litres
models
8 Transfer oil 0.54 litres Hypoid gear oil API classification GL-5 SAE 90
9 Rear differential oil 0.5 litres Hypoid gear oil API classification GL-5 SAE 80
10 Refrigerant (air conditioning) 480 - 520 g HFC-134a

NOTE
● Items requiring routine inspection or replenishment such as the engine oil, coolant, brake/clutch fluid and washer fluid are
marked white for easy identification.

9
9-18
 Alphabetical index
Fluid 8-12, 9-17
A Parking brake 4-6
Accessory socket 5-119, 8-36 Bulb capacity 8-41
Accessory (Installation) 6
Active stability control (ASC) 4-63
C
Additional equipment 8-28 Capacities 9-17
Air conditioning Card holder 5-118, 5-129
Automatic air conditioning 5-7 Cargo loads 4-86
Important operation tips for the air conditioning 5-15 Catalytic converter 8-3
Air purifier 5-16 Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles 4-55
Airbag 2-55 Central door locking system 1-43
Antenna 5-75 Charge warning lamp 3-56
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 4-58 Chassis number 9-2
Automatic air conditioning 5-7 Check engine warning lamp 3-55
Automatic transmission Child restraint 2-42
Fluid 9-17 Child-protection rear doors 1-48
Selector lever operation 4-28, 4-38 Cigarette lighter 8-35
Selector lever position 4-40 Cleaning
Sports mode 4-32, 4-42 Exterior of your vehicle 7-4
Interior of your vehicle 7-2
B Plastic, vinyl leather, etc 7-2
Battery 8-14 Clock 5-76
Charge warning lamp 3-56 Clutch
Discharged battery (Emergency starting) 6-2 Fluid 8-12
Specification 9-11 Combination headlamps and dipper switch 3-60
Bonnet 8-3 Coolant (engine) 9-17
Brake Cruise control 4-68
Anti-lock brake 4-58 Cup holder 5-133
Braking 4-57

1
Alphabetical index
Exterior and interior lamp operation 8-27
D
Demister (rear window) 3-80
F
Dimensions 9-5 Fluid
Dipper (High/Low beam change) 3-64 Automatic transmission fluid 9-17
Doors Brake fluid 8-12, 9-17
Central door locking system 1-43 Clutch fluid 8-12
Child-protection 1-48 Engine coolant 9-17
Locking and unlocking 1-41 Power steering fluid 8-13, 9-17
Driving, alcohol and drugs 4-3 Washer fluid 8-12, 9-17
Fluid capacities and lubricants 9-17
E For cold and snow weather 8-28
Economical driving 4-2 Front fog lamps
Electric window control 1-56, 8-36 Bulb capacity 8-41
Electrical system 9-11 Replacement 8-49
Electronic immobiliser (Anti-theft starting system) 1-4 Switch 3-69
Electronically controlled 4WD system 4-47 Front room lamp 5-121
Emergency starting 6-2 Bulb capacity 8-42
Engine Front seat 2-6
Coolant 9-17 Front turn-signal lamps
MIVEC 4-21 Bulb capacity 8-41
Number 9-3 Replacement 8-48
Oil 8-6 Fuel
Oil and oil filter 9-17 Filling the fuel tank 3
Overheating 6-7 Fuel selection 2
Specifications 9-10 Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems 7
Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal Tank capacity 3
information 8 Fuel consumption 9-13
Engine specifications 9-10 Fuse links 8-28

2
 Alphabetical index
Fuses 8-29 Interior lamps 5-121, 8-35
G J
General maintenance 8-27 Jack 6-15
General vehicle data 9-5 Storage 6-14
Genuine parts 7 Jump starting (Emergency starting) 6-2
H K
Hazard warning flasher switch 3-69 Keyless entry system 1-6
Hazard warning indicator lamps 3-53 Keys 1-2
Head restraints 2-23
Headlamp levelling switch 3-65
L
Headlamps Labeling 9-2
Bulb capacity 8-41 Lamp reminder buzzer 3-64
Headlamp flasher 3-65 Leakage (Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas) 8-27
Replacement 8-43 Licence plate lamps
Switch 3-60 Bulb capacity 8-41
Heated mirror 4-14 license plate lamps
Heated seats 2-10 Replacement 8-57
Hinges and latches lubrication 8-27 Lubricants 9-17
Horn switch 3-81 Luggage hooks 5-140
I M
If the vehicle breaks down 6-2 Making a flat seat 2-31
Ignition switch 4-15 Manual transmission 4-25
Indicator lamps 3-53 Map lamps 5-123
Inside rear-view mirror 4-9 Bulb capacity 8-42
Inspection and maintenance following rough road Mirror
operation 4-55 Inside rear-view mirror 4-9

3
Alphabetical index
MIVEC engine 4-21
Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems 7
R
Rear combination lamps
N Bulb capacity 8-41
Notes regarding diesel fuel 9-14 Replacement 8-54
Rear differential oil 9-17
O Rear fog lamp
Oil Bulb capacity 8-41
Engine oil 8-6 Replacement 8-52
Rear differential oil 9-17 Switch 3-70
Transfer oil 9-17 Rear room lamp 5-121
Operation under adverse driving conditions 6-43 Bulb capacity 8-42
Outside rear-view mirrors 4-10 Rear turn-signal lamps
Overheating 6-7 Bulb capacity 8-41
Replacement 8-54
P Rear window demister switch 3-80
Parking 4-8 Rear-view mirror
Parking brake 4-6 Inside 4-9
Position lamps Replacement of lamp bulbs 8-40
Bulb capacity 8-41 Reversing lamps
Replacement 8-46 Bulb capacity 8-41
Power steering Replacement 8-54
Fluid 8-13, 9-17 Roof carrier precaution 4-88
System 4-63 Room lamp 5-121
Precautions to observe when using wipers and washers 3-79 Bulb capacity 8-42
Pregnant women restraint 2-40 Running-in recommendations 4-5
Puncture (Tyre changing) 6-17
S
Safe driving techniques 4-3

4
 Alphabetical index
Seat Bulb capacity 8-41
Adjustment 2-5 Replacement 8-54
Front seat 2-6 Sun visors 5-118
Head restraints 2-23 Supplemental restraint system 2-55
Making a flat seat 2-31 Servicing 2-73
Seat belt 2-34
Adjustable seat belt anchor 2-38
T
Child restraint 2-42 Tail lamps
Inspection 2-54 Bulb capacity 8-41
Pregnant women restraint 2-40 Replacement 8-54
Pre-tensioner 2-41 Tailgate 1-49
Rear seat belt storage 2-39 Tank capacity 3
Seats Tonneau cover 5-137
Seat heaters 2-10 Tools 6-15
Service precaution 8-2 Storage 6-14
Side turn-signal lamps Towing 6-37
Bulb capacity 8-41 Trailer towing 4-89
Replacement 8-49 Transfer oil 9-17
Snow tyres 8-22 Transmission
Spare wheel 6-19 Automatic transmission 4-27, 4-37
Spark plug 9-11 Manual transmission 4-25
Specifications 9-2 Turn-signal indicator lamps 3-53
Starting 1-25, 1-34, 4-19 Turn/Lane-change signals 3-68
Steering Tyres 8-18
Power steering fluid 8-13, 9-17 How to change a tyre 6-17
Power steering system 4-63 Inflation pressures 8-18
Steering wheel height adjustment 4-9 Rotation 8-20
Steering wheel lock 1-33, 4-18 Size (tyre and wheel) 9-12
Stop lamps Snow tyres 8-22

5
Alphabetical index
Tread wear indicators 8-19 Wiper
Tyre chains 8-22 Rear window 3-77
Wiper blades 8-24
U
Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal information 8
V
Vanity mirror 5-119
Vehicle care precautions 7-2
Vehicle dimensions 9-5
Vehicle identification number plate 9-3
Vehicle information code plate 9-2
Vehicle labeling 9-2
Vehicle performance 9-7
Vehicle weight 9-8, 9-9
Ventilators 5-2
W
Warning lamps 3-54
Washer
Fluid 8-12, 9-17
Switch 3-77
Washing 7-4
Waxing 7-5
Weatherstripping 8-28
Weight 9-8, 9-9
Wheel
Covers 6-35
Specification 9-12